Home

OpenOffice.org OpenOffice - 3.0 Getting Started Guide

1. Undo 1 action Figure 76 List of actions that can be undone After changes have been undone Redo becomes active To redo a change select Edit gt Redo or press Contro Y or click on the Redo icon As with Undo click on the triangle to the right of the arrow to get a list of the changes that can be reapplied To modify the number of changes OpenOffice org remembers select Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Memory and change Undo number of steps Be aware that asking OOo to remember more changes consumes more computer memory Formatting pages Writer provides several ways for you to control page layouts e Page styles e Columns e Frames e Tables e Sections For more information see Chapter 4 Formatting Pages in the Writer Guide Page layout is usually easier if you show text object table and section boundaries in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Tip Appearance and paragraph ends tabs breaks and other items in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Formatting Aids Which layout method to choose The best layout method varies depending on what the final document should look like and what sort of information will be in the document Here are some examples Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 103 For a book similar to this user guide with one column of text some figures without text beside them and some other figures with descriptive text use
2. ccc ccc ecesceccecceceecensensesseceecseceseees 26 Using the Open and Save AS idlOGS c cc cceccecceceeceneeseeseeeeeesees a7 Using the Navigator eessseessreesesseressesreresssseerersserreseseeeeeeseseseseseeee 28 OS iC a catcher ten gana EEE T A T E ET T 30 STE Open oh cere cs ie ete rrr Eenes TEEPEE TENEIS ETTEN ETIN EES 30 Chapter 2 Setting up OPENOPFFICE OFG cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 31 Choosing options for all of OOO sssssssesesesssreeesereesererereereererrereeseses 32 Choosing options for loading and saving document6 000 47 Choosing language settings scsceserseessserersereereessessesesseseesseseseeeees 92 Choosing Internet OPtiONns ccccececcecceccecencencenseceessecseceeceesessness DD Controlling OOo s AutoCorrect functions ssesessrsererserereererecrcees DD Chapter 3 Using Styles and TemplatesS secseccccccccsecseccecocccceccecsecseeseeceoe 57 Whati ateniplalt pasvaeiaecoersiiaotusdeawesaneasaauteaeunesaeiaeentainatainessaesnvacsnss 98 What are Sy FOS 0 penne panncosscoanusesnacateitaunnsaaiececayeaereosaesbarausteacantoanancessenedes 58 APPin OIylO et ea ea ae 60 Moding gio iid canner eee ee eee een eee ere oe eee ee ee eee ee era tere 62 Creating NEW CUSTOM STYIES c ce cceccecenceecencectecceceeceeceesenseesness 64 Copying and MOVING STYIE S cece eee cc esc eeceeesseeceeeceenceeeceenseeseeenee
3. Type of list contents List content ogl Native Tabletields Figure 214 Type of list contents dropdown list Type the following exactly as it is in the List contents box SELECT Type Type FROM Payment Type Ge neral Data Events Data Weide ee IBPayment Type of ist contents Sa List content Bound field SELECT Type Type FROM Payment Type Figure 215 List content for payment type fields 208 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 You should be able to copy and paste SELECT Type Type FROM Payment Type from above directly into the List content Tip box Just make sure you copy from the Sin SELECT to the double quotation mark after the phrase Payment Type and no more than this What you wrote is called an SQL command The words SELECT and FROM are written in capital letters because they are commands When the command SELECT is used it requires a field name within quotation marks and then the field s alias also Note within quotation marks In this case the field and its alias are the same The FROM command requires the name of the table which contains the field Single word table names do not require quotation marks but multiple word table names do e Repeat these steps for the payment fields for Lunch Supper Motel Snacks and Misc The main form should look like Figure 216 as far as where the controls are located It also Shows what the Note control should
4. Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 247 Creating tables in Design View Design View is a more advanced method for creating a new table It allows you to directly enter information about each field in the table We will use this method for the tables of our database Note While the Field type and formatting are different in Design View the concepts are the same as in the Wizard The first table to be created is Fuel Its fields are FuellD Date FuelCost FuelQuantity Odometer and PaymentType FuelCost uses currency and two decimal places FuelQuantity and Odometer use the number format with 3 decimal places and 1 decimal place respectively PaymentType uses the text format 1 Click Create Table in Design View 2 FuellD entries d Enter FuellD as the first Field Name e Select Integer INTEGER as the Field Type from the dropdown list The default setting is Text VARCHAR Shortcut for selecting from the Field Type dropdown list use the key for the first letter of the choice This might require using the letter more than once to get the choice you want You can cycle through the choices for a given letter by repeatedly using that letter After typing the name of the field in the Fields column use the Tab key to move to the Field Type column This will enter the field name and highlight the dropdown list You can then use the key for the first letter of your choice to select the field type Just remember to use it t
5. OpenOf ficeorg3 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 This PDF is designed to be read onscreen two pages at a time If you want to print a copy your PDF viewer should have an option for printing two pages on one sheet of paper but you may need to start with page 2 to get it to print facing pages correctly Print this cover page separately Alternatively you can download a free PDF of the printed edition or buy a low cost printed copy from http stores lulu com opendocument You can also download an editable odt version of this book from http oooauthors org en authors userguide3 published Copyright This document is Copyright 2005 2008 by its contributors as listed in the section titled Authors You may distribute it and or modify it under the terms of either the GNU General Public License version 3 or later or the Creative Commons Attribution License version 3 0 or later All trademarks within this guide belong to their legitimate Owners Authors Thomas Astleitner Agnes Belzunce Richard Detwiler Regina Henschel John Kane Michael Kotsarinis Ian Laurenson Alan Madden Andrew Pitonyak Iain Roberts Robert Scott Barbara M Tobias Linda Worthington Feedback Richard Barnes Daniel Carrera Spencer E Harpe Peter Hillier Brook Stefan A Keel Peter Kupfer Dan Lewis Michel Pinquier Carol Roberts Gary Schnabl Janet M Swisher Jean Hollis Weber Michele Zarri Please direct any comments o
6. 422 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Saving presentations In addition to OpenDocument formats odp otp and odg Impress 3 Can save in these formats OpenOffice org 1 x Presentation sxi OpenOffice org 1 x Presentation Template sti Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP ppt and pps Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP Template pot StarDraw StarImpress sda sdd and vor Unified Office Format presentation uop Impress can also export to MacroMedia Flash swf and any of the graphics formats listed for Draw Saving drawings Draw 3 can only save in the OpenDocument Drawing formats odg and otg the OpenOffice org 1 x formats sxd and std and StarDraw format sda sdd and vor However Draw can also export to BMP EMF EPS GIF JPEG MET PBM PCT PGM PNG PPM RAS SVG SVM TIFF WME and XPM Writer Web can save in these formats HTML document html and htm as HTML 4 0 Transitional OpenOffice org 1 0 HTML Template stw OpenOffice org 2 x HTML Template oth StarWriter Web 4 0 and 5 0 vor Text OpenOffice org Writer Web txt Text Encoded OpenOffice org Writer Web txt Frequently asked questions Is this software a demo No this is a fully functioning software suite version May I distribute OOo to Yes anyone How many computers may I As many as you like install it on May I sell it Yes Appendix B Background Information 423 May I
7. Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 165 2 Select Insert gt Manual Break 3 Select Row Break or Column Break depending on your need The break is now set Row break Selecting Row Break creates a page break above the selected cell For example if the active cell is H15 then the break is created between rows 14 and 15 Column break Selecting Column Break creates a page break to the left of the selected cell For example if the active cell is H15 then the break is created between columns G and H To see page break lines more easily on screen you can change Tip their color Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Appearance and scroll down to the Spreadsheet section Deleting a page break To remove a page break 1 Navigate to a cell that is next to the break you want to remove 2 Select Edit gt Delete Manual Break 3 Select Row Break or Column Break depending on your need The break is now removed Multiple manual row and column breaks can exist on the same page When you want to remove them you have to remove each one individually This may be confusing at times because although there may be a column break set on the page when you go to Edit gt Manual Break Column break may be grayed out In order to remove the break you have to be in the cell next to the break So for example if you set the column break while you are in H15 you can not remove it if you are in cell D15 However you can remove
8. Entering data directly to the spreadsheet cells uses the Data to Text icon as we did to make a table in a Writer document But differences exist in these two situations The steps are straightforward 1 Click the cell of the spreadsheet which you want to be the top left of your data including the column names 2 Use F4 to open the database source window and select the table whose data you want to use 3 Select the rows of data you want to add to the spreadsheet e Click the gray box to the left of the row you want to select if only selecting one row That row is highlighted e To select multiple rows hold down the shift key while clicking the gray box of the rows you need Those rows are highlighted e To select all the rows click the gray box in the upper left corner All rows are highlighted 4 Click the Data to text icon to insert the data into the spreadsheet cells 5 Save the spreadsheet Adding records to a spreadsheet is fairly easy You need to have the Data Source window open your spreadsheet open and the table you want to use selected 1 Click the gray box above the field name you wish to use to highlight it 2 Drop and drag the gray box to where you want the record to appear in the spreadsheet 3 Repeat until you have moved all of the fields you need to where you want them 284 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 4 Close the Data Source window use F4 5 Save the spreadsheet and click the Edit Fi
9. Figure 278 Final result Customizations Formula editor as a floating window As seen in Figure 271 the formula editor can cover a large part of the Writer window To turn the formula editor into a floating window do this 1 Hover the mouse over the editor frame as shown in Figure 279 2 Hold down the Control key and double click 316 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x ne Figure 279 Hold down the Control key and double click on the border of the math editor to turn it into a floating window Figure 280 shows the result You can make the floating window back into an embedded frame using the same steps Hold down the Control key and double click the window frame Figure 280 Equation editor as a floating window How can I make a formula bigger This is one of the most common questions people ask about OOoMath The answer is simple but not intuitive 1 Start the formula editor and go to Format gt Font size Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 317 np oot GPE Tie org VTiler File Edit View Format Tools Window Help E E H _ Fonts gt 2 X Font Size CEE ET ee O E 1 2 i T 8 3 10 411 te Spacing Alignment smr 3 14159 i i Text Mode d Figure 281 Changing the font size for a formula 2 Select a larger font size under Base Size top most entry as shown in Figure 281 eyes hs 5 Base size OK Relative si
10. Page Style Default x Organizer Page Borders Background Header Footer Sheet Left to right then down First page number 1 Ea Print C Column and row headers Charts LJ Grid Drawing objects L Notes Formulas Objects graphics Zero values Scale Scaling mode Scaling factor 100 Figure 127 The Sheet tab of the Page Style dialog Print You can specify which details to print Those details include Row and column headers Sheet grid prints the borders of the cells as a grid Notes prints the notes defined in your spreadsheet on a separate page along with the corresponding cell reference Objects and graphics Charts Drawing objects Formulas prints the formulas contained in the cells instead of the results Zero Values prints cells with a zero value Remember that since the print detail options are a part of the page s properties they are also a part of the page style s Note properties Therefore different page styles can be set up to quickly change the print properties of the sheets in the Spreadsheet Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 163 Scale Use the scale features to control the number of pages the data will print on This can be useful if a large amount of data needs to be printed more compactly or if the reader has poor eyesight text can be enlarged when it prints e Reduce Enlarge printout scales the data in the printout either larger or sm
11. Using the Quickstarter in Linux Some installations of OpenOffice org under Linux have a Quickstarter that looks and acts like the one described above for Windows the checkbox on the Memory page is labeled Enable systray quickstarter Preloading OOo under Linux KDE In Linux KDE you can use KDocker to have OOo loaded and ready for use at startup KDocker is not part of OOo it is a generic systray app docker that is helpful if you open OOo often 18 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Starting from the command line You may want to start OOo from the command line using the keyboard instead of the mouse Why Well by using the command line you have more control over what happens when OOo is started For example using the command line you can tell Writer to load a document and print it immediately or to start without showing the splash screen Note Most users will never need to do this There is more than one way to start OOo from the command line depending on whether you have installed a customized version or the standard download from the OOo website If you installed using the download on the OOo website you can start Writer by typing at the command line soffice writer or Swriter Writer will start and create a new document Likewise you can start other OOo components from the command line Type of document Component Command line option Text Writer writer Spreadsheet Calc calc Drawing Draw
12. 176 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Notes view Use the Notes view to add notes to a slide 1 Click the Notes tab in the Workspace Figure 135 2 Select the slide to which you want to add notes e Click the slide in the Slide pane or e Use the Previous Slide and Next Slide buttons to move to the desired slide in the Navigator 3 In the text box below the slide click on the words Click to add notes and begin typing You can resize the Notes text box using the green resizing handles and move it by placing the pointer on the border then clicking and dragging To make changes in the text style press the F11 key to open the Styles and Formatting window Normal Outine Notes Handout Slide Sorter First Step Fi be Femin a FRG Click Duki scarcer A erion Click to add notes Figure 135 Notes view Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 177 Slide Sorter view Slide Sorter view contains all the slide thumbnails Figure 136 Use this view to work with a group of slides or with only one slide Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter Slide 2 Thre Sap Sih har a a ee te Samo for ofl ol Slide 3 Slide 4 Figure 136 Slide Sorter view Change the number of slides per row if desired 1 Check View gt Toolbars gt Slide View to make the Slide View toolbar Figure 137 visible S GQ 9 Ga Gl sides iI r Figure 137 Slide Sorte
13. 2 Select either Insert gt Columns or Insert gt Rows 138 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 When you insert a single new column it is inserted to the left Note of the highlighted column When you insert a single new row it is inserted above the highlighted row A single column or row can also be added using the mouse 1 Select the column or rows where you want the new column or row inserted Right click the header 2 Select Insert Rows or Insert Columns Multiple columns or rows Multiple columns or rows can be inserted at once rather than inserting them one at a time 1 Highlight the required number of columns or rows by holding down the left mouse button on the first one and then dragging across the required number of identifiers 2 Proceed as for inserting a single column or row above Deleting columns and rows Columns and rows can be deleted individually or in groups Single column or row A single column or row can only be deleted by using the mouse 1 Select the column or row to be deleted 2 Right click on the column or row header 3 Select Delete Columns or Delete Rows from the pop up menu Multiple columns or rows Multiple columns or rows can be deleted at once rather than deleting them one at a time 1 Highlight the required number of columns or rows by holding down the left mouse button on the first one and then dragging across the required number of identifiers 2 Proceed as for delet
14. The new toolbar now appears on the list of toolbars in the Customize dialog After creating a new toolbar you need to add some commands to it as described below O Cancel E x Adding a command to a toolbar If the list of available buttons for a toolbar does not include all the commands you want on that toolbar you can add commands When you create a new toolbar you need to add commands to it 1 On the Toolbars page of the Customize dialog select the toolbar in the Toolbar list and click the Add button in the Toolbar Content section of the dialog Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 399 2 The Add Commands dialog is the same as for adding commands to menus Figure 330 Select a category and then the command and click Add The dialog remains open so you can select several commands When you have finished adding commands click Close If you insert an item which does not have an associated icon the toolbar will display the full name of the item the next section describes how to choose an icon for a toolbar command 3 Back on the Customize dialog you can use the up and down arrow buttons to arrange the commands in your preferred sequence 4 When you are done making changes click OK to save Choosing icons for toolbar commands Toolbar buttons usually have icons not words on them but not all of the commands have associated icons To choose an icon for a command select the command and click Modify g
15. A slide master is a slide that is used as the starting point for other Slides It is similar to a page style in Writer it controls the basic formatting of all slides based on it A slide show can have more than one slide master OOo uses three terms for this one concept Master slide slide master and master page all refer to a slide which is used to create other slides This book uses the term slide master except when describing the user interface Note A slide master has a defined set of characteristics including the background color graphic or gradient objects such as logos decorative lines and other graphics in the background headers and footers placement and size of text frames and the formatting of text All of the characteristics of slide masters are controlled by styles The styles of any new slide you create are inherited from the slide master from which it was created In other words the styles of the slide master are available and applied to all slides created from that slide master Changing a style in a slide master results in changes to all the Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 189 slides based on that slide master it is however possible to modify each individual slide without affecting the slide master Slide masters have two types of styles associated with them presentation styles and graphic styles The pre packaged presentation styles can be modified but new presentation styles cannot be crea
16. Odometer Odometer Alias Table Sort Visible Function Criterion Or Figure 251 Added fields to the query End Reading End Reading Fuel Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 295 Step 8 Enter the FuelID difference field We want the difference between the FuelID value of the Fuel table and FuelID value of the End Reading query to equal one 1 1 Type End Reading FuelID Fuel FuelID in the field to the right of the Odometer field of the Fuel Table Figure 252 Type the numeral 1 one in the Criterion cell of this column Field FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading FuellD Fuel FuellD Table End Reading End Reading Fuel Figure 252 Typing in calculation of fields 2 Calculate the distance traveled Figure 253 e Type End Reading O0Odometer Fuel Odometer in the Field cell e Type gt 0 in the Criterion cell Field End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer x o Figure 253 Field for distance traveled calculations 3 Calculate fuel economy Figure 254 Type End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer End Reading FuelQuantity in the Field in the next column to the right Field End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer End Reading FuelQuantity Alias able rt Visible x Function Criterion Figure 254 Fuel economy calculation field 296 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 When enter
17. To get to the toolbar customization dialog do any of the following e On the toolbar click the arrow at the end of the toolbar and choose Customize Toolbar e Choose View gt Toolbars gt Customize from the menu bar e Choose Tools gt Customize from the menu bar and pick the Toolbars page Figure 331 Figure 331 The Toolbars page of the Customize dialog 398 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 To customize toolbars 1 In the Save In drop down list choose whether to save this changed toolbar for the application for example Writer or for a selected document 2 In the section OpenOffice org lt name of the program example Writer gt Toolbars select from the Toolbar drop down list the toolbar that you want to customize 3 You can create a new toolbar by clicking on the New button or customize existing toolbars by clicking on the Toolbar or Modify buttons and add commands to a toolbar by clicking on the Add button These actions are described below 4 When you have finished making all your changes click OK to save them Creating a new toolbar To create a new toolbar 1 Choose Tools gt Customize gt Toolbars from the menu bar 2 Click New On the Name dialog type the new toolbar s name and choose from the Save In drop down list where to save this changed menu for the application for example Writer or for a selected document Toolbar Name New Toolbar 1 save n 000 dev Writer vl Help
18. Unified Office Format text uot uof Ichitaro 8 9 10 11 jtd and jtt Hangul WP 97 hwp T602 Document 602 txt AportisDoc Palm pdb Pocket Word psw When opening htm or html files used for web pages OOo customizes Writer for working with these files Opening spreadsheets In addition to OpenDocument formats ods and ots Calc 3 can open the formats used by OOo 1 x sxc and stc and the following spreadsheet formats Microsoft Excel 97 2000 XP xls xlw and xlt Microsoft Excel 4 x 5 0 95 xls xlw and xlt Microsoft Excel 2003 XML xml Microsoft Excel 2007 XML xlsx xlsm xlts xltm Microsoft Excel 2007 binary xIsb Lotus 1 2 3 wk1 wks and 123 Data Interchange Format dif Rich Text Format rtf Text CSV csv and txt StarCalc formats sdc and vor dBASE dbf SYLK slk Unified Office Format spreadsheet uos uof htm and html files including Web page queries Pocket Excel pxl Quattro Pro 6 0 wb2 Opening presentations In addition to OpenDocument formats odp odg and otp Impress 3 can open the formats used by OOo 1 x sxi and sti and the following presentation formats Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP ppt pps and pot Microsoft PowerPoint 2007 pptx pptm potx potm StarDraw and StarImpress sda sdd sdp and vor Unified Office Format presentation uop uof CGM Computer Graphics Metafile cgm Portable Docume
19. psi PSI phi PHI theta THETA 314 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Not A complete table of Greek characters is included in Chapter 16 oe Math Objects in the Writer Guide Another way to enter Greek characters is by using the catalog window Go to Tools gt Catalog The catalog window is shown in Figure 276 Under Symbol Set select Greek and double click on a Greek letter from the list ay mnwois Symbol set XA EHT MNO 046 IT YF J YE zs x 5 yt kK A pv w a rr ew E sv EE Figure 276 Catalog used for entering Greek characters Example 2 m 3 14159 For this example we will suppose that e We want to enter the above formula the value of pi rounded to 5 decimal places e We know the name of the Greek character pi e But we do not know the markup associated with the symbol Step 1 Type followed by the text pi This displays the Greek Character r Step 2 Open the Selection window View gt Selection Step 3 The symbol is a relation so we click on the relations button asb If you hover the mouse over this button you see the tooltip Relations Figure 277 Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 315 Figure 277 Tooltip indicates the Relations button Step 4 Delete the lt gt text and add 3 14159 at the end of the equation Hence we end up with the markup pi simeg 3 14159 The result is shown in Figure 278
20. select that component s name in the upper right corner of the page otherwise select OpenOffice org button to make it available to every component Choose the shortcut keys you want to assign a style to In this example we have chosen Ctrl 9 In the Functions section at the bottom of the dialog scroll down in the Category list to Styles Click the sign to expand the list of Styles Choose the category of style This example uses a paragraph style but you can also choose character styles and others The Function list will display the names of the available styles for the selected category The example shows some of OOo s predefined styles To assign Ctri 9 to be the shortcut key combination for the List 1 style select List 7 in the Function list and then click Modify Ctrl 9 now appears in the Keys list on the right and List 1 appears next to Ctr 9 in the Shortcut keys box at the top Make any other required changes and then click OK to save these settings and close the dialog Saving changes to a file Changes to the shortcut key assignments can be saved in a keyboard configuration file for use at a later time thus permitting you to create and apply different configurations as the need arises To save keyboard Shortcuts to a file 1 After making your keyboard shortcut assignments click the Save button near the bottom right of the Customize dialog Figure 335 2 In the Save Keyboard Configuration dialog se
21. 1024x768 pixels Yo M Quality Effects Export sounds when slide advances 6 If Create title page was chosen in step 4 supply the information for it on the next page The title contains an author name e mail address and home page along with any additional information you want to include 364 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 This page of the Wizard does not display if Create title page was not chosen Information for the tite page Author Peter Hillier Brook E mail address Your homepage Additional information _ Link to a copy of the original presentation e 7 Choose the navigation button style to use to move from one page to another If you do not choose any OOo will create a text navigator select button style E Text only goio MICONA 2 e JC e JC E e 8 Select the color scheme for the web pages Available schemes include the document s existing scheme one based upon browser colors and a completely user defined scheme You can save a new scheme so that it will appear on the first page of the HTML export wizard Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 365 HTML Export Select color scheme Apply color scheme from document Use browser colors Use custom color scheme Hyperlink Hyperlink Hy 5 t m lor Ie F La a Active Link Visited link Visited Link 9 Click Create to generate the HTML files If this is a new design a S
22. 4 In the Create Style dialog type a name for the new style The list Shows the names of existing custom styles of the selected type Click OK to save the new style aS Create Style Style name NewStyle My Style Cancel Figure 41 Naming a new style created from a Selection Dragging and dropping to create a style You can drag and drop a text selection into the Styles and Formatting window to create a new Style Writer Select some text and drag it to the Styles and Formatting window If Paragraph Styles are active the paragraph style will be added to the list If Character Styles are active the character style will be added to the list Calc Drag a cell selection to the Styles and Formatting window to create cell styles Draw Impress Select and drag drawing objects to the Styles and Formatting window to create graphics styles Copying and moving styles You can copy or move styles from one template or document into another template or document in two ways e Using the Template Management dialog e Loading styles from a template or document Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 65 Using the Template Management dialog To copy or move styles using the Template Management dialog 1 Click File gt Templates gt Organize 2 In the Template Management dialog Figure 42 set the lists at the bottom to either Templates or Documents as needed The default is Templates on the left and Doc
23. Formatting the cell background To quickly choose a background color for a cell click the small arrow next to the Background Color icon on the Formatting toolbar A palette of color choices similar to the Font Color palette is displayed To define custom colors use Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Colors See Appendix D for more information You can also use the Background tab of the Format Cells dialog See Chapter 10 of the Calc Guide for details Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 155 Autoformatting cells and sheets You can use the AutoFormat feature to quickly apply a set of cell formats to a sheet or a selected cell range 1 Select the cells including the column and row headers that you want to format 2 Choose Format gt AutoFormat 3 To select which properties number format font alignment borders pattern autofit width and height to include in an AutoFormat click More Select or deselect the required options 4 Click OK If you do not see any change in color of the cell contents choose View gt Value Highlighting from the menu bar Formatting 7 l Rename Number format Font Alignment Borders Pattern AutoFit width and height Figure 122 Choosing an AutoFormat Defining a new AutoFormat You can define a new AutoFormat that is available to all spreadsheets 1 Format a sheet 2 Choose Edit gt Select All 3 Choose Format gt Aut
24. If you type three or more hyphens underscores __ or equal signs on a line and then press Enter the paragraph is replaced by a horizontal line as wide as the page The line is actually the lower border of the preceding paragraph Bulleted and numbered lists A bulleted list is created when you type a hyphen star or plus sign followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph A numbered list is created when you type a number followed by a period followed by a Space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph Automatic numbering is only applied to paragraphs formatted with the Default Text body or Text body indent paragraph styles Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 99 To turn autoformatting on or off go to Format gt AutoFormat and select or delete the items on the sub menu Creating numbered or bulleted lists There are several ways to create numbered or bulleted lists e Use autoformatting as described above e Use list numbering styles as described in Chapters 6 Introduction to Styles and 7 Working with Styles in the Writer Guide e Use the Numbering and Bullets icons on the paragraph formatting toolbar see Figure 68 This method is described here To produce a numbered or bulleted list select the paragraphs in the list and then click the appropriate icon on the toolbar It is a matter of personal preference whether you type your Note information first then apply Number
25. Sheet tabs Status bar At the very bottom of the Calc window you will find the status bar shown in Figure 97 where you can quickly obtain some information on the current spreadsheet Sheet number Ins mode Page style Wileleli eMirleh ounta oom Digital signature Maximum Minimum sum selected cells function Figure 97 Status bar information From left to right the status bar displays e The current sheet and the total number of sheets in the spreadsheet e The page style in use for the current sheet Double click to open the dialog and modify the page style Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 129 e The zoom level Double click to modify the zoom level e Selection mode Click to toggle between default mode STD extended mode EXT and incremental mode ADD e Modified flag When the document has been modified a star is displayed in this area of the status bar e Digital signature flag If you have added a digital signature to the spreadsheet a small padlock icon is displayed in this area Double click to digitally sign the spreadsheet e Selected cells functions By default this area shows the sum of the values contained in the selected cells You can however change the function used by right clicking on the area The available functions are Average averages the values of the selection CountA counts the cells in the selection which are not empty Count counts the cells in the selection with a
26. Slide 1 1 Default Figure 132 Main window of Impress Several additional operations can be performed on one or more slides in the Slides pane e Add new slides at any place within the presentation after the first Slide e Mark a slide as hidden so that it will not be shown as part of the Slide show e Delete a slide from the presentation if it is no longer needed e Rename a slide e Copy or move the contents of one slide to another copy and paste or cut and paste respectively It is also possible to perform the following operations although there are more efficient methods than using the Slides pane e Change the slide transition following the selected slide or after each slide in a group of slides e Change the sequence of slides in the presentation e Change the slide design A window opens allowing you to load your own design e Change slide layout for a group of slides simultaneously This requires using the Layouts section of the Tasks pane 172 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Tasks pane The Tasks pane has five sections Master Pages Here you define the page style for your presentation Impress contains 28 prepackaged Master Pages slide masters One of them Default is blank and the rest have a background Press F11 to open the Styles and Formating window where Tip you can modify the styles used in any slide master to suit your purpose This can be done at any time Layout Twenty pr
27. Updating a style from a selection To update a style from a selection 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window 2 In the document select an item that has the format you want to adopt as a style Caution Make sure that there are unique properties in this paragraph For example if there are two different font sizes or font styles A that particular property will remain the same as before 3 In the Styles and Formatting window select the style you want to update single click not double click then long click on the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon and click on Update Style Styles and Formatting E 7 New Style from Selection Default z mrviererbrrrrnrie First line indent Update Style Hanging indent Load Styles Heading lt r Figure 40 Updating a style from a selection Using AutoUpdate AutoUpdate applies to paragraph and frame styles only If the AutoUpdate option is selected on the Organizer page of the Paragraph Style or Frame Style dialog applying direct formatting to a paragraph or frame using this style in your document automatically updates the style itself Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 63 If you are in the habit of manually overriding styles in your Tip document be sure that AutoUpdate is not enabled Updating styles from a document or template You can update styles by copying or loading them from a template or another docume
28. a submenu drops down to show commands e File contains commands that apply to the entire document such as Open Save and Export as PDF e Edit contains commands for editing the document such as Undo and Find amp Replace It also contains commands to cut copy and paste selected parts of your document 20 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 e View contains commands for controlling the display of the document such as Zoom and Web Layout e Insert contains commands for inserting elements into your document such as Header Footer and Picture e Format contains commands such as Styles and Formatting and AutoFormat for formatting the layout of your document Table shows all commands to insert and edit a table in a text document e Tools contains functions such as Spelling and Grammar Customize and Options e Window contains commands for the display window e Help contains links to the Help file What s This and information about the program Toolbars OOo has several types of toolbars docked floating and tear off Docked toolbars can be moved to different locations or made to float and floating toolbars can be docked The top docked toolbar default position is called the Standard toolbar The Standard toolbar is consistent across the OpenOffice org applications The second toolbar across the top default location is the Formatting toolbar It is a context sensitive bar that shows the relevant tools
29. ae prame amf Dee E apa a T e maT ie a pe ne E Sve i Amna E Ana Taerar damre LETS Amra Tis Aa om Lenet A cme aaa Tmp jam Aam dar Aan anf Tn mea da Se Jarl Joel Creating headers and footers A header is an area that appears at the top of a page A footer appears at the bottom of the page Information such as page numbers inserted into a header or footer displays on every page of the document with that page style To insert a header click Insert gt Header gt Default or the page style if not Default as shown in Figure 77 Insert Format Table Tools Window Help Manual Break AEC apg wt BES Fields e Special Character Formatting Mark a Ea section dah Hyperlink Header Default Footer Figure 77 Inserting headers and footers Other information such as document titles and chapter titles is often put into the header or footer These items are best added as fields That way if something changes the headers and footers are updated automatically Here is one common example To insert the document title into the header 1 Click File gt Properties gt Description and type a title for your document 2 Add a header Insert gt Header gt Default 3 Place the cursor in the header part of the page Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 105 4 Select Insert gt Fields gt Title The title should appear on a gray background which does not show when
30. and then select the desired buttons for that toolbar Many toolbar buttons are marked with a small arrow beside the button The arrow indicates that this button has additional functions Click the arrow and a submenu or toolbar appears showing its additional functions see Figure 152 Most buttons marked with the small arrow can become floating toolbars To make a submenu into a floating toolbar click the area at the top of the submenu drag it across the screen and then release the mouse button Floating toolbars can be docked on an edge of the screen or within one of the existing toolbar areas at the top of the screen as described in Chapter 1 Click here and drag to float the toolbar Figure 152 An arrow next to a button indicates additional functions Click the arrow on the title bar of a floating toolbar to display additional functions see Figure 153 Zoom x x Visi ns Zoom In E EL A E el Visible Buttons id A Z Customize Toolbar foom Qut Dock Toolbar ach Zoom 100 Dock All Toolbars gt Zoom Previous ig foom Next GL Zoom Page Close Toolbar p q e Zoom Page Width rh Optimal wt tk Object Zoom w ih Shift Figure 153 An arrow on a floating toolbar indicates additional functions Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 207 The tools available in the various toolbars are explained in the following sections The appearance of the toolbar icons may vary with your operating
31. booklet printing 115 bookmarks 123 124 borders editing 228 brackets Math 319 bring forward 224 brochure printing 115 bulleted list 197 Bullets and Numbering dialog 198 C Calc macros 379 CD or DVD of OpenOffice org 13 check for updates automatically 46 circle drawing 217 clipboard 38 closing a document 30 closing OpenOffice org 30 CMYK 209 Color Bar 208 color options 40 color palette 209 color scheme 44 combining objects 234 command line starting from 19 Community Forum user support 15 complex text layout CTL 12 53 components of OpenOffice org 10 conditional hyphen 102 connectors 219 consultants 16 context menu 228 context menus 24 conversion 235 copying object from Gallery 342 create document from template 68 creating adocument 24 cross fading 233 cross references inserting references 123 overview 123 Ctrl click required to follow hyperlinks 43 custom dictionary 54 Customize dialog 386 customizing keyboard shortcuts 402 menus 394 toolbars 398 D data source description 238 editing 280 linking 277 registering 277 using in OOo documents 281 viewing 279 database AutoValue 248 creating 241 creating subforms 277 creating tables 242 field types and formats 244 list table 252 planning 239 primary key 242 246 249 registering 279 Report Wizard 300 Table Wizard 243 tables 242 426 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 database form activation order 275 background 272
32. draw Presentation Impress impress Formula Math math Web page Writer web To see a list of options you can use when starting Writer at the command line type soffice Below is a list of some of the more popular options Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 19 Description help Get a complete list of options nologo Do not show the startup screen show lt odp file gt Start presentation immediately view lt documents Open documents in viewer read only mode minimized Start OOo minimized norestore Suppress restart restore after fatal errors invisible No startup screen no default document and no UI This is useful for third party applications that use functionality provided by OOo If you have a customized version of OOo such as the one provided by Linux Mandrake or Gentoo you can start Writer by typing at the command line oowriter Although the command syntax differs the effect is identical it Note starts OOo with an empty Writer document Parts of the main window The main window is similar in each component of OOo although some details vary See the component chapters in this book for descriptions of those details Common features include the menu bar standard toolbar and formatting toolbar at the top of the window and the status bar at the bottom Menu bar The Menu baris located across the top of the screen just below the Title bar When you choose one of the menus
33. for integrals are usually treated as subscripts and superscripts Result sum from kK 1 tonak int from 0 to x f t dt Or int 0 x f t dt int from Re f sum to infinity 2 n Not For more details on integrals and sums see Chapter 16 Math ore Objects in the Writer Guide Brackets with matrices look ugly For background we start with an overview of the matrix command Markup Result matrix a b c d Rows are separated by two s and entries within each row are separated by one Note The first problem people have with matrices is that brackets do not scale with the matrix Markup Result a b e matrix q a b c d 320 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 OOoMath provides scalable brackets That is the brackets grow in size to match the size of their contents Use the commands eft and right to make scalable brackets Markup left matrix a b c d right Tip Use Jeft and right to obtain square brackets How do I make a derivative Making derivatives essentially comes down to one trick Tell OOo It s a fraction In other words you have to use the over command Combine this with either the letter d for a total derivative or the partial command for a partial derivative to achieve the effect of a derivative Result df over dx partial f over partial y partial 2 f over partial t 2 Notice that w
34. headings will need changing in order to be seen A Figure 221 background graphic 1 Select the labels of the top row of controls a Control click the Date label b Control shift click the rest of the labels of the top row The border will gradually grow to the right as you do this until all the labels are enclosed in it mate Odometer Tolls Motel Payment Misc Misc Payment ee F CE Figure 222 Selecting multiple labels at one time c Click the Control icon in the Design Form toolbar to open the Properties window 272 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 d Change the Background selection from Default to Light cyan This is a dropdown list 2 Select the other labels in the same way and then change their background color 3 Close the Properties window 4 Press the F11 key to open the Styles and Formatting window Figure 223 Notice the left icon has a black outline around it This is the Paragraph Styles icon Below it is a list of paragraph styles including headings I have chosen to use Light cyan as the background color for my Note labels You are free to choose whatever color you wish including a custom color you earlier created L A Styles and Formatting oO x a r Complimentary close Default First line indent Hanging indent Heading Heading 1 Heading 10 Heading 2 Heading 3 Heading 4 Figure 223 Top portion of the Styles and Formatting window a Right
35. highlighted e Press the Delete key to remove it Sometimes you will accidentally select the wrong layout slide Tip or decide to change it This is safe and does not cause loss of the contents already on the slide 2 Add any elements to the slide that you do need a Adding pictures to the clipart frame if your chosen layout includes one e Double click the picture within the frame The Insert picture dialog opens e Browse to the location of the picture you want to include To see a preview of the picture check Preview at the bottom of the Insert picture dialog e Select the picture and click Open e Resize the picture as necessary Follow the directions in the Caution note below b Adding pictures from graphic files to places other than the clipart frame e Insert gt Picture gt From File The Insert picture dialog opens e Browse to the graphic file To see a preview of the picture check Preview at the bottom of the Insert picture dialog Select a picture and click Open e Move the picture to its location e Resize the picture if necessary c Adding OLE Objects is an advanced technique covered in Chapter 7 of the Impress Guide Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 187 When resizing a graphic right click the picture Select Position and Size from the context menu and make sure that f Keep ratio is selected Then adjust the height or width to the Caution size you need As you adjust one dimension
36. l Standard Module s Template Tools H XrayDyn Tie Ti Description Figure 316 Select your macro and click Run There are other methods to run a macro For example use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the macro organizer which contains a Run button as well The author an avid macro writer prefers the macro organizer because the dialog usually opens faster but the selection process may be slightly slower Viewing and editing the macro You can view and edit the macro that was just created Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the OpenOffice org Basic Macros dialog see Figure 316 Select the new macro and click Edit to open the macro in the Basic IDE Integrated Development Environment Listing 1 Generated EnterMyname macro Sub Main End Sub sub EnterMyName rem eee rem define variables dim document as object dim dispatcher as object rem ee ee rem get access to the document document ThisComponent CurrentController Frame 370 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 dispatcher createUnoService com sun star frame DispatchHelper rem dim args1 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyValue args1 0 Name Text args1 0 Va
37. page styles for basic layout and tables to place figures beside descriptive text when necessary For an index or other document with two columns of text where the text continues from the left hand column to the right hand column and then to the next page all in sequence also known as snaking columns of text use page styles with two columns If the title of the document on the first page is full page width put it in a single column section For a newsletter with complex layout two or three columns on the page and some articles that continue from one page to some place several pages later use page styles for basic layout Place articles in linked frames and anchor graphics to fixed positions on the page if necessary uP Ose org TeL el i tet ad ie eee al i a ee L na drr See eee fh Spent Dames saat nk magne radioed arene tare ne me i n Ha mh Items formatted as a table Whetdom Dente or gorclodaT Ta Se eed ee Poe Title is ina This frame is linked to a frame on another page These frames are not linked to other frames 104 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 For a document with terms and translations to appear side by side in What appear to be columns use a table to keep items lined up and so you can Thisis a type in both columns rata oa a arm asa r ara imane rma arako a ma imn ao ome a se Pe areni Enana Pere ie Pa aa a
38. 175 Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter a Creating an Impress Presentation First Step Start File gt New gt Presentation or Right click Quickstarter gt Presentation Second Step Choose from Empty presentation Figure 134 Outline view Outline view serves at least two purposes 1 Making changes in the text of a slide e You can add and delete the text in a slide just as you would in the Normal view e You can move the paragraphs of text in the selected slide up or down by using the up and down arrow buttons Move Up or Move Down on the Text Formatting toolbar e You can change the Outline Level for any of the paragraphs in a slide using the left and right arrow buttons Promote or Demote e You can both move a paragraph and change its outline level using a combination of these four arrow buttons 2 Comparing the slides with your outline if you have prepared one in advance If you notice from your outline that another slide is needed you can create it directly in the Outline view pressing Enter when the cursor is on the first line of the slide or you can change to the Normal view to create it then return to Outline view to continue reviewing the slides against your outline If a slide is not in the correct sequence you can move it to its proper place a In the slide pane click the slide icon of the slide you are moving b Drag and drop it where you want it
39. Base 307 More ways to create reports An extension is available to assist in report creation Sun Report Builder creates stylish complex database reports You can define group and page headers group and page footers and calculation fields It is available from http extensions services openoffice org To install this extension follow these steps 1 Select Tools gt Extension Manager from the menu bar In the Extension Manager dialog click Get more extensions here 2 The OOo extensions page opens in your browser window Find and select the extension you want to install and follow the prompts to install it During installation you will be asked to accept a license agreement 3 When the installation is complete the extension is listed in the Extension Manager dialog For more about extensions see Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 308 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 OpenOf ficeorg3 Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math OpenOffice org s equation editor What ts Math Math is OpenOffice org OOo s component for writing mathematical equations It is most commonly used as an equation editor for text documents but it can also be used with other types of documents or stand alone When used inside Writer the equation is treated as an object inside the text document The equation editor is for writing equations in symbolic form as Note in equation 1 If you want to evaluate a numeric value
40. Document As Document has been saved as Save Document Document has been saved Clase Document Document is closing Activate Document Deactivate Document Print Document Modified status was changed Print form letters Changing the page count Save In ox Cancel Help Reset Figure 325 Assign macro to an application level event A common use is to assign the Open Document event to call a specific macro The macro then performs certain setup tasks for the document Select the desired event and click the Macro button to open the Macro Selector dialog see Figure 326 Select the desired macro and click OK to assign the macro to the event The Events tab shows that the event has been assigned to a macro see Figure 327 When the document opens the PrintHello macro is run Many objects in a document can be set to call macros when events occur The most common usage is to add a control such as a button into a document Even double clicking on a graphic opens a dialog with a Macros tab that allows you to assign a macro to an event 388 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Select the library that contains the macro you want Then select the macro under Macro name Library O amp My Macros ia Andrewjava aa Pitonyak Macro name CopyNumtTocoll CopyNumToacol EnterMy Name ExportPDF Main ModifyOPtions PrintHello ha PitonyakDatabas fa PitonyakDialogs da PitonyakU
41. Drawing toolbar 222 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Changing the selection mode To go from one mode to another you can do one of the following e Toggle the Points button on the Drawing toolbar to switch from the simple selection mode to the Points mode ee You can also use the keyboard shortcut F8 Points e Choose the Effects drop down button from the Drawing toolbar to activate the Rotation mode for a selected object e If you often work in Rotation mode you can choose the Rotation Mode after Clicking Object button from the Options bar you can cycle through normal and rotation modes just by clicking on the object This can be more convenient than clicking the object then clicking the Rotate button from the Drawing Toolbar Selecting objects Direct selection To select an object the easiest way is to click directly on it For objects that are not filled click directly on the object s outline to select it Selection by framing You can select several objects by using the mouse to drag a large rectangle around the objects as shown For this to work the Select amp icon on the Drawing toolbar must be active Only objects that lie entirely within the rectangle are selected Selecting hidden objects Even if objects are located behind others and not visible they can still be selected To select an object that is covered by another object hold down the A t key and click the object To select an
42. Figure 22 Remove personal information on saving Select this option to always remove user data from the file properties when saving the file To manually remove personal information from specific documents deselect this option and then use the Delete button under File gt Properties gt General 42 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Ctrl click required to follow hyperlinks In older versions of OOo clicking on a hyperlink in a document opened the linked document Now you can choose whether to keep this behavior by unchecking this box Many people find creation and editing of documents easier when accidental clicks on links do not activate the links The other options on this dialog should be self explanatory Security options and warnings x Security warnings Warn if document contains recorded changes versions hidden information or notes L When saving or sending When signing L When printing When creating PDF files Security options Remove personal information on saving L Recommend password protection on saving Ctrl click required to follow hyperlinks Figure 22 Security options and warnings dialog Macro security Click the Macro Security button to open the Macro Security dialog not shown here where you can adjust the security level for executing macros and specify trusted sources File sharing options for this document Select the Open this document in read only mode option to restrict t
43. Figure 36 Internet options showing E mail page available to Linux users Controlling OOo s AutoCorrect functions Some people find some or all of the items in OOo s AutoCorrect function annoying because they change what you type when you do not want it changed Many people find some of the AutoCorrect functions quite helpful if you do then select the relevant options But if you find unexplained changes appearing in your document this is a good place to look to find the cause To open the AutoCorrect dialog click Tools gt AutoCorrect You need to have a document open for this menu item to appear In Writer this dialog has five tabs as shown below In other components of OOo the dialog has only four tabs Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 55 Correct TWo INital CApitals Capitalise first letter of every sentence Automatic bold and _underline_ Replace dashes Delete spaces and tabs at beginning and end of paragraph Delete spaces and tabs at end and start of line Ignore double spaces Apply numbering symbol Apply border Create table Apply Styles Remove blank paragraphs Reolace Custom Stvles M Replace while modifying existing text T AutoFormat AutoCorrect while typing ai y Te Te M iv iv iv M M MAAA T TAA Figure 37 The AutoCorrect dialog in Writer showing the five tabs and some of the choices Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 OpenOf fice org3 Chapter 3 Usin
44. For a more detailed description of the handling of B zier curves curves and filled curves see Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide Polygons Draw the first line from the start point with the left mouse button held down As soon as you release the mouse button a first corner point is drawn and you can move the mouse to see how the second line will look Every mouse click sets another corner point A double click ends the drawing A filled polygon automatically joins the last point to the first point to close off the figure and fills it with the current standard fill color A polygon without filling will not be closed at the end of the drawing Polygon 45 Just as with ordinary polygons these will be formed from lines but with angles of 45 or 90 degrees between them Freeform Line With this tool you can draw just like with a pencil Press and hold the left mouse button and move the mouse It is not necessary to end the drawing with a double click Just release the mouse button and the drawing is completed If you have selected Freeform Line Filled the end point is joined automatically to the start point and the object is filled with the appropriate color Writing text Use the Text tool I to write text and select the font color size and other attributes Click on an empty space in the workspace to write the text at that spot or drag an area to write inside the dragged frame Press Enter to drop to the next lin
45. Form Wizard steps Step 2 Set up a subform Since we have already created a relationship between the Fuel and Vacations tables we will use that relationship If no relationship had been defined this would be done in step 4 1 Click the box labeled Add Subform 2 Click the radio button labeled Subform based upon existing relation 3 Fuel is listed as a relation we want to add So click Fuel to highlight it as in Figure 196 Click Next Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 257 Decide if you want to set up a subform w Add Subform Subform based on existing relation Which relation do you want i to add Subform based on manual selection of fields i A subform is a form that is inserted in another form Use subforms to show data from tables or queries with a one to many Figure 196 Adding a subform Step 3 Add subform fields This step is exactly the same as step 1 The only difference is that not all of the fields will be used in the subform 1 Select Fuel under Tables or queries 2 Use the gt gt button to move all the fields to the right 3 Click the FuellID field to highlight it 4 Use the lt button to move the FuellD to the left Figure 197 5 Click Next Figure 197 Selecting fields of a subform Step 4 Get joined fields This step is for tables or queries for which no relationship has been defined Since we want to list all expenses by the day they occur in both th
46. Foundation FSF 419 function key shortcuts 411 G Gallery adding objects 344 copying object into document 342 creating a new theme 345 deleting images 345 deleting objects 345 hide show 342 inserting object as background 343 linking object into document 343 location 345 open close 341 themes 341 views icon detailed 342 general options 33 glue points 220 GNU Linux system requirements 13 gradients 231 graphic files opening 420 421 saving 423 graphic styles 190 graphics adding from file 338 linking 338 vector 204 graphics styles formatting text 196 grid options 212 grid points 211 guiding lines 214 H handouts Impress 180 header different on right and left pages 80 Help Agent 34 Help system 14 Help Tips 33 hidden objects 223 high contrast 34 history of OpenOffice org 417 HSB 209 HTML compatibility 50 428 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 HTML export 51 HTML Export Wizard 363 hyperlinks editing 357 inserting 355 I icon size and style user interface 36 icons in menus 36 IDE 370 ignore font settings when importing HTML 51 images adding from file 338 linking 338 scanned 341 importing files 419 importing numbers from an HTML page 51 inclination 227 Insert Bookmark dialog 124 installing and setting up 14 Internet options 55 J Java options 45 Java Runtime Environment JRE 238 JRE Java Runtime Environment 13 46 K KDocker 18 keyboard shortcuts assigning 402 410
47. Gallery folder of OOo c Click the Browse button in the File section Browse to the folder containing sky gif 274 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 d Select this file and click Open e Inthe Type section select Area f Click OK to close the Page Style Default window The form should look like Figure 227 z CERES RSS ie a a ae 5 CAS Mare Cos rae We ABI SIS Ka ae erga E Ses e ce ee Pee Figure 227 Finished form Step 11 Change the tab order The Tab key moves the cursor from field to field This is much easier to do than to click each field to enter data into it It also permits us to group our expenses into areas before we begin entering data For example all of our meal receipts can be grouped together as can our snacks and also our fuel purchases 1 Control click the Date field 2 Click the Form Design icon in the Form Controls toolbar to open the Form Design toolbar Figure 228 Or use View gt Toolbars gt Form Design to open this toolbar 3 Click the Activation Order icon OC Figure 228 Form Design toolbar with Activation Order icon circled 4 Rearrange the order of the fields in the Tab Order window Figure 229 Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 275 Controls Move Up imtQdometer imtMotel fmtTolls imtBreakfast txtBPayment Automatic Sort imtLunch txtLPayment fmtSupper txtSPayment imtSnackNo imtSnackCost txtSnPayment imtMiscellaneous txtMPaymen
48. HU 206 rol ors Cl A D E E PEIEE E T T O eee ee EET 3 3 Sometimes the macro recorder fails esessrseseereeceerccrercererserese 377 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 7 IVC OPO aR A oie sawens acest canara cress asacrnmsadtevenasnasenascaneunscinaseicuansenes 379 O TT Sh ACT rre E E AE EE EEES 384 E O eE E E A EEEE EE EEE 389 Writing macros without the recorder sssssrsseeseeesereeessreseeressse 390 Finding more information ssssssessesessssereeresrerrerrrrerrerererrerrereeeees 391 Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice Org ssecccccecsececcecececcececcececeecesecceoe 393 ALENE OLUT terranes serene E AN E I A T A 394 Customizing menu CONTENL ccesccescccescccescccesceesscsessstessccessscecs 394 Customizing toolbars essesessereessssrressserrerrereeeereerereererereeserersese 398 Assigning shortcut keyS essssesesssreersssercersseerrrererrerereerersererrererees 402 Assigning macros to events ssssssesssssssssereeccccesessssssserereeeeceeeeses 405 Adding functionality with extensionsS esesssesrrecceeeressssserererereeees 405 Using exl enslosis nn elt ees E E AR ii 406 Appendix A KeyDoard SNOTICUUS cissrsircicrrincirdicnssieriiokreia isid ia 409 ALERE CELU EIE D i PARON IT NE I ET EE EI EEATT E E 410 Function key SNOrtcuts ccccccecceccsccceeccecceccecceccssensessessecseseeceees 411 General shortcut keys for OpenOffice Org eeccccccccccccccrrcrrrsrrsseee 411
49. Modifying a form We will be moving the controls to different places in the form and changing the background to a picture We will also modify the label for the PaymentType field as well as change the field to a list box First we must decide what we want to change and to what The discussion will follow this ten step outline 1 The Date field in the main form needs a dropdown capability It also needs to be lengthened to show the day of the week month day and year 2 Shorten the length of the payment fields all fields containing the word payment 3 The controls need to be move into groups food fuel subform and miscellaneous 4 Some of the labels need to have their wording changed Some single words should be two words Some abbreviations should be used if possible Misc for miscellaneous 5 The widths of several fields and labels need to be changed Only Lunch Supper Motel and Tolls have acceptable lengths But for a better appearance changes will be made to these as well 6 All the fields whose label ends in Payment will be replaced with a list box This box contains the entries from the Payment Type table 7 The Note field needs to be lengthened vertically and a scroll bar added It also needs to be moved 8 Changes need to be made in the Date and PaymentType columns of the subform that are similar to the changes in the main form 9 Headings need to be added for each group in the main form 10 The b
50. OO03 uses OpenDocument an XML eXtensible Markup Language file format developed as an industry standard by OASIS Organization for the Advancement of Structured Information Standards These files can easily be unzipped and read by any text editor and their framework is open and published e You have a voice Enhancements software fixes and release dates are community driven You can join the community and affect the course of the product you use You can read more about OpenOffice org its mission history licensing and other organizational information on the OpenOffice org website Minimum requirements OpenOffice org 3 requires one of the following operating systems e Microsoft Windows 98 Windows ME Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or higher Windows XP Windows 2003 or Windows Vista e GNU Linux Kernel version 2 2 13 and glibc 2 2 0 or newer e Mac OS X 10 4 x X11 required Mac OS X 10 5 without X11 e Solaris version 8 or higher Some OpenOffice org features wizards and the HSQLDB database engine require that the Java Runtime Environment JRE be installed on your computer Although OOo will work fine without Java support some features will not be available You can download OOo with or without JRE included If you have a slow machine and do not often need the features requiring JRE you can try to disable it to speed up the loading of the program For a more detailed and up to date listing of requirements see http w
51. Relation icon Figure 187 Relation design window 2 Click the Add Tables icon The Add Tables window opens 3 Use one of these ways to add a table to the Relation design window e Double click the name of the table In our case do this for both Vacations and Fuel e Or click the name of the table and then click Add for each table 4 Click Close when you have added the tables you want Figure 254 Vacations Fuel Date Odometer Date Breakfast FuelCost Figure 188 Added table lists 5 Defining the relationship between the Vacations and Fuel tables Two ways exist to do this 254 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 e Click and drag the Date field in the Fuel table to the Date field in the Vacations table When you release the mouse button a connecting line forms between the two date fields Figure 189 Vacations E Fuel Date FuellD E Odometer FuelCost _ Breakfast Lunch FuelQuanity a Fora eoeteare D E eS F Figure 189 Designation for a 1 n relationship e Or click the New Relation icon This opens the Relations window Figure 190 Our two tables are listed in the Tables involved section In the Fields involved section click the dropdown list under the Fuel label Tables involved ea T Vacations Y Fields involved Vacations Figure 190 Setting the relationship between tables Select Date from the Fuel table list Click in the
52. Signatures dialog where you can add more certificates if you want Click OK to add the public key to the saved file A signed document shows an icon in the status bar You can double click the icon to view the certificate 336 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 OpenOf ficeorg3 Chapter 1 1 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork Introduction You can add graphic and image files including photos drawings scanned images and others to OpenOffice org documents OOo can import various vector line drawing and raster bitmap file formats The most commonly used graphic formats are GIF JPG PNG and BMP Inserting an image from a file To insert an image from a file the file must be already stored in a directory folder on the computer 1 Determine the destination for the image Place the cursor at or near the appropriate location in the document 2 On the main menu select Insert gt Picture gt From File This displays the dialog shown in Figure 297 3 Navigate to the file to be inserted select it and click Open Figure 297 Insert picture dialog At the bottom of the Insert picture dialog are two checkboxes If Preview is checked the selected graphic file is previewed in Note a pane as shown in Figure 297 so you can verify that you have the correct file The Link option is discussed below Linking an image file If the Link option in the Insert picture dialog is selected OOo creates a link to the file
53. Started with OpenOffice org 3 04 12 07 11 23 12 56 14 95 7 34 Figure 185 View of some fields from the Vacations table A View is also a table Its fields come from the fields of one or more tables of the database It provides a way to look at a number of fields without regard to the table to which any of the fields belong A View can consists of some of the fields of one table as in Figure 185 Or it can consist of fields from more than one field as in Figure 186 J tate Fuelost_ FuelQuanity Who p 04 12 07 24 99 8 299 Dan 04 12 07 26 45 11 650 Kevin O4 13 07 27 50 12 557 Cash 04 15 07 35 12 10 233 Kevin Figure 186 View of fields from the Fuel and Payment Type tables Caution Data can not be entered into a View like it can be added to a table It is strictly for viewing data which has already been A entered into the table Defining relationships Now that the tables have been created what are the relationships between our tables This is the time to define them based upon the questions we asked and answered in the beginning When on vacation we want to enter all of our expenses all at one time each day Most of these expenses are in the Vacations table but the fuel we buy is not So we will relate these two tables using the Date fields Since the Fuel table may have more than one entry per date this relationship between the Vacations and Fuel tables is one to many It is designated 1 n The Vac
54. The date is not correct The columns need to be moved to the left to give a better appearance None of the numbers are correct but their only purpose is to show the number of decimal places Step 1 Change the date 1 Click to the right of the date 4 26 20 so that the cursor is next to the field Use the Backspace key to erase the date 2 Insert gt Fields gt Date This places today s date where the original date was 3 Changing the date formating a Double click the date field you just inserted The Edit Fields Document window opens Figure 266 Edit Fields Document Type select Format Date 12 31 1999 Figure 266 Modifying a date field b Since this is a dynamic report change the Select field from Date fixed to Date c Change the Format to what you desire I use the Friday December 31 1999 choice Click OK Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 305 Step 2 Change the column widths The column widths can be changed by moving the cursor over the right border of each column so that it becomes a double headed arrow Then drag and drop it to where you want it This has to be done for each column in each table in the report This can also be done with the last column on the right even though there is no black border It should now look something like Figure 267 Figure 267 Realigned columns in a report Step 3 Change the number formating in the cells The fuel quantity should have three
55. Writer document 333 Mantovani Paolo 379 margins 205 margins Writer 107 Master Pages 190 master slides 188 Math formulas inserting 201 mathematical equations 310 mathematical markup 314 mathematical symbols 311 matrix markup Math 320 measurement unit 206 memory options 35 menu bar 20 menus adding commands 397 creating 395 customizing 394 modifying 396 modifying entries 397 Microsoft Office file conversion 50 Microsoft Windows file associations 17 Quickstarter 17 system requirements 13 middle mouse button function 38 mirror copies 231 mouse positioning 38 Mozilla address book 278 Mozilla plug in 55 music objects inserting 201 MySQL 238 N Native Language Project 15 Navigation toolbar 29 Navigator 28 174 new document 24 non breaking hyphen 102 Normal view Impress 175 Notes view Impress 177 numbered list 197 numbering equations 321 O OASIS 13 object refresh during interaction 37 objects adjusting size 225 arranging 224 dynamic movement 225 dynamic size modification 226 framing 223 hidden 223 moving 225 rotating 226 selecting several 224 ODF format version saving 48 Office Assistant Microsoft 34 OLE objects inserting 201 online update options 46 OOExtras 16 OOo Macro Organizer dialog 369 OOoMacros 16 Open and Save As dialogs 27 Open Clip Art Library 16 Open Source Initiative OSI 418 419 Open Save dialogs 34 OpenDocument Format 13 48 OpenGL 37 opening a document 25 O
56. a wizard The easiest way to create HTML documents is to start with an existing Writer document You can view it as it will appear on a web page by using View gt Web Layout Saving a document as a single web page To save a document as a single web page HTML format select Save As from the File menu and specify HTML Document as the file type Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 357 Writer does not replace multiple spaces in the original document with the HTML code for non breaking spaces If you Note want to have extra spaces in your HTML file or web page you need to insert non breaking spaces in OOo To do this press Control Spacebar instead of just Spacebar Saving a document as a series of web pages Writer can save a large document as a series of web pages HTML files with a table of contents page To do this 1 Decide which headings in the document should start on a new page and make sure all those headings have the same style for example Heading 1 2 Select File gt Send and click on Create HTML Document 3 In the dialog Figure 313 enter the file name to save the pages under Also specify which style indicates a new page as decided in step 1 4 Click Save to create the multi page HTML document For those who may be interested the resulting HTML files conform to the HTML 4 Transitional Name and Path of the HTML Document My Recent Documents La J Desktop y biy Network Pl E File na
57. and H denote the frozen areas Rows 4 through 13 and columns D through G have been scrolled off the page Because the first three rows and columns are frozen into place they remained 8 5 Po Pk Pte Pm PW Pot eR et ats o 5 D T e 5 R R wo bh i z 5 z z F tt 2 S OL a i Lo Ci _ on gt a z l s of al gl gt S S S z s a 6 2 a s A s g a A a 5D D a tf 4 6 a 60 oF Total Date 10 02 10 03 10 04 10 05 10 08 10 07 10 08 10 09 10 10 10 41 10 12 10 13 10 14 1 3 Average 267 5 Possible 20 0 7 0 3 0 120 1680 460 40 60 60 35 40 786 0 11 0 6 6 200 0 Smith John 40 00 1 00 0 00 6 00 26 00 0 00 6 00 0 00 3 50 4 0056 50 6 00 10 67 9 167 5 Klein Mike 40 00 1 00 1 0011 50 6 00 6 00 0 00 5 00 6 00 3 50 3 50 47 50 10 00 10 2 7 166 5 Johnson Tom A 0 71 00 3 00 0 0013 00 6 00 0 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 3 00 47 50 9 001 02 6 213 0 Doe John 4700 1 00 1 00 2 0077 0077 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 3 505400 9 00 10 96 4 256 0 Doe Jane 40 00 1 00 3 00 9 00 16 00 26 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 4 00 79 50 10 00 10 6r 3 172 0Kupfer Peter 46 00 1 00 3 00 16 00 40 00 0 00 6 00 6 00 O00 3 50 41 00 6 50 03 9 224 5 Newton Issac 46 00 1 00 3 00 6 00 15 0025 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 3 5057 50 9 001 OU 6 207 5 Lunak Robet 26 00 0 00 2 00 5 0015 0017 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 0 0062 50 9 00 22 70 1 209 0 Matteson Brittany 20 00 0 00 3 00 3 0017 002200 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 3 0047 50 SOO TL 23 9 4 212 5 Murp
58. and apply global changes to them A group can always be undone and the objects that make up the group can always be manipulated separately A combination is a permanent fusion of objects leading to a new object The original objects are no longer available as individual entities and the operation is not reversible Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 233 Grouping by common selection When several objects are selected any operations you carry out are applied to all of the objects For example you can rotate a group of objects in its entirety Groups obtained through common selection of several objects are undone as soon as you Click outside the group However you can group objects and keep those selected objects grouped together Maintaining groups and undoing groups To group selected objects right click and choose Group from the pop up menu You can also use the keyboard shortcut Control Shift G or choose Modify gt Group from the menu bar When objects are grouped any editing operations carried out on that group are applied to all members of the group If you click on one member of the group the whole group is selected The objects of a group retain their own individual properties To undo a group right click and choose Ungroup from the pop up menu use the keyboard shortcut Control Alt Shift G or choose Modify gt Ungroup from the menu bar You can edit a member of a group individually without breaking the group To d
59. another language for the selected text or for the paragraph where the cursor is located You can also choose None to exclude the text from spellchecking or choose More to open the Character dialog Insert mode Click to toggle between Insert and Overwrite modes when typing Selection mode Click to toggle between STD Standard EXT Extend ADD Add and BLK Block selection EXT is an alternative to Shift click when selecting text See Working with text on page 87 for more information about ADD and BLK Digital signature If the document has been digitally signed an icon shows in this part of the Status bar You can double click the icon to view the certificate Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 83 Section or object information When the cursor is on a section or object such as a picture information about that item appears in this field For details consult the Help or the Writer Guide View layout Click the appropriate icon to change between single page side by side and book layout views Figure 54 You can edit the document in any view Figure 54 View layouts single side by side book Zoom To change the view magnification drag the Zoom slider or click on the and signs or click on the slider itself You can also right click on the zoom level percentage to select a magnification value Zoom interacts with the selected view layout to determine how many pages are visible in the docume
60. automatically by Impress called AutoLayout the outline styles available are by default bulleted lists while for normal text boxes an additional step is required to create a bulleted list Creating lists in AutoLayout text boxes Every text box included in the available layouts is already formatted as a bulleted list therefore to create a bulleted list the only necessary steps are 1 From the Layout pane choose a slide design that contains a text box Those are easily recognizable from the thumbnail 2 Click in the text box that reads Click to add an outline 3 Type the text then press Enter to start a new bulleted line 4 The default list type is a bulleted list The mechanisms to change the list from bulleted to numbered and vice versa are explained in Changing the appearance of the list on page 198 Press Shift Enter to start a new line without creating a new bullet or number The new line will have the same indentation of the previous line Press instead the button bullets on off on the text formatting toolbar for a line without bullet If the text formatting toolbar is not showing enable it selecting View gt Toolbar gt Formatting in the menu bar Tip Creating lists in other text boxes To create a list in a text box follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the text box 2 Click the Bullets On Off button on the text formatting toolbar If the text formatting toolbar is not showing enable it by selecti
61. click Heading 2 and select Modify from the context menu b On the Paragraph Style dialog Figure 224 click the Font Effects tab Paragraph Style Heading 2 Background Borders Organizer Indents amp Spacing Alignment Text Flow Font Font Effects Position Numbering Tabs Figure 224 Tabs of the Paragraphs Heading 2 window c Change the Font color dropdown list to Light cyan Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 273 Paragraph Style Heading Drop Caps Organizer Indents amp Spacing Underlining Without v otrikethrough Without v Font color Figure 225 Left side of Font Effects tab d Click OK to close the Paragraph Style Heading 2 dialog e Press the F11 key to close the Formatting and Styles window Learning how to use styles can be very helpful at times By using T styles we changed the font color for all three headings at one Ip time There are other methods of changing the font color but they require repeating the same steps for each heading 5 Right click the background and select Page from the context menu 6 Click the Background tab Figure 226 Organizer Page Background Header Footer Borders Columns AS Graphic ihi File Browse Unlinked graphic Type Position Area Tile Figure 226 Background tab of Page Styles a Change the As dropdown list from Color to Graphic b Search for this file sky gif It is located in the
62. containing the image instead of saving a copy of the image in the document The result is that the image is displayed in the document but when the document is saved it contains only a reference to the image file not the image itself The document and the 338 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 image remain as two separate files and they are merged together only when you open the document again Linking an image has two advantages and one disadvantage Note Advantage Linking can reduce the size of the document when it is saved because the image file itself is not included File size is usually not a problem on a modern computer with a reasonable amount of memory unless the document includes many large graphics files OOo can handle quite large files Advantage You can modify the image file separately without changing the document because the link to the file remains valid and the modified image will appear when you next open the document This can be a big advantage if you or someone else perhaps a graphic artist is updating images Disadvantage If you send the document to someone else or move it to a different computer you must also send the image files or the receiver will not be able to see the linked images You need to keep track of the location of the images and make sure the recipient knows where to put them on another machine so the document can find them For example you might keep images in a subfolde
63. customizing 402 drawing objects 414 function keys 411 Gallery 413 loading from a file 405 OpenOffice org general 411 resetting to default values 405 saving to a file 404 414 keyboard shortcuts macros 386 L label printing 118 labels printing 118 landscape pages 80 language settings 52 language support 12 Layout pane 194 LGPL 424 libraries of macros 379 library containers 379 licensing of OpenOffice org 418 limits to sum integral 320 Line and Filling toolbar 208 line properties 228 line customizing 229 line drawing 214 lines editing 228 linking object from gallery 343 Linux Quickstarter 18 system requirements 13 list table database 252 load Basic code to edit 49 load save options 47 loading styles 67 locale settings 53 M Mac OS X support 15 system requirements 13 macro information 15 Macro Organizer dialog 382 macro security options 43 Macro Selector dialog 385 Macromedia Flash 362 macros 308 assigning to events 405 Calc 379 comments 371 creating 373 DIM 372 dispatch framework 377 dispatch helper 372 downloading 384 editing 370 event handling 387 example 373 functions 379 IDE 370 377 library container 368 library containers 379 menu items 386 module 368 modules 379 organization 379 recording 368 Index 429 REM 371 resources 391 running 369 384 Storage 381 Subroutines 371 379 variables 372 viewing 370 writing 390 Mail Merge Wizard e mailing
64. decimal places The Begin End and Distance should have one decimal place Fuel Cost should be Currency and have two decimal places and Cost per mile should have three decimal places 1 Right click the cell below Quantity to open the context menu The cell is circled in red in Figure 267 2 Select Number format 3 In the Options section Figure 268 a Change the number of Decimal places to 3 b Click the green checkmark Click OK Options Decimal places p a Negative numbers red Leading zeroes Thousands separator Format code 0 000 Figure 268 Option section of the Number Formating window 4 Change the Cost per mile field a Right click in the cell below Fuel Cost b Select Number Format c In the Category list select Currency Click OK 306 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 5 Change the Fuel Cost field a Right click in the cell below Cost per mile b Select Number Format c In the Category list select Currency d In the Option section e Set the number of decimal places to 3 e Click the green checkmark e Click OK Step 4 Save and close the report Double click the report It should now look like Figure 269 File Edit View Insert Format Table Tools Window Help Titk Author Dan Lewis Date 4702 Date Friday May 25 2007 Date sunday May 27 2007 owe RT Page l l First Page Figure 269 Final report o Chapter 8 Getting Started with
65. each month To print the November and December sheets follow this procedure 1 Go to the November sheet Hold down the Control key and click on the tab of the December sheet 2 To print all of the sheets go to File gt Print and select Options The Options button is different from the Properties button Note Properties deals with the settings of the printer whereas Options deals with OOo s settings 3 Select Print only selected sheets This choice affects the print preview export and printing of your spreadsheet Click OK Caution If you keep the selected sheets selected when you enter data on one sheet you enter data on all sheets at the same time A This might not be what you want Selecting the page order details and scale To select the page order details and scale to be printed 1 Select Format gt Page from the main menu 2 Select the Sheet tab Figure 127 3 Make your selections and then click OK Page Order You can set the order in which pages print This is especially useful in a large document for example controlling the print order can save time if you have to collate the document a certain way Where a sheet prints on more than one page of paper it can be printed either by column where the first column of pages prints and then the second column and so on or by row as shown in the graphic on the top right of the page order dialog in Figure 127 162 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3
66. entry To register a data source choose File gt New gt Database to open the Database Wizard Select Connect to an existing database This allows access to the list of data sources that can be registered with OOo These data sources can be accessed similarly to a dBase database as explained in the next section Once a data source has been registered it can be used in any other OOo component for example Writer or Calc by selecting View gt Data Sources or pressing the F4 key Tip Mozilla Address Books and dBase databases among others can be accessed and entries can be added or changed Spreadsheets can be accessed but no changes can be made in the spreadsheet entries All changes in a spreadsheet sheet Caution must be made in the spreadsheet itself Update the database and save it Afterwards you see in your database the changes VAN you made and saved in the spreadsheet If you create and save an additional sheet in your spreadsheet the database will have a new table the next time you access it Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 277 Accessing a dBase database 1 File gt New gt Database opens the Database Wizard window Not Clicking the New icon and Database in the drop down menu also ore open the Database Wizard window See Figure 175 2 Select Connect to an existing database Pressing the Tab key highlights the Database type drop down list Typing D selects dBase Click Next Not Clicking the arrows open
67. expense group for each type of payment This would let us know where the money came Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 299 from to pay the expenses At the present time using the data from the queries in a spreadsheet is the best way to handle reports like this In the near future the report feature will include these abilities For our purposes we will create two reports The first one will list the expenses each day other than fuel The second report will list the fuel costs each day The fields we will need for the first report from the Vacations table are Date Motel Toll Breakfast Lunch Supper SnackCost and Miscellaneous This report will not require an additional query The second report involves the Fuel table Since fuel was purchased and entered into this table at times other than during the vacation a query needs to be created that contains only the fuel purchased during the vacation Vacations table report 1 Create a new report a Click the Reports icon in the Database list in the Automobile OpenOffice org window b In the Tasks list click Use Wizard to Create Report The Report Wizard window opens 2 Select the fields a Select Table Vacations in the Tables or Queries dropdown list b Use the gt to move these fields from the Available fields list to the Fields in report list Date Motel Tolls Miscellaneous Breakfast Lunch Supper and SnackCost Figure 260 Click Next Tables or q
68. fuel data for this day To move to another record when the form has a subform click any of the fields of the main form In this case click the Date field of the main form Then use the directional arrows at the bottom There are four of them from left to right First Record Previous Record Next Record and Last Record Figure 237 To the right of these arrows is the New Record icon To create a new record while in another record in the main form use one of these choices e Click the Next Record icon Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 287 e Or click the New Record icon The number in the Record box is the number of the record whose data is shown in the form The data from the second record of the Vacations form was displayed when I took the screenshot for Tip Figure 240 If you know the number of the record you want you can enter it into the record box and then use the Enter key to take you to that record Figure 240 is a record with data inserted in its fields Note that not all fields have data in them It is only necessary to have data in every field if you determine ahead of time to require all fields contain data If you required data be entered for a particular field and you do Caution not have data for that field you can no longer create a new record You have to edit the table containing that field and A change the Entry Required Save the table and the database This could also cause you to lose data in t
69. g Spellcheck F7 Language For Selection Word Count For Paragraph For all Text AutoCorrect ae Thesaurus Ctrl F7 E Hyphenation Outline Numbering T Line Numbering au Footnotes More Dictionaries Online Figure 66 The Language menu The following options are available e For selection select this option to apply a specified language to the selected text the selection can comprise only a few characters or several paragraphs e For paragraph select this option to apply the specified language to the paragraph where the cursor is located e For all text select this option to apply the specified language to all the document An alternative way to change the language of a whole document is to use Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Languages In the Default languages for documents section of the Options dialog Figure 67 you can choose a different language for all the text Caution A Spell checking is available only for those languages in the list that have the symbol next to them If you do not see the symbol next to your preferred language you can install the additional dictionary using Unlike the menu tool that applies to the individual document a Change in the default language from the Options dialog is a general change of settings of OOo and will therefore apply to all the documents created in the future If you want to change the language for the c
70. general options for OpenOffice org Help Tips When Help Tips are active one or two words will appear when you hold the cursor over an icon or field on the main OOo window without clicking Help Extended tips When Extended tips are active a brief description of the function of a particular icon or menu command or a field on a dialog appears when you hold the cursor over that item Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 33 Help Agent To turn off the Help Agent similar to Microsoft s Office Assistant deselect this option To restore the default Help Agent behavior click Reset Help Agent Help formatting High contrast is an operating system setting that changes the system color scheme to improve readability To display Help in high contrast if your computer s operating system supports this choose one of the high contrast style sheets from the pull down list For Windows XP the high contrast style options are as described below High contrast style Visual effect Default Black text on white background High Contrast 1 Yellow text on black background High Contrast 2 Green text on black background High Contrast Black White text on black background High Contrast White Black text on white background Open Save dialogs To use the standard Open and Save dialogs for your operating system deselect the Use OpenOffice org dialogs option When this option is selected the Open and Save dialogs supplied with OpenOffice org wi
71. in the center box 3 Double click the folder that contains the template that you want to use A list of all the templates contained in that folder appears in the center box 68 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 4 Select the template that you want to use You can preview the selected template or view the template s properties e To preview the template click the Preview icon A preview of the template appears in the box on the right e To view the template s properties click the Document Properties icon The template s properties appear in the box on the right 5 Click Open The Templates and Documents dialog closes and a new document based on the selected template opens in OOo You can then edit and save the new document just as you would any other document Templates and Documents Templates Ca My Templates i CG Presentation Backgrounds Hew Document CI Presentations Preview Document Properties Figure 45 Templates and Documents window Creating a template You can create your own templates in two ways from a document and using a wizard Creating a template from a document To create a template from a document 1 Open a new or existing document of the type you want to make into a template text document spreadsheet drawing presentation 2 Add the content and styles that you want Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 69 3 From the main menu choose File gt Templates gt
72. indicates the constant name Fach name is followed by a Space and a tab DONTKNOW The font weight is not specified known THIN specifies a 50 font weight ULTRALIGHT specifies a 60 font weight LIGHT Specifies a 75 font weight SEMILIGHT specifies a 90 font weight NORMAL Specifies a normal font weight SEMIBOLD specifies a 110 font weight BOLD specifies a 150 font weight ULTRABOLD specifies a 175 font weight BLACK specifies a 200 font weight I want the first column to contain the numeric value the second column the name and the third column the description The desired work is easily accomplished for every row except for DONTKNOW and NORMAL which do not contain a numeric value but I know that the values are 0 and 100 so I will enter those manually The data can be cleaned in multiple ways all of them easy The first example uses keystrokes that assume the cursor is at the start of the line with the text THIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 9 Use Tools gt Macros gt Record Macro to start recording Press Ctrl Right Arrow to move the cursor to the start of specifies Press Backspace twice to remove the tab and the space Press Tab to add the tab without the space after the constant name Press Delete to delete the lower case s and then press S to add an upper case S Press Ctrl Right Arrow twice to move the cursor to the start of the number Press Ctrl Shift Right Arrow to sele
73. is run args1 0 Name Text args1 0 Value Andrew Pitonyak This is where the magic happens The dispatch helper sends a dispatch to the document s frame stored in the variable named document with the command uno InsertText The next two arguments frame name and search flags are beyond the scope of this document The last argument is the array of property values to be used while executing the command InsertText dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 args1 Finally the end of the subroutine end sub Creating a macro I usually ask two questions before recording a macro 1 Can the task be written as a simple set of commands 2 Can the steps be arranged such that the last command leaves the cursor ready for the next command A complicated example I frequently copy rows and columns of data from a web site and format them as a table in a text document First I copy the table from the web site to the clipboard To avoid strange formatting and fonts I paste the text into a Writer document as unformatted text I reformat the text with tabs between columns so that I can use Table gt Convert gt Text to Table to convert to a table I inspect the text to see if I can record a macro to format the text remember the two questions that I ask As an example I copied the FontWeight constants group from the OpenOffice org web site The Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 373 first column
74. it from any cell in column H Note Headers and footers Headers and footers are predefined pieces of text that are printed at the top or bottom of a sheet outside of the sheet area They are set the same way 166 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Headers and footers are assigned to a page style You can define more than one page style for a spreadsheet and assign different page styles to different sheets For more about page styles see Chapter 10 of the Calc Guide To set a header or footer 1 Navigate to the sheet that you want to set the header or footer for Select Format gt Page 2 Select the Header or Footer tab See Figure 129 3 Select the Header on option From here you can also set the margins the spacing and height for the header or footer You can check the AutoFit height box to have the height of the header or footer automatically adjust Page Style Default Organizer Page Borders Background Header Footer Sheet Header Same content left right Left margin 0 00cm Right margin 0 00m G Spacing 0 250m Height 0 50cm AutoFit height Figure 129 Header dialog Margin Changing the size of the left or right margin adjusts how far the header or footer is from the side of the page Spacing Spacing affects how far above or below the sheet the header or footer will print So if spacing is set to 1 00 then there will be 1 inch between the header or footer and the sheet
75. items that are not consecutive To select nonconsecutive items as shown in Figure 59 using the mouse 1 Select the first piece of text 2 Hold down the Control key and use the mouse to select the next piece of text 3 Repeat as often as needed Now you can work with the selected text copy it delete it change the style or whatever Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 87 Macintosh users substitute the Command key when Note instructions in this chapter say to use the Control key The Country of the Blind Three hundred miles and more from Sih one hundred from the snows of Cotopaxi wastes Of MFM tOEe bes Chere lies that mysterious mountain valley cut off from all the w Country of the Blind Country of the Blinc Long Yours ago that valley lay so far open to the world that men might through frightful gorges and over an wy pass into its equable meadows and thither indeed ir or so of Peruvian halfbreeds fleeing from the lust and tyranny of an evil BREME Maty Ther stupendous outbreak of Mindobamba when it was night in Amie for seventeen days and thi at Yaguachi and all the fish floating dying even as far as EQEMEBLOE everywhere along the fy were land slips and swiit thawings and sudden floods and one whole side of the old iii came down in thunder and cut off the SADT G for ever trom the exploring feet these carly settlers had chanced to be on the hither side of the gorges when the world had so itself and h
76. material Many excellent macros are included with OOo Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the Macro dialog Expand the Tools library in the OpenOffice org library container Inspect the Debug module some good examples include WritedbgInfo document and printdbgInfo sheet Online resources The following links and references contain information regarding macro programming http www openoffice org the main link http codesnippets services openoffice org categorized examples http user services openoffice org OOo forums well supported http www oooforum org OOo forums well supported http api openoffice org docs common retf com sun star module ix html official IDL reference here you ll find almost every command with a description http wiki services openoffice org wiki Documentation DevGuide OpenOffice org Developers Guide official documentation that contains a detailed explanation http www pitonyak org oo php Andrew Pitonyak s macro page http www pitonyak org AndrewMacro odt numerous examples of working macros http www pitonyak org book Andrew Pitonyak wrote a book on macros http www pitonyak org database numerous macro examples using Base http docs sun com app docs Sun wrote a book on macro programming very well written and laid out Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 391 http documentation openoffice org contains c
77. more advanced feature and will be explained in the Base Guide Step 4 Change the label wording Field names need to be single words However the labels for the fields can be more than one word So we will change them To do so we will be editing the text in the label 1 Control click the SnackNo label Do one of the following e Right click the SnackNo label Select Control from the context menu Figure 208 The window that opens is labeled Properties Label field It contains all of the properties of the selected label it Position and Size Description Name S Control fi Form Replace with Arrange Alignment Wrap 3 Anchor Group Cut Es Copy Figure 208 Context menu Inthe Label selection click between the k and N in SnackNo Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 265 Use the spacebar to make SnackNo into two words Place a period after the No Figure 209 Close the properties window snack No mi Figure 209 Multi word label e Or click the Control icon in the Form Control toolbar Figure 210 The Properties window opens The rest of the steps are the same ee Be mt Bt Em Figure 210 Form Controls toolbar 2 Use the same procedure to change these labels as well BPayment to Payment LPayment to Payment SPayment to Payment Miscellaneous to Misc SnackCost to Snack Cost MPayment to Payment MiscPayment to Misc Payment and MiscNotes to M
78. move a 3 D object the full display is rotated or moved and not a grid frame Press Shift Contro l R to restore or refresh the view of the Tip current document Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 37 Mouse positioning Specifies if and how the mouse pointer will be positioned in newly opened dialogs Middle mouse button Defines the function of the middle mouse button e Automatic scrolling dragging while pressing the middle mouse button shifts the view e Paste clipboard pressing the middle mouse button inserts the contents of the Selection clipboard at the cursor position The Selection clipboard is independent of the normal clipboard that you use by Edit gt Copy Cut Paste or their respective keyboard shortcuts Clipboard and the Selection clipboard can contain different contents at the same time Function Clipboard Selection clipboard Copy content Edit gt Copy Select text table or object Control C Paste content Edit gt Paste Clicking the middle mouse Control V pastes at button pastes at the mouse the cursor position pointer position Pasting into No effect on the The last marked selection is another clipboard contents the content of the selection document clipboard Print options Set the print options to suit your default printer and your most common printing method In the Options dialog click OpenOffice org gt Print In the Printer warnings section near the bottom of t
79. object that is covered by several objects hold down the A t key and click through the objects until you reach the required underlying object To cycle through the objects in reverse order hold down the A t Shift keys when you click To help in making accurate selections you can check the number and type of the selected objects shown at the left of the Status bar Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 223 There may be some variation in the use of the A t key on different operating systems In general the A t key ona Windows computer functions as described above but ona Linux system it usually does not If the A t key on your system does not operate as described above use the Tab key method described below Note To select an object that is covered by another object using the keyboard press 7ab to cycle through the objects stopping at the object you wish to select To cycle through the objects in reverse order press Shift Tab This may not be practical if you have a large number of objects in your drawing When you click on the selected object its outline appears briefly through the objects on top of the selected object In the illustration to the right the square located beneath the circle was selected in this way the circle was made transparent in order to see the square Arranging objects In a complex drawing you may have objects stacked up one on top of the other with the result that a particular object is hidd
80. of the Draw window in Figure 148 gives an overview of the pages that you create If the Pages pane is not visible on your setup you can enable it from the View menu View gt Page Pane 204 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 gt Untitled1 OpenOffice org Draw File Edit View Insert Format Tools Modify Window Help B sa a Sy x i SSPR eas o 00em i 2 2 4 Pages 6 4 2 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 JA 1 6 Slide 1 22 20 16 16 14 12 10 amp 24 16 Layout Controls Dimension Lines atm 7 O o H O x l f lim RQolo E 38 46 20 99 225 0 00 x 0 00 28 Slide 1 1 Default Figure 148 Initial Draw window Rulers You should see rulers bars with numbers on the upper and left hand side of the workspace These show the size of a selected object on the page see the gray double lines highlighted in Figure 149 When no object is selected they show the location of the mouse pointer which helps to accurately position drawing figure 149 Rulers show the objects You can also use the rulers to Size of the selected object manage object handles and guide lines making it easier to position objects The page margins in the drawing area are also represented on the rulers You can change the margins directly on the rulers by dragging them with the mouse Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 205 Millimeter the rulers right click on one of the Centimeter rulers T
81. on the entry you require Sharing content between sheets You might want to enter the same information in the same cell on multiple sheets for example to set up standard listings for a group of individuals or organizations Instead of entering the list on each sheet individually you can enter it in all the sheets at once To do this select all the sheets then enter the information in the current one Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 149 This technique overwrites any information that is already in the cells on the other sheets without any warning For this reason when you are finished be sure to deselect all the tabs so that each sheet can be edited without affecting any others Caution A Editing data Editing data is done is in much the same way as it is entered The first step is selecting the cell containing the data to be edited Removing data from a cell Data can be removed deleted from a cell in several ways Removing data only The data alone can be removed from a cell without removing any of the formatting of the cell Click in the cell to select it and then press the Backspace key Removing data and formatting The data and the formatting can be removed from a cell at the same time Press the Delete key or right click and choose Delete Contents or use Edit gt Delete Contents to open the Delete Contents dialog Figure 115 From this dialog the different aspects of the cell can be deleted T
82. or Title Only however all but one layout the blank one contains a title section so you are not restricted to the two layouts described here If you do not know the names for the prepackaged layouts you can use the tooltip feature Position the cursor on an icon in the Layout section or on any toolbar icon and its name will be displayed in a small rectangle If the tooltips are not enabled you can enable them From the main menu select Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt General gt Help and mark the Tips checkbox If the Extended tips checkbox is also marked you will get more detailed tooltip information but the tooltip names themselves will not be provided Tip Select a layout in the Layout section of the Tasks pane by clicking on it it appears in the Workspace To create the title click on Click to add title assuming the Blank Slide layout was not used and then type the title text Adjustments to the formatting of the title can be done by pressing the F11 key right clicking the Title presentation style entry and selecting Modify from the pop up menu If you are using the Title Slide layout click on Click to add text to add a subtitle Proceed as above to make adjustments to the formatting if required Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 185 Inserting additional slides The steps for inserting additional slides are basically the same as for selecting the title page It is a process that has to be
83. payment are too wide They need shortening before the controls are moved 1 Control click the BPayment field Figure 206 a a a Figure 206 Selecting a field 2 Move the cursor over the middle green handle on the right The cursor becomes a single arrow 3 Drag the cursor to the left until the field is 2 5 cm wide 1 inch If you have the Snap to Grid and Guides when moving icons Tip selected in the Design Format toolbar you will see how wide the field is as you shorten it 4 Repeat these steps to shorten these fields Lpayment SPayment SnPayment Mpayment and MiscPayment Step 3 Move the controls to group them by category We want to move the controls so that they look like Figure 207 264 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 1 Click the first control you want to move A border appears around the control with eight green handles 2 Move the cursor over the label or field of the control It becomes a double arrow Figure 203 3 Drag and drop the control to where you want it Caution Do not use Control click when moving a field It moves either the field or the label but not both To move both use a mouse A click and drag to the desired spot 4 Use the same steps to move the rest of the controls to where they belong The only way to learn to do these two steps well is to practice Not them Another way exists which will place controls where you ore want them but this is a
84. printed and can be turned off 5 To change the title for the whole document go back to File gt Properties gt Description Fields are covered in detail in Chapter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide For more about headers and footers see Chapter 4 Formatting Pages and Chapter 6 Introduction to Styles in the Writer Guide Numbering pages To automatically number pages 1 Insert a header or footer as described in Creating headers and footers on page 105 2 Place the cursor in the header or footer where you want the page number to appear and click Insert gt Fields gt Page Number Including the total number of pages To include the total number of pages as in page 1 of 12 1 Type the word page and a space then insert the page number as above 2 Press the spacebar once type the word of and a space then click Insert gt Fields gt Page Count The Page Count field inserts the total number of pages in the document as shown on the Statistics tab of the document s Properties window File gt Properties If you restart page numbering anywhere in the document then the total page count may not be what you want See Chapter 4 Formatting Pages in the Writer Guide for more information Note Restarting page numbering Often you will want to restart the page numbering at 1 for example on the page following a title page or a table of contents In addition many documents ha
85. rasenen esc car SIr ITNE EN NSE EERE EEE 175 Creating a NEW PLESeENAallON scceccescceccsstceccsscescescteccescsessceees 180 Formatting a PFESCNALION ccccsccecccescccecccescctesccsessscesesceesscecs 185 Slide masters and STYIE S cece eee eceeneenceenceenseeseeesseessesssensneess 189 Working With slide MASTETS ccc ccc cceccecenceecensensensecceceeceenseenees 190 Adding and formatting Ge Mice pecs ce renntercerseiet rien vera sdevesasiaaeetiasecernessens 194 Creating TE DICS csecsnissasvanccveceerasanceitiwsaspannccanecnesnesssesvnaensaanscadelenedeloends 199 Adding graphics spreadsheets charts and other objects 200 Setting up the slide SOW sc cen sense tccceseosentonaencesthesracwesauaecneessanaeaueenca 201 Running the slide ShOW essssesersessessreesssseressssrereessseeeeerereereesesess 202 Chapter 7 Getting Started With DraW secsecsecseccecccecceccecoceccccsecseccseesee 203 A E e E EE EE E TE ERE 204 The Draw WOrKSPae ccccccccescceceecceeecceeecseeecsseeeseeeseeeesseeeueeeeues 204 Positioning objects with snap fuUNCtiONS cece cece cece eee eeeeeeees 211 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 5 Positioning objects with helper lLines 0 cece cece cee eeceeeeneenes 214 The basic drawing icy sic 0 clo meee e er eee nen ee eee ne ene ne rere 214 Drawing geometric SNAPES ccce cece ccc eee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeenseeseeeeees 220 P
86. repeated for each Slide Unless you are using more than one slide master your only concern is the Layouts section of the Tasks pane Figure 142 v Layouts i Figure 142 Choosing a slide layout First insert all the slides your outline indicates you will need Only after this should you begin adding special effects such as custom animation and slide transitions Step 1 Insert a new slide This can be done in a variety of ways take your pick e Insert gt Slide e Right click on the present slide and select Slide gt New Slide from the pop up menu e Click the Slide icon in the Presentation toolbar Figure 143 3 T slide slide Design Slide Show Figure 143 Presentation toolbar Step 2 Select the layout slide that bests fits your needs Step 3 Modify the elements of the slide At this stage the slide consists of everything contained in the slide master as well as the chosen layout slide so this includes removing unneeded elements adding needed elements such as pictures and inserting text 186 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Changes to any of the pre packaged layouts can only be made Caution using View gt Normal which is the default Attempting to do this by modifying a slide master may result in unpredictable aN results and requires extra care as well as some trials and errors 1 Remove any element on the slide that is not required e Click the element to highlight it The green squares show it is
87. see the Calc Guide 1 Getting started To insert an equation go to Insert gt Object gt Formula The equation editor opens at the bottom of the screen and the floating Selection window appears You will also see a small box with a gray border in your document where the formula will be displayed as Shown in Figure 270 Figure 270 Equation Editor Selection window and location of resulting equation 310 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 The equation editor uses a markup language to represent formulas For example beta creates the Greek character beta 6 This markup is designed to read similar to English whenever possible For example a a over b produces a fraction Be Entering a formula There are three ways to enter a formula e Select a symbol from the Selection window e Right click on the equation editor and select the symbol from the context menu e Type markup in the equation editor The context menu and the Selection window insert the markup corresponding to a symbol Incidentally this provides a convenient way to learn the OOoMath markup Click on the document body to exit the formula editor Note Double click on a formula to enter the formula editor again The Selection window The simplest method for entering a formula is the Selection window Shown in Figure 270 Meas ae L x a Categories R At s 4 t 484 74 Gib a b axb deb arb Symbols a
88. some time to think You may have to go through this process a few times before everything becomes clear in your mind and on paper Using a text document for these questions and answers makes it easier to move the questions around add additional questions or change the answers Here are some of the questions and answers I developed before I created a database for automobile expenses I had an idea of what I wanted before I started but as I began asking questions and listing the answers I discovered that I needed additional tables and fields What are the fields going to be My expenses divided into three broad areas fuel purchases maintenance and vacations The annual cost for Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 239 the car s license plate and driver s license every four years did not fit into any of these It will be a table of its own license fees What fields fit the fuel purchases area Date purchased odometer reading fuel cost fuel quantity and payment method fit Fuel economy can be calculated with a query What fields fit the maintenance area Date of service odometer reading type of service cost of service and next scheduled service of this type for example for oil changes list when the next oil change Should be But it would be nice if there was a way to write notes So a field for notes was added to the list What fields fit the vacations area Date odometer reading fuel including all the fields
89. text you want to find in the Search for box To replace the text with different text type the new text in the Replace with box You can select various options such as matching the case matching whole words only or doing a search for similar words See below for some other choices When you have set up your search click Find To replace text click Replace instead If you click Find All OOo selects all instances of the search Tip text in the document Similarly if you click Replace All OOo will replace all matches Find amp Replace Search for Find and Find All Replace with i L Replace or Replace All _ Match case Whole words only a Less Options _ Current selection only Backwards d Regular expressions Format _ Similarity search _ Search for Styles Figure 62 Expanded Find amp Replace dialog Use Replace All with caution otherwise you may end up with some hilarious and highly embarrassing mistakes A mistake with Replace All might require a manual word by word search to fix Caution A 90 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Inserting special characters A special character is one not found on a standard English keyboard For example 34 are all special characters To insert a Special character 1 Place the cursor where you want the character to appear 2 Click Insert gt Special Character to open the Special Characters windo
90. than manually formatting characters For information on the Ip advantages of styles and how to use them see Chapter 6 Introduction to Styles in the Writer Guide 98 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 The appearance of the icons may vary with your operating system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View Formatting ha Default Arial L 2 3 1 Open Styles and Formatting Window 2 Apply Style 3 Font Name 4 Font Size 5 Bold sel 12 y 4 6 Italic 7 Underline 8 Superscript 9 Subscript 10 Increase Font 11 Reduce Font n o D hy J E o P a b a r ila TEL 12 Font Color 13 Highlighting 14 Background Color 15 Open Character Format Dialog 2 4 Is n s gt ii Pa alk La cn 1 Figure 70 The Formatting toolbar showing icons for Character formatting To remove manual formatting select the text and click Format Tip gt Default Formatting or right click and select Default Formatting Autoformatting You can set Writer to automatically format parts of a document according to the choices made on the Options page of the AutoCorrect dialog Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Options Tip If you notice unexpected formatting changes occurring in your document this is the first place to look for the cause Some common unwanted or unexpected formatting changes include Horizontal lines
91. the Paragraph Style dialog go to the Text Flow page see Figure 73 4 Under Hyphenation select or deselect the Automatically option Click OK to save Turning on hyphenation for the Default paragraph style affects all other paragraph styles that are based on Default You can individually change other styles so that hyphenation is not active for example you might not want headings to be Note hyphenated Any styles that are not based on Default are not affected For more on paragraph styles see Chapter 6 Introduction to Styles and Chapter 7 Working with Styles in the Writer Guide Paragraph Style Default E Numbering Tabs Drop Caps Background Borders Organizer Indents amp Spacing Alignment Text Flow Font Font Effects Position Hyphenation 2 B Characters at line end 2o Characters at line begin a Maximum number of consecutive hyphens Figure 73 Turning on automatic hyphenation Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 101 You can also set hyphenation choices through Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Writing Aids In Options near the bottom of the dialog scroll down to the find the hyphenation settings Figure 74 Options Edit Characters before line break 2 Characters after line break 2 Hyphenate without inquiry lw Hyphenate special regions iii Figure 74 Setting hyphenation options Hyphenation op
92. the box to open a menu From the Font Name and Font Size menus you can change the font and its size in selected cells Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 127 Formula bar On the left of the Formula bar see Figure 95 is a small text box called the Name box with a letter and number combination in it such as D7 This is the column letter and row number called the cell reference of the current cell File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Function Wizard P A A UIiSGvIiMeE 0 oo gee ge CT 4 mi w eas aE Function Button Sum Button Name box Figure 95 Formula Bar To the right of the Name box are the the Function Wizard Sum and Function buttons Clicking the Function Wizard button opens a dialog from which you can search through a list of available functions what variables each function takes and the result of the function with the given input The Sum button inserts a formula into the current cell that totals the numbers in the cells above or to the left if there are no numbers above the current cell The Function button inserts an equals sign into the selected cell and the Input Line thereby setting the cell ready to accept a formula When you enter new data into a cell the Sum and Equals buttons change to Cancel and Accept buttons x The contents of the current cell data formula or function are displayed in the I
93. the relevant options Options OpenOffice org salon OpenOffice org Memory View Print This dialog is used to define ge Paths Enter your personal data the d Colors paths to important files These Fonts later sessions as well Security Appearance Figure 11 OpenOffice org Options The Back button has the same effect on all pages of the Note Options dialog It resets the options to the values that were in place when you opened OpenOffice org User Data options Because OOo s revision features mark your changes and comments with the name or initials stored in User Data you will want to ensure that your name and initials appear there In the Options dialog click OpenOffice org gt User Data Fill in the form shown in Figure 12 or amend or delete any existing incorrect information J2 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Address Company Forename Surname Initials Hillier Brook street Postcode City Country Region Tite Position Tel Home Work Fax E mail Figure 12 Filling in user data General options In the Options dialog click OpenOffice org gt General The options on this page are described below Help Tips Extended tips Help Agent Reset Help Agent Help formatting Open Save dialogues Use OpenOffice org dialogues Document status _ Printing sets document modified status Year two digits Interpret as years between 1950 gt and 2029 Figure 13 Setting
94. to three criteria with each criterion applied one after the other Sorts are handy when you are searching for a particular item and become even more powerful after you have filtered data In addition sorting is often useful when you add new information When a list is long it is usually easier to add new information at the bottom of the sheet rather than adding rows in the proper places After you have added information you can then sort it to update the Sheet You can sort by highlighting the cells to be sorted then selecting Data gt Sort The selected cells can be sorted by the order of information in up to three columns or rows in either ascending A Z 1 9 or descending Z A 9 1 order On the Options tab of the Sort dialog you can choose the following options Case sensitive If two entries are otherwise identical one with an upper case letter is placed before one with a lower case letter in the same position Range contains column labels Does not include the column heading in the sort Include formats A cell s formatting is moved with its contents If formatting is used to distinguish different types of cells then use this option Copy sort results to Sets a spreadsheet address to which to copy the sort results Ifa range is specified that does not have the necessary number of cells then cells are added If a range contains cells that already have content then the sort fails Custom sort order Select the box
95. type of compression to use for images which affects the quality of images in the PDF and other options Figure 286 General page of PDF Options dialog Range section e All Exports the entire document e Pages To export a range of pages use the format 3 6 pages 3 to 6 To export single pages use the format 7 9 11 pages 7 9 and 11 You can also export a combination of page ranges and single pages by using a format like 3 6 8 10 12 e Selection Exports whatever material is selected 326 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Images section Lossless compression Images are stored without any loss of quality Tends to make large files when used with photographs Recommended for other images e JPEG compression Allows for varying degrees of quality A setting of 90 tends to work well with photographs small file size little perceptible loss of quality Reduce image resolution Lower DPI dots per inch images have lower quality EPS images with embedded previews are exported only as Note previews EPS images without embedded previews are exported as empty placeholders General section PDF A 1 PDF A is an ISO standard established in 2005 for long term preservation of documents by embedding all the pieces necessary for faithful reproduction such as fonts while forbidding other elements including forms security encryption and tagged PDF If you select PDF A 1 the forbidden elements are greyed out n
96. typed cross references with automatic ones and when you update fields all the references will update automatically to show the current wording or page numbers The Cross references tab of the Fields dialog lists some items such as headings bookmarks figures tables and numbered items such as steps in a procedure To insert a cross reference to a heading or other text 1 In your document place the cursor where you want the cross reference to appear 2 If the Fields dialog is not open click Insert gt Cross reference On the Cross references tab in the Type list select the type of item to be referenced for example Heading or Figure Document Cross references Functions Doclinformation Variables Database Type Selection Set Reference Preface Insert Reference Why use OpenOffice org Headings What do you need to do first Numbered Paragraphs Other sources of information Table Acknowledgments ChapterNumber 1 Introduction to Writer Figure The Writer workspace Bookmarks Toolbars Footnotes a e les ste me biedliea as a a ae Insert reference to Page 1 Introduction to Writer Chapter Reference Above Below As Page Style Number Number mo context Number full context Figure 91 The Cross references tab of the Fields dialog Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 123 You can leave this page open while you insert many cross references 3 Click on the required item in the Selection list which s
97. want the table of contents to be inserted 3 Select Insert gt Indexes and Tables gt Indexes and Tables 4 Change nothing in the Insert Index Table dialog Click OK If you add or delete text so that headings move to different pages or you add delete or change headings you need to update the table of contents To do this 1 Place the cursor within the table of contents 2 Right click and select Update Index Table from the pop up menu If you cannot place your cursor in the table of contents choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Formatting Aids and then select Enable in the Cursor in protected areas section Note You can customize an existing table of contents at any time Right click anywhere init and select Edit Index Table from the pop up menu Chapter 12 Creating Tables of Contents Indexes and Bibliographies of the Writer Guide describes in detail all the customizations you can choose 110 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Creating indexes and bibliographies Indexes and bibliographies work in a similar way to tables of contents Chapter 12 Creating Tables of Contents Indexes and Bibliographies in the Writer Guide describes the process in detail In addition to alphabetical indexes other types of indexes supplied with Writer include those for illustrations tables and objects and you can even create a user defined index For example you might want an index containing only the
98. 0 Array rem 8 Press Ctrl C to copy the selected text to the clipboard dispatcher executeDispatch document uno Copy 0 Array rem 9 Press End to move the cursor to the end of the Line dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToEndOfLine 0 Array rem 10 Press Backspace twice to remove the two trailing spaces dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array Sa ag ke a e igh sae gga dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array rem 11 Press Home to move the cursor to the start of the line dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToStartOfLine 0 Array rem 12 Press Ctrl V to paste the selected number to the start of the Line dispatcher executeDispatch document uno Paste 0 Array rem 13 Press Backspace to remove the extra space dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array rem 14 Press Tab to insert a tab between the number and the name dim args17 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyVaLue args17 0 Name Text args17 0 Value CHR 9 dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 args17 rem 15 Press Home to move to the start of the Line dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToStartOfLine 0 Array rem 16 Press down arrow to move to the next Line dim args19 1 as new com sun star beans PropertyVaLlue args19 0 Name Count args19 0 Val
99. 1 Use Tools gt Macros gt Run Macro to open the Macro Selector dialog see Figure 323 2 Select the library and module in the Library list left hand side 3 Select the macro in the Macro name list right hand side 4 Click Run to run the macro 384 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Select the library that contains the macro you want Then select the macro under Macro name Library Macro name Oe eH FindComponentwWithURL FindLastSpace GetCalcLanguageData GetCellAl GetCellByName GetDocURL getLastUsedRow Hee Figure 323 Use the Macro Selector dialog to run macros Although you can use Tools gt Macros gt Run Macro to run all macros this is not efficient for frequently run macros A more common technique is to assign a macro to a toolbar button menu item keyboard shortcut or a button embedded in a document While choosing a method it is also good to ask questions such as e Should the macro be available for only one document or globally for all documents e Does the macro pertain to a specific document type such as a Calc document e How frequently will the macro be used The answers will determine where to store the macro and how to make it available For example you will probably not add a rarely used macro to a toolbar To help determine your choices see Table 4 Table 4 Methods for starting a macro OpenOffice org Document Type Document Toolbar Yes
100. 20 Number format icons Left to right currency percentage date exponential standard add decimal place delete decimal place Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 153 For more control or to select other number formats use the Numbers tab Figure 121 Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection Format Language English UK v 1 234 57 2 4 Negative numbers red Leading zeroes W Thousands separator Format code 0 00 RED 0 00 User defined Figure 121 Format Cells gt Numbers e Apply any of the data types in the Category list to the data e Control the number of decimal places and leading zeros e Enter a custom format code The Language setting controls the local settings for the different formats such as the date order and the currency marker Formatting the font To quickly choose the font used in a cell select the cell then click the arrow next to the Font Name box on the Formatting toolbar and choose a font from the list To choose whether to show the font names in their font or in plain text go to Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View Tip and select or deselect the Show preview of fonts option in the Font Lists section For more information see Appendix D Setting Up and Customizing Calc of the Calc Guide 154 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 To choose the size of the font clic
101. 56 Query table with aliases added 3 Run the query again The results are in Figure 257 Quanity Begin End End Reading FuellD Fuel FuellD Distance Fuel Economy 6 430 TT T r04 2 1 T45 11 59 19 570 1032 3 778 7 1 293 6 12 96 15 150 1239 4 1032 3 1 207 1 13 67 Figure 257 Query run with aliases We really do not need the column showing the difference between the FuellID fields from the table and query So we will hide it While it will not be visible it will still be used in the calculations 4 Hide a field that does not need to be seen Remove the check in the box of the Visible cell as in Figure 258 Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 297 Field _ FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading FuellD Fuel FuellD Alas Quanity Begin End End Reading End Reading Fuel Sort Figure 258 Making a field invisible in a query run 5 Rerun the query Figure 259 Quanity Begin End Distance Fuel Economy 6 430 M N 704 2 f45 11 59 19 570 1032 3 778 7 253 6 12 96 15 150 1239 4 1032 3 207 1 13 67 Figure 259 Query run with aliases Step 10 Close save and name the query My suggestion for a name is Fuel Economy There are obviously other calculations that can be made in this query such as cost per distance traveled and how much of the cost belongs to each of the payments types To fully use queries requires a knowledge of mathematics and spec
102. 6 Navigation icons The Navigation toolbar Figure 57 shows icons for all the object types Shown in the Navigator plus some extras for example the results of a Find command Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 85 Fag Figure 57 Navigation toolbar Click an icon to select that object type Now all the Previous and Next icons in the Navigator itself in the Navigation Toolbar and on the scroll bar will jump to the next object of the selected type This is particularly helpful for finding items like index entries which can be difficult to see in the text The names of the icons shown in the tooltips change to match the selected category for example Next Graphic Next Bookmark or Continue search forward For more uses of the Navigator in Writer see the Writer Guide Working with documents Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org includes instructions on starting new documents opening existing documents and saving documents Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates covers how to create a document from a template Saving as a Microsoft Word file To save a document as a Microsoft Word file 1 First save your document in OOo s format odt If you do not any changes you made since the last time you saved will appear only in the Microsoft Word version of the document 2 Then click File gt Save As The Save As window Figure 58 appears 3 In the Save as type drop down menu select the type of Wor
103. 7 to choose printer options such as envelope orientation and shifting You may need to experiment a bit to see what works best for your printer Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 117 You can also choose a different printer or alter printer setup for example specify the tray that holds envelopes for this print job Envelope Format Printer Envelope orientation Se 4 tl fn t t t t t t Print From top Print From bottom Shift right 0 00 ae 4 Shift down 0 00 Current printer Figure 87 Choosing printer options for an envelope 6 When you have finished formatting and are ready to print click either the New Doc or Insert button to finish New Doc makes only an envelope or starts a new document with the envelope Insert inserts the envelope into an existing document as page 1 To not proceed with this envelope click Cancel or press the Esc key You can also click Reset to remove your changes and return to the original settings when the dialog opened 7 When the Envelope dialog closes you are returned to your document which now has the envelope in the same file as the document Save this file before you do anything else To print the envelope 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 On the Print dialog under Print range choose Pages and type 1 in the box Click OK to print Printing labels Labels are commonly used for printing address lists where each label
104. 74 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Although many important settings can be changed in the Options dialog see Chapter 2 for example default fonts and page size more advanced settings such as page margins can only be changed by replacing the default template with a new one Resetting the default template To re enable OOo s Default template for a document type as the default 1 In the Template Management dialog click any folder in the box on the left 2 Click the Commands button and choose Reset Default Template from the drop down menu The next time that you create a document by choosing File gt New the document will be created from OOo s Default template for that document type Associating a document with a different template At times you might want to associate a document with a different template or perhaps you re working with a document that did not start from a template One of the major advantages of using templates is the ease of updating styles in more than one document as described on page 73 If you update styles by loading a new set of styles from a different template as described on page 67 the document has no association with the template from which the styles were loaded so you cannot use this method What you need to do is associate the document with the different template You can do this in two ways In both cases for best results the names of styles should be the same in the existi
105. Arrow to move the cursor to the start of specifies dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToNextWord 0 Array rem 3 Press Backspace twice to remove the tab and the space dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array Pell S8s2Fee eres renee Sana oA nea e dee oe es eee a ee ero one dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array rem 4 Press Tab to add the tab without the space after the constant name dim args4 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyValue args4 0 Name Text args4 0 Value CHR 9 dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 args4 rem 5 Press Delete to delete the lower case s dispatcher executeDispatch document uno Delete 0 Array rem 5 and then press S to add an upper case S dim args6 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyValue args6 0 Name Text args6 0 Value S Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 375 dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 args6 rem 6 Press Ctrl Right Arrow twice to move the cursor to the number dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToNextWord 0 Array Pell eee raa cee nea reer haere Sane os aee Rees ae ee a aaaea dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToNextWord 0 Array rem 7 Press Ctrl Shift Right Arrow to select the number dispatcher executeDispatch document uno WordRightSel
106. B Hue Saturation and Brightness model The two color fields at lower right show the value of the color as selected left and the currently set value from the color value fields right For a more detailed description of color palettes and their options see Chapter 8 Tips and Tricks in the Draw Guide Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 209 Ex Magenta lan o Ea Red a53 Hue Yellow 1 g 7 Green 204 E Saturation Key 3 F3 Blue 255 Brightness Color schemes Figure 155 Defining color schemes Options toolbar The Options toolbar lets you activate or deactivate various drawing aids The Options toolbar is not displayed by default To display it select View gt Toolbars gt Options The most important options to learn when starting to work in Draw are enclosed in red The functions of the various icons are described in Table 2 EJ 7 fal tR ae gt 156 Options oola Table 2 Functions on the Options toolbar Rotation mode after clicking object a Display or hide the grid a Display or hide the guides JE Display or hide guides when moving m Snap to grid ia Snap to guides he Snap to page margins 210 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Function Snap to object borders Snap to object points Allow quick editing Select text area only Double click to edit text Simple handles Large handles Create object with attributes Picture place
107. Calc spreadsheets 362 Impress presentations 302 Web wizard Writer 359 Writer documents 358 359 wildcards 89 windows dockable floating 23 wizard form database 257 presentation 181 query database 289 report database 300 table database 243 web 359 workspace Draw 204 workspace views Impress 175 X XML 49 Y year two digits 34 Index 433
108. Collection Album Title d Click Next To change the order of the fields select the field you want to Tip move and click the up or down arrow to move it up or down circled in magenta in Figure 241 Fields in the Query CD Collection AlbumT itle CD Collection DatePurchased Figure 242 List of fields added to the query Step 2 Select the sorting order Up to four fields can be used to sort the information of our query A little simple logic helps at this point Which field is most important 290 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 In our query the artist is most important The album title is less important and the date purchased is of least importance Of course if we were interested in what music we bought on a given day the date purchased would be the most important sort by ee C Descending Then by Ascending Descending Figure 243 Sorting order page 1 Click the first Sort by dropdown list e Click CD Collection Artist to select it e Ifyou want the artists to be listed in alphabetical order a z select Ascending on the right If you want the artist listed in reverse order z a select Descending on the right Figure 243 2 Click the second Sort by dropdown list e Click CD Collection ArtistTitle e Select Ascending or Descending according to the order you want 3 Repeat this process for CD Collection DatePurchased 4 Click Next Step 3 Select the s
109. File Edit View Insert Format Ta ro E K OCR F 7 Ue tJ Ing Heading Al Clear formatting Default the Formatting toolbar Using keyboard shortcuts Some keyboard shortcuts for applying styles are predefined For example in Writer Control 0 applies the Text body style Control 1 applies the Heading 1 style and Control 2 applies the Heading 2 style You can modify these shortcuts and create your own see Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org for instructions Modifying styles OpenOffice org provides several ways to modify styles both the predefined styles and custom styles that you create e Changing a style using the Style dialog e Updating a style from a selection e Use AutoUpdate paragraph and frame styles only e Load or copy styles from another document or template Any changes you make to a style are effective only in the current document To change styles in more than one document you need to change the template or copy the styles into the other documents as described on page 65 Tip 62 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Changing a style using the Style dialog To change an existing style using the Style dialog right click on the required style in the Styles and Formatting window and select Modify from the pop up menu The Style dialog displayed depends on the type of style selected Each style dialog has several tabs See the chapters on styles in the user guides for details
110. For example you may need a completely different layout for the first slide of the presentation or you may want to add to your presentation a slide from a different presentation based on a template available on the hard disk The Slide Design dialog makes this possible Access this dialog either from the menu bar Format gt Slide design or by right clicking on a Slide in the Slides pane The main window in the dialog shows the slide masters already available for use To add more 1 Click the Load button Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 191 2 Select in the new dialog the template from which to load the slide master Click OK 3 Click OK again to close the slide design dialog The slide masters in the template you selected are now shown also in the Master Pages section of the Tasks pane in the Available for use subsection The slide masters you have loaded will also be available the next time you load the presentation If you want to delete the unused slide masters click the corresponding checkbox in the Note Slide Design dialog Due to a bug if the slide master was not used in the presentation it is removed from the list of available slide masters anyway Ti To limit the size of the presentation file you may want to Ip minimize the number of slide masters used Modifying a slide master The following items can be changed on a slide master e Background color gradient hatching or bitmap e Background objec
111. Height Height affects how big the header or footer will be Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 167 Header or footer appearance To change the appearance of the header or footer click More From this dialog Figure 130 you can set the background and border of the header or footer See Chapter 10 Using Styles in Calc in the Calc Guide for more information Border Background Xx Borders Background Line arrangement Line Spacing to contents Default Left 0 00cm H OUI oooneee Right 0 00cm ae User defined Top 0 00cm AS Bottom 0 00cm Synchronize Color E Black v Shadow style Position isl ee 0 16cm Figure 130 Header Footer Border Background Contents of the header or footer The header or footer of a Calc spreadsheet has three columns for text Each column can have different contents To set the contents of the header or footer click the Edit button in the header or footer dialog shown in Figure 129 to display the dialog Shown in Figure 131 168 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Header Page Style Default Left area Center area Right area Test Lett Sheet 24 10 2008 08 39 55 Custom head Use the buttons to change the font or insert field commands such as date time etc Note Figure 131 Edit contents of header or footer Areas Each area is independent and can have different information in it Header You can select from several preset choices in the H
112. If the Check for updates automatically option is selected an icon appears at the right hand end of the menu bar when an update is available Click this icon to open a dialog where you can choose to download the update Online Update Options Check for updates automatically C Every Day Every Week Every Month Last checked 21 09 07 18 10 00 Check now _ Download updates automatically Download destination D Download Change Figure 26 Configuring Online Update If the Download updates automatically option is selected the download starts when you click the icon To change the download destination click the Change button and select the required folder in the file browser window 46 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Choosing options for loading and saving documents You can set the Load Save options to suit the way you work a Options Load Save Cl toadsSave General VBA Properties Microsoft Office HTML Compatibility This is where you define general settings for opening and sa Figure 27 Load Save options OpenOffice org Load Save General Load Save options If the Options dialog is not already open click Tools gt Options Click the sign to the left of Load Save Choose Load Save gt General Most of the choices on the Load Save General page Figure 28 are familiar to users of other office suites Some items of interest are described b
113. It is not possible to specify what kind of object to create or insert If an object is inserted from a file you cannot specify which file to insert I recorded a macro and used Tools gt Options to open and modify configuration items The generated macro does not record any configuration changes in fact the generated code is commented so it will not even be run rem dispatcher executeDispatch document uno OptionsTreeDialog 0 Array If a dialog is opened the command to open the dialog is likely to be generated Any work done inside the dialog is not usually recorded Examples include macro organization dialogs inserting special characters and similar types of dialogs Other possible problems using the macro recorder include things such as inserting a formula setting user data setting filters in Calc actions in database forms and exporting a document to an encrypted PDF file You never know for certain what will work unless you try it however The actions from the search dialog are properly captured for example Other options When the macro recorder is not able to solve a specific problem the usual solution is to write code using the OpenOffice org objects Unfortunately there is a steep learning curve for the OOo objects It is usually best to start with simple examples and then branch out slowly 378 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 as you learn more Learning to read generated macros is a good place to s
114. ML documents importing exporting in the Help for more information Font sizes Use these fields to define the respective font sizes for the HTML lt font size 1 gt to lt font size 7 gt tags if they are used in the HTML pages Many pages no longer use these tags 50 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Font sizes Import _ Use English USAY locale for numbers Size 1 Fi dh Size 2 10 _ Import unknown HTML tags as fields E L_ Ignore font settings Size 3 da Export Size 4 14 P Netscape Navigator yt Size 5 18 i _ OpenOffice org Basic Size 6 24 E Display warning m x Print layout Copy local graphics to Internet Character set Western Europe Windows 12 w Figure 31 Choosing HTML compatibility options Import Use English USA locale for numbers When importing numbers from an HTML page the decimal and thousands separator characters differ according to the locale of the HTML page The clipboard however contains no information about the locale If this option is not selected numbers will be interpreted according to the Language Locale setting in Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Languages see page 53 If this option is selected numbers will be interpreted as for the English USA locale Import Import unknown HTML tags as fields Select this option if you want tags that are not recognized by OOo to be imported
115. Object Selection Mode Selection Mode Up down left right Moves the selected point the snap to grid arrow functions are temporarily disabled but end points still snap to each other 414 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Shortcut keys Alt Up Down Left Right Arrow Spacebar Shift Spacebar Ctrl Tab Shift Ctrl Tab Ctrl Enter Ctrl Enter at the Selection icon Esc Any text or numerical key Moves the selected Drawing Object one pixel in Selection Mode Re sizes a Drawing Object in Handle Selection Mode Rotates a Drawing Object in Rotation Mode Opens the properties dialog for a Drawing Object Activates the Point Selection mode for the selected drawing object Selects a point of a drawing object in Point Selection mode or cancels the selection The selected point blinks once per second Selects an additional point in Point Selection mode Selects the next point of the drawing object Point Selection mode In Rotation mode the centre of rotation can also be selected Selects the previous point of the drawing object Point Selection mode Places a new drawing object with default size in the centre of the current view Activates the first drawing object in the document Leaves the Point Selection mode The drawing object is selected afterwards Edits a point of a drawing object Point Edit mode If a drawing object is selected switches to edit mode and places the cursor at t
116. Oo s user interface is available in over 40 languages and the OOo project provides spelling hyphenation and thesaurus dictionaries in over 70 languages and dialects OOo also provides support for both Complex Text Layout CTL and Right to Left RTL layout languages such as Hindi Hebrew and Arabic Consistent user interface All the components have a similar look and feel making them easy to use and master Integration The components of OpenOffice org are well integrated with one another All the components share a common spelling checker and other tools which are used consistently across the suite For example the drawing tools available in Writer are also found in Calc with similar but enhanced versions in Impress and Draw You do not need to know which application was used to create a particular file for example you can open a Draw file from Writer Granularity Usually if you change an option it affects all components However OOo options can be set at a component level or even document level File compatibility In addition to its native OpenDocument formats OOo includes PDF and Flash export capabilities as well as support for opening and saving files in many common formats including Microsoft Office HTML XML WordPerfect and Lotus 123 formats New in OO03 using an extension the ability to import and edit some PDF files 12 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 e No vendor lock in
117. Properties section Figure 181 FuelQuantity Change Length to 6 and Decimal places to 3 Many fuel pumps measure fuel to thousands of a gallon in the USA where I live Odometer Change the Length to 10 and the Decimal places to 1 FuelCost Change the Length to 5 and Decimal places to 2 Click the Format example button Figure 181 This opens the Field Format window Figure 182 Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 249 Use Currency as the Category and your currency as the Format My currency has two decimal places Use what is appropriate for your currency Field Formac Format Alignment Category Format Language am m English USA a 1234 12 Scientific 1 234 Fraction ay aai Boolean Value 1 234 12 Text 1234 57 Optians Decimal places Negative numbers red Leading zeroes Thousands separator Format code General Cancel Figure 182 Field Format options 4 Repeat these steps for each field in the table 5 To access additional formatting options click the button to the right of the Format example panel Format example button in Figure 181 6 Description can be anything or can be left blank Figure 183 is an example of this 7 To save and close the table select File gt Close Name the table Fuel Follow the same steps to create the Vacations table The fields and their field types are listed in Figure 183 Make sure you make the Date field the primary key before closing R
118. S LO TO Serias E EENE EE EEEE EE 222 Selecting 6 0 6 hc eee nn ee ee eee One ne re ee eee 720 Moving and dynamically adjusting an Object s SIZE cc ec ee eee 225 Para 6 10 16 ae iene te ee ae eet eee eee nner ee err eee 2AT Using styleS sooseseesesseeeesssrererseseerersssrreeesssereessseereessseeeeessseereseses 230 Special effects osessesseeeseesssssssssserceccssessesssssssseecececcecsessesceeeeee 230 Combining multiple objects ooessessesssesesssrerereererrreeererereerereereees 23 Aids TOF positioning ODI CCUS viewcsssececsedasesdeexsossecensehtateacarssaessencsivensioes 234 VE CEE EE A EAA E 235 Working with 3D ODJECtS 0 ccc cece ccc eceneeceeeeeceeseeeeeenseenseeeeeenes 20 Inserting pictures from other SOULCES cccceceececcecceceesencensensees 239 Exchanging objects with other programS ssccecreseserereerererseees 236 Chapter 8 Getting Started With BasSe e secseccecseececcececcececcecececceseceececeo 237 LARE CPO EOE N E EE A EEEO OE N A 238 Planning a dataDasSG crore senate onncs Session onerouanweceennetconnatedewsicsanmceanens 239 Creating a new CO gic ders neccnncsteasascosecdamene aia ensacensancsanassaneeses 241 Creating database tables ccc cceccecccnceenceeneeenseesseessessteesness 242 Defining ll VO gio cy covcataernaneneraeesveciacbatecen mioeineedvceesteeneeiene cee 253 Creating a database fOrmM serccsessesesssrsssseesrereseerereeree
119. Save The Templates dialog opens see Figure 46 4 In the New template field type a name for the new template 5 In the Categories list click the category to which you want to assign the template The category you choose has no effect on the template itself it is simply the folder in which you save the template Choosing an appropriate category makes it easier to find the template easily when you want to use it For example you might save Impress templates under the Presentations category To learn more about template folders see Organizing templates on page 70 6 Click OK to save the new template x Templates Mew kemplate Templates Categories Templates Help e My Templates Presentation Backgrounds edt Presentations Figure 46 Saving a new template Any settings that can be added to or modified in a document can be saved in a template For example below are some of the settings although not a full list that can be included in a Writer document and then saved as a template for later use e Printer settings which printer single sided double sided and paper size and so on e Styles to be used including character page frame numbering and paragraph styles e Format and settings regarding indexes tables bibliographies table of contents Templates can also contain predefined text saving you from having to type it every time you create a new document For example a letter template m
120. Select the entire list or click on the gray border of the text box so that just the green resizing handles are displayed 2 Select Format gt Bullets and Numbering or click on the Bullets and Numbering icon 3 The Bullets and Numbering dialog contains five tabs Bullets Numbering type Graphics Position and Customize e Ifa bullet list is needed select the desired bullet style from the six default styles available on the Bullets page e Ifa graphics style is needed select one from those available on the Graphics page e Ifa numbered list is needed select one of the 6 default numbering styles on the Numbering type page For a single line in the list 1 Click anywhere in the line to place the cursor in it 2 Follow steps 2 4 of the previous instruction set 198 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 If the list was created in an AutoLayout text box then an alternative way to change the entire list is to modify the Outline styles Changes made to the outline style will apply to all the slides using them Sometimes this is what you want sometimes it is not so some care must be taken Creating tables For displaying tabular data you can insert basic tables directly into your slides in a number of ways e Use the Insert gt Table menu option e With the Table button on the main toolbar 7 e With the Table Design button on the table toolbar e By selecting a Style option from the Table Design section of the Task
121. Shortcut keys in the Galle ry c cece ese ececcecceccecenceesensessesseseeees 413 Selecting rows and columns in a database table opened by F4 414 Shortcut keys for drawing ODJECUS ccccescceeceesteesccecsenseeeceenes 414 Appendix B Background Information cccccccccsccccccccccccccccccccccccscecs 416 TYE NI EOI EE E A EE EEE EEES 417 A short history of OpenOffice Org scscsserseserrerereerereerererrererereeee 417 The OpenOffice org CoMmmMuUnity esessesserserereecereeecreeeererrerrereesee 417 How is OpenOffice org licensed esssersessessesreseseererrerrerererrereeees 418 What iS open source sssssssssseeseserssssssseseserecceseesessssesccceceessses 418 What is OpenDocument sssssssssssssssseeeececcssssssssesssesereecceseeeseses 419 File formats OOo can Ope n csssssssssssssssseccccrrssssssesccceresessseseccceee 419 File formats OOo can save tO ssssssessssereessreesssseesesssssssseeereeeeeee 421 Frequently asked questionS sesssesssrsesessererrrerrererrererrerrrereereese 423 VAT CR EE A T E T P E E T E T TE 426 8 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 OpenOf ficeorg3 Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org What is OpenOffice org OpenOffice org OOo is both a software product and a community of volunteers who produce and support the software Because someone else owns the trademark OpenOffice the Note correct name for both the
122. SupportedDBDrivers New Library DriverArgs J New Module Macro name Figure 314 OOo Macro Organizer dialog DBInspection library selected 5 The default module name is Modulel1 choose a better name Although it is still not descriptive I used Recorded Type a descriptive name and click OK to create the module The OpenOffice org Basic Macros dialog is displayed again showing the new module Name OK Recorded canel e Figure 315 Give your module a meaningful name 6 Highlight the newly created module In the upper left corner type the macro name to use such as EnterMyname and then click Save to save the macro If you followed all of the steps the Standard library now contains a module named Recorded which contains the EnterMyName macro as Shown in Figure 316 When OOo creates a new module it automatically adds the macro named Main as seen in Figure 316 Running the macro Use Tools gt Macros gt Run Macro to open the Macro Selector dialog see Figure 316 Select the newly created macro and click Run Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 369 Select the library that contains the macro you want Then select the macro under Macro name Library Macro name Pitonyak E Run PitonyakDatabase Main l PitonyakUtil Cancel H Readability H e RemoveFormattin Help Schedule amp ScriptBindingLibrar
123. Type to Tiny Integer TINYINT Your allowable number of tracks will be 999 Small Integer SMALLINT would allow 99999 tracks if you needed more than 999 tracks e Photo Use the default settings When you have finished click Next Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 245 Note Fach field also has a Field Type In Base the field type must be specified These types include text integer date and decimal If the field is going to have general information in it for example a name or a description then you want to use text If the field will always contain a number for example a price the type should be decimal or another appropriate numerical field The wizard picks the right field type so to get an idea of how this works see what the wizard has chosen for different fields Step 3 Set primary key 1 Create a primary key should be checked 2 Select option Use an existing field as a primary key 3 In the Fieldname drop down list select CollectionID 4 Check Auto value if it is not already checked 5 Click Next Note A primary key uniquely identifies an item or record in the table For example you might know two people called Randy Herring or three people living at the same address and the database needs to distinguish between them The simplest method is to assign a unique number to each one number the first person 1 the second 2 and so on Each entry has one number and every number is different so it is e
124. Yes Menu Yes Shortcut No Event Yes Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 385 To add a menu item keyboard shortcut or toolbar icon that calls a macro use the Customize dialog see Figure 325 Open this dialog in either of these ways e Choose Tools gt Customize from the main menu bar e Each toolbar has an icon that opens a menu choose the Customize Toolbar option Complete coverage of the Customize dialog is beyond the Tip scope of this document Click the Help button to access the help pages included with OpenOffice org The Customize dialog contains tabs to configure menus keyboard bindings toolbars and events Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events OpenOffice org Writer Toolbars Toolbar Standard New Toolbar Content Commands Load URL Add M New E New Document From Templa Modify i gt Open M Save aac E Save As W G3 Document as E mail E ae eee e I eee es eT Save In OpenOffice org Writer Description Loads a document specified by a URL You can type a new URL or select one that is already registered Figure 324 OpenOffice org Customize dialog 386 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Toolbar Macros can be added to toolbars For more about modifying toolbars see Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org Menu item Use Tools gt Customize to open the Customize dialog and select the Menus tab You can modify an exist
125. a that does not change However a report on the fuel data should probably be a dynamic report because this report depends upon data that does change All reports are based upon a single table or query So you Caution need first to decide what fields you want to use in the report If you want to use fields from different tables you must first A combine these fields in a single query Then you can create a report on this query An example of this caution is creating a report on vacation expenses Fuel costs are one part of that report as are meal costs These values are contained in fields of two different tables Vacations and Fuel So this report requires creating a query Creating a static report We will create a report on vacation expenses Certain questions need to be asked before creating the report e What information do we want in the report e How do we want the information arraigned e What fields are required to provide this information e Will a query have to be created because these fields are in different tables e Are there any calculations required in the data before being added to the report The expenses for our vacation are motel tolls miscellaneous breakfast lunch supper snacks and fuel One possible report would simply list the totals of each of these expense groups Another possible report would list the expense totals for each day of the vacation A third possible report would list the totals for each
126. ables and Queries Click on the next to Tables to view the individual tables created Now click on a table to see all the records held in it El 4 Automobile Lg Queries A lables Figure 232 Databases Editing data sources Some data sources can be edited in the View Data Sources dialog A spreadsheet can not A record can be edited added or deleted The data is displayed on the right side of the screen Click in a field to edit the value Beneath the records are five tiny buttons The first four move backwards or forwards through the records or to the beginning or end The fifth button with a small star inserts a new record Figure 233 5 APP Insert new record Figure 233 View Data Sources navigation buttons To delete a record right click on the gray box to the left of a row to highlight the entire row and select Delete Rows to remove the selected row al Table Format 124 99 8 299 91354 7 Dan Row Height 27 50 12 557 91699 3 Cash L Delete Rows 2512 10 233 92213 5 Kevin Recordi Jo 4 is Pe pha Figure 234 Deleting a row in the Data View window Launching Base to work on data sources You can launch OOo Base at any time from the View Data Source pane Just right click on a database or the Tables or Queries icons and select Edit Database File Once in Base you can edit add and delete tables queries forms and reports 280 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Using data sources in OOo do
127. ables such as the payment type an additional field for the primary key must be created Tip 240 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Creating a new database To create a new database click the arrow next to the New icon In the drop down menu select Database Figure 175 This opens the Database Wizard You can also open the Database Wizard using File gt New gt Database Figure 175 Creating a new database The first step of the Database Wizard has one question with two choices Create a new database or Connect to an existing database For this example select Create a new database and then click Next The second step has two questions with two choices each The default choice for the first question is Yes register the database for me and the default choice for the second question is Open the database for editing Make sure these choices are selected and click Finish If the database is not registered it will not be accessible to the Note other OOo components such as Writer and Calc If the database is registered other components can access it Save the new database with the name Automobile This opens the Automobile OpenOffice org Base window Figure 176 shows part of this window Every time the Automobile database is opened the Automobile OpenOffice org Base window opens Changes can then be made to the database The title for this window is always database name OpenOffice org Tip Chapter 8 Get
128. ackground needs to be changed to a picture Some of the labels will have to be modified so that they can be read clearly The font color of the headings needs to be changed as well Here are some pointers that we will be using in these steps The controls in the main form consists of a label and its field Sometimes we want to work with the entire control and other times we want to work with only the label or the field There are times when we want to work with a group of controls e Clicking a label or field selects the entire control A border appears around the control with eight green handles Figure 200 You can then drag and drop it where you want Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 261 Control click a label or field selects only the label or the field Figure 201 Date z Bo o Figure 200 A selected control By using the 7ab key you can change the selection from the field to the label or the label to the field Tolls Figure 201 Selecting a field of a control Moving a group of controls is almost as easy as moving one of them 1 Click the field of the top left control to be moved to select it 2 Move the cursor to just above and to the left of the selected control 3 Drag the cursor to the bottom right of the group of controls and release the mouse button As you drag the cursor a dashed box appears showing what is contained in your selection Make sure it is big enough to include the entire length of al
129. age of a letterhead typically has a different header or the first page of a report might have no header or footer while the other pages do With OOo you can define the page style for the first page and specify the style for the following pages to be applied automatically As an example we can use the First Page and Default page styles that come with OOo Figure 51 shows what we want to happen the first page is to be followed by the default page and all the following pages are to be in the Default page style Details are in Chapter 4 Formatting Pages in the Writer Guide First i Default g Page Figure 51 Flow of page styles Dividing a document into chapters In a similar way you can divide a document into chapters Each chapter might start with the First Page style with the following pages using the Default page style as above At the end of the chapter insert a manual page break and specify the next page to have the First Page style to start the next chapter as shown in Figure 52 Figure 52 Dividing a document into chapters using page styles Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 79 Changing page orientation within a document A Writer document can contain pages in more than one orientation A common scenario is to have a landscape page in the middle of a document whereas the other pages are in a portrait orientation This can also be done with page breaks and page styles Different headers on right and left p
130. ages Page styles can be set up to have the facing left and right pages mirrored or only right first pages of chapters are often defined to be right page only or only left When you insert a header on a page style set up for mirrored pages or right and left pages you can have the contents of the header be the same on all pages or be different on the right and left pages For example you can put the page number on the left hand edge of the left pages and on the right hand edge of the right pages put the document title on the right hand page only or make other changes Controlling page breaks automatically Writer automatically flows text from one page to the next If you do not like the default settings you can change them For example you can require a paragraph to start on a new page or column and specify the style of the new page A typical use is for chapter titles to always start on a new right hand odd numbered page Compiling an automatic table of contents To compile an automatic table of contents first apply styles to the headings you want to appear in the contents list then use Tools gt Outline Numbering to tell Writer which styles go with which level in the table of contents See Chapter 4 for more information Defining a sequence of styles You can set up one paragraph style so that when you press Fnter at the end of that paragraph the following paragraph automatically has the style you wish applied to it For exampl
131. all components of OpenOffice org To open the Gallery choose Tools gt Gallery or click the Gallery icon If the Gallery is open these choices close it Graphics in the Gallery are grouped by themes such as Bullets Rulers and Backgrounds You can create other groups or themes Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 341 The box on the left of the gallery window lists the available themes Click on a theme to see its graphics displayed in the Gallery window Figures 300 and 301 show two views of one of the themes supplied with OpenOffice org You have the option of Icon View or Detailed View for the Gallery and you can hide or show the Gallery by clicking on the Hide button Figure 300 Icon view of one theme in the Gallery New Theme i Backgrounds Title S Backgrounds ice light D Program Files OpenOffice org bea ice light D Program Files OpenOr ice blue D Program Files OpenOr Flurry grey D Program Files OpenOr ra Ll l L L Ro L Figure 301 Detailed view of the same theme in the Gallery L 1 Inserting Images into a document You can copy or link an object from the Gallery into a document To insert an object 1 Choose Tools gt Gallery and select a theme 2 Select an object with a single click then drag and drop the image into the document See Figure 302 You can also right click on the object and select Insert gt Copy 342 Getting St
132. aller For example if a sheet would normally print out as four pages two high and two wide a scaling of 50 would print as one page both width and height are halved e Fit print range s on number of pages defines exactly how many pages the printout will take up This option will only reduce a printout it will not enlarge it To enlarge a printout the reduce enlarge option must be used e Fit print range s to width height defines how high and wide the printout will be in pages Using print ranges Print ranges have several uses including printing only a specific part of the data or printing selected rows or columns on every page For more about using print ranges see Chapter 5 Printing Exporting and E mailing in the Calc Guide Defining a print range To define a new print range or modify an existing print range 1 Highlight the range of cells that comprise the print range 2 Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Define The page break lines display on the screen Ti You can check the print range by using File gt Page Preview Ip OOo will only display the cells in the print range Removing a print range It may become necessary to remove a defined print range for example if the whole sheet needs to be printed later Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Remove This removes all defined print ranges on the sheet After the print range is removed the default page break lines will appear on the screen 164 Gett
133. alog Note that some items have at least two paths listed one to a shared folder which might be on a network and one to a user specific folder normally on the user s personal computer You can use the entries in the OpenOffice org Paths dialog to Tip compile a list of files such as those containing AutoText that you need to back up or copy to another computer Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 39 Paths used by OpenOffice org horne jeanw eber openoffice org 3 userfautocorr AutoText home jeanw eber openoffice org 3 user autotext Backups home jeanw eber openoftice org 3 user backup Gallery home jeanw eber openoffice org 3 user gallery Graphics horne jeanw eber openoffice org 3 user gallery My Documents horne jeanw eber Documents Templates home jeanw eber openoffice org 3 user template Temporary files ftrnp gt Figure 18 Viewing the paths of files used by OpenOffice org Color options On the OpenOffice org Colors page Figure 19 you can specify colors to use in OOo documents You can select a color from a color table edit an existing color or define new colors These colors will then be available in color selection palettes in OOo Properties Name Blue amp clu Colour table i p _ E Ri m S aa al RG Delete E ft R 13 S HEEN HEN iti ie me BEM MMML 255 E BEEE TIT BEEE TT TT lies Figure 19 Defining colors to us
134. als on a ruler Step 1 Change the Date field 1 Control click the Date field to select it Figure 201 2 Move the cursor over the middle green handle on the right side It should change to a single arrow Figure 204 3 4 Figure 204 Single arrow Hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor to the right until the length is 6 cm The vertical dashed line is lined up with the 6 This is approximately 2 4 inches Release the mouse button Click the Control icon in the Form Controls toolbar Figure 205 It is the one circled in red The Properties Date Field window opens Each line contains a property of the field Hcg E fed el a ES aec FH P Figure 205 Form Controls toolbar Go to the Date format property This is a dropdown list with Standard short as the default setting Click the default Standard short to open the list Click the Standard long entry to select it Scroll down to the Dropdown property Its default setting is No It is also a dropdown list Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 263 Click the default No setting to open the list Click Yes to select it To see what the Date field will look like click the Form Mode Ti On Off icon the second icon from the left in Figure 205 You Ip can do this any time you want to see the form with the changes you have made Step 2 Shorten the width of a field All of the fields whose label contains the word
135. and to add text graphics and animation effects e Outline view shows topic titles bulleted lists and numbered lists for each slide in outline format Use this view to rearrange the order of slides edit titles and headings rearrange the order of items in a list and add new slides e Notes view lets you add notes to each slide that are not seen when the presentation is shown e Slide Sorter view shows a thumbnail of each slide in order Use this view to rearrange the order of slides produce a timed slide show or add transitions between selected slides e Handout view lets you print your slides for a handout You can choose one two three four or six slides per page from Tasks pane gt Layouts Thumbnails can be re arranged in this view by dragging and dropping them Toolbars The various Impress toolbars can be displayed or hidden by clicking View gt Toolbars and selecting from the menu You can also select the icons that you wish to appear on each toolbar For more information refer to Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org Many of the toolbars in Impress are similar to the toolbars in OOo Draw Refer to the Draw Guide for details on the functions available and how to use them Navigator The Navigator Figure 133 displays all objects contained in a document It provides another convenient way to move around a document and find items in it The Navigator icon is located on the Standard toolbar You can also dis
136. apes symbol shapes block arrows flowcharts callouts and stars Figure 168 shows part of the Drawing toolbar with the icons necessary for the following sections They open floating toolbars with the relevant work tools The use of all these tools is similar to that of the Rectangle tool even though they produce different geometric shapes O7 e O O xk Figure 168 Part of the main Drawing toolbar 220 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Basic shapes The Basic Shapes icon o makes available the range of tools for drawing basic shapes If you choose the rectangle tool from this toolbar it looks the same as a rectangle drawn using the Rectangle tool on the Drawing toolbar The only differences you will see are in the information field in the status bar Symbol shapes The Symbol Shapes icon brings you to an array of tools for drawing the various symbol Shapes Block arrows The Block Arrows icon toolbar 7 opens the Block Arrows Flowcharts The tools for drawing flowcharts are accessed by clicking on the Flowcharts icon O The creation of flowcharts organization charts and Similar planning tools are described in Chapter 9 Organization Charts Flow Diagrams and More in the Draw Guide Callouts Use the Callouts icon to open the Callouts toolbar Callouts lOO 0 0 oO Basic Shapes ae Oooaos CANTOS OOCoOPAA 0 o ol Symbol Shapes x Os DEV amp OGG Oot Oese Block Arr
137. aphics or other object A context menu will pop up Often the context menu is the fastest and easier way to reach a function If you re not sure where in the menus or toolbars a function is located you can often find it by right clicking Starting a new document You can create a new blank document in OOo in several ways When OOo is open but no document is open for example if you close all the open documents but leave the program running a Welcome screen is shown Click one of the icons to open a new document of that type or click the Templates icon to start a new document using a template You can also start a new document in one of the following ways Ifa document is already open in OOo the new document opens in a new window e Use File gt New and choose the type of document e Use the arrow next to the New button on the main toolbar From the drop down menu select the type of document to be created e Press Control N on the keyboard 24 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 e Use File gt Wizards for some types of documents Opening an existing document When no document is open the Welcome screen provides an icon for opening an existing document You can also open an existing document in one of the following ways If a document is already open in OOo the second document opens in a new window e Click File gt Open e Click the Open button on the main toolbar e Press Control O on the keyboard In each
138. apter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org for more information Free OOo templates artwork addons and other resources The official repository for extensions to OOo Most are free but some are not http extensions services openoffice org OpenOffice org Extensions Provides templates samples and macros in OOExtras several languages http ooextras sourceforge net A repository for OOo macros and add ons and OOoMacros documentation about writing macros or extending OOo http www ooomacros org An archive of clip art that can be used for free Open Clip Art Library for any use http www openclipart org Starting OpenOffice org The most common way to launch any component of OOo is by using the system menu the standard menu from which most applications are started On Windows it is called the Start menu On GNOME it is called the Applications menu On KDE it is identified by the KDE logo On Mac OS X it is the Applications menu When OOo was installed on your computer in most cases a menu entry for each component was added to your system menu If you are using a Mac see note below The exact name and location of these menu entries depends on the operating system and graphical user interface Note for Mac users You should see the OpenOffice org icon in the Applications folder When you double click this icon a text document opens in Writer To 16 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 open the other compo
139. arted with OpenOffice org 3 Inserting objects as links To insert an object as a link 1 Choose Tools gt Gallery and select a theme 2 Select an object with a single click then while pressing the Shift and Ctrl keys drag and drop the object into the document Figure 302 Copying a graphic object from the Gallery into a document Inserting an object as a background To insert an object as the background to a page or paragraph 1 Choose Tools gt Gallery and select a theme 2 Select an object with a single click right click on the object and choose Insert gt Background gt Page or Paragraph Managing the Gallery The default themes are locked no items can be added or deleted from these themes The locked themes are easily recognizable by right clicking on them the only available option in the pop up menu is Properties In a default installation only the My themes theme is customizable although new themes can be added as explained in Adding a new theme to the Gallery on page 345 Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 343 Adding objects to the Gallery You may wish to add to the Gallery any images that you use frequently for example a company logo You can then very easily insert these graphics into a document later You can add images only to My Theme or to any other theme that you have created these are indicated by a green icon in the list of themes You cannot add images to the built
140. as fields For an opening tag an HTML ON field will be created with the value of the tag name For a closing tag an HTML OFF will be created These fields will be converted to tags in the HTML export Import Ignore font settings Select this option to have OOo ignore all font settings when importing The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be used Export To optimize the HTML export select a browser or HTML standard from the Export box If OpenOffice org Writer is selected specific OpenOffice org Writer instructions are exported Export OpenOffice org Basic Select this option to include OOo Basic macros scripts when exporting to HTML format You must activate this option before you Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 51 create the OpenOffice org Basic macro otherwise the script will not be inserted OpenOffice org Basic macros must be located in the header of the HTML document Once you have created the macro in the OpenOffice org Basic IDE it appears in the source text of the HTML document in the header If you want the macro to run automatically when the HTML document is opened choose Tools gt Customize gt Events See Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros for more information Export Display warning When the OpenOffice org Basic option see above is not selected the Display warning option becomes available If the Display warning option is selected then when exporting to HTML a warning is s
141. asy to say record ID 172 This is the option chosen here CollectionID is just a number assigned automatically by Base to each record of this table There are more complex ways of doing this all answering the question How do I make sure that every single record in my database can be uniquely identified Step 4 Create the table 1 If desired rename the table at this point If you rename it make the name meaningful to you For this example make no changes 2 Leave the option Insert data immediately checked 3 Click Finish to complete the table wizard Close the window created by the table wizard You are now back to the main window of the database with the listing of the tables queries forms and reports 246 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Creating a table by copying an existing table If you have a large collection of music you might want to create a table for each type of music you have Rather than creating each table from the wizard you can make a copy of the original table Each table can be named according to the type of music contained in it Possible names could include Classical Pop Country and Western and Rock among others 1 Click on the Tables icon in the Database pane to see the existing tables 2 Right click on the CD Collection table icon Select Copy from the context menu 3 Move the mouse pointer below this table right click and select Paste from the context menu The Co
142. ations tables also contains several fields for the type of payment used For each field listing the payment type there is only one entry from the Payment Type table This is a one to one relationship one field in one table to one entry from the other table It is designated 1 1 Other tables also contain fields for the type of payment The relationship between these fields of those tables and the Payment Type table are also 1 1 Since the Payment Type table only provides a static list we will not be defining a relationship between the Payment Type table and the fields Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 253 of the other tables which use the entries of the Payment Type table That will be done when the forms are created The Fuel and Maintenance tables do not really have a relationship even though they share similar fields Date and Odometer Unless a person is in a habit of regularly getting fuel and having their vehicle serviced the entries in these tables do not share anything in common As you create your own databases you need to also TIP determine where tables are related and how 1 We begin defining relationships by Tools gt Relationships The Automobile OpenOffice org Base Relation design window opens Figure 187 The icons we will use are Add Tables and New Relation Automobile OpenOffice org Base Relation design File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Ly inal Add Tables New Relation icon
143. ay contain your name address and salutation You can also save menu and toolbar customizations in templates see Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org for more information 70 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Creating a template using a wizard You can use wizards to create templates for letters faxes agendas presentations and Web pages For example the Fax Wizard guides you through the following choices e Type of fax business or personal e Document elements like the date subject line business fax Salutation and complementary close e Options for sender and recipient information business fax e Text to include in the footer business fax To create a template using a wizard 1 From the main menu choose File gt Wizards gt type of template required File Edit View Insert Format Table Tools Window Help k Per p Open Ctrl O Recent Documents Wizards fo Letter 4 mh Er Close ra aon 6 Agenda m Save Chrl 5 o fl Save As fo Presentation Save All o Web Page o Document Converter fo Euro Converter iM Export fo Address Data Source Figure 47 Creating a template using a wizard 2 Follow the instructions on the pages of the wizard This process is Slightly different for each type of template but the format is very Similar 3 In the last section of the wizard you can specify the name and location for saving the template The defa
144. b a b a b awb aob Figure 271 Symbols are divided into categories The Selection window is divided into two main portions e The top shows the symbol categories Click on these to change the list of symbols e The bottom shows the symbols available in the current category Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 311 You can hide or unhide the Selection window with View gt Tip Selection Example 1 5x4 For this example we will enter a simple formula 5x4 On the Selection window 1 Select the top left button of the categories top section Figure 272 2 Click on the multiplication symbol shown in Figure 272 Unary binary operators BOZE aiuu E n Multiplication 4 A a b a b axb a b aab a b a b avb Figure 272 Unary binary operators When you select the multiplication symbol on the Selection window two things happen e The equation editor shows the markup lt gt times lt gt e The body of the document shows a gray box with the figure Qx HOD Fh 4 Figure 273 The multiplication symbol The lt gt symbols Figure 273 are placeholders that you can replace by other text The equation will update automatically and the result should resemble Figure 274 312 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Figure 274 Result of entering 5 and 4 next to the times operator To keep the equation from updating automatically select Vi
145. bably a third party add on that Sun cannot distribute with OpenOffice org Why do I need Java to run OOo Is it written in Java OpenOffice org is not written in Java it is written in the C language Java is one of several languages that can be used to extend OOo The Java JDK JRE is only required for some features The most notable one is the HSQLDB relational database engine Note Java is available at no cost If you don t want to use Java you can still use nearly all of the features of OOo 424 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 How can I contribute to You can help with the development of OOo in OpenOffice org many ways and you do not need to bea programmer To start check out this webpage http www openoffice org contributing html What s the catch There really is none you can read the licenses here http www openoffice org license html Appendix B Background Information 425 Index A accessibility features 410 accessibility options 44 advantages of OpenOffice org 12 antialiasing screen font 36 appearance options 44 Apply Style list 61 area fill editing 229 arranging objects 224 arrow styles customizing 229 arrows 229 Asian language support 53 Asian languages enabled 195 AutoCorrect 55 95 AutoLayout 194 automatic saving 26 AutoRecovery 26 48 AutoUpdate styles 63 B background images from Gallery 343 Basic 368 bitmaps 235 BitTorrent 13 book preview 115
146. both dimensions A will change Failure to do so will cause the picture to become distorted Remember also that resizing a bitmap image will reduce its quality better by far to create an image of the desired size outside of Impress 3 Adding text to a slide If the slide contains text click on Click to add an outline in the text frame and then type your text The Outline styles from 1 to 10 are automatically applied to the text as you insert it You can change the outline level of each paragraph as well as its position within the text using the arrow buttons on the Text Formatting toolbar Step 4 To create additional slides repeat steps 1 3 Modifying the appearance of slides To change the background and other characteristics of all slides in the presentation you need to modify the slide master or choose a different slide master A Slide Masteris a slide with a specified set of characteristics which is used as the beginning point for creating other slides These characteristics include the background objects in the background formatting of any text used and any background graphics OOo uses three interchangeable terms for this one concept Master slide slide master and master page all refer to a slide Note that is used to create other slides This book however will use only the term slide master except when describing the user interface Impress has 28 prepackaged slide masters found in the Master Pages section of
147. c shapes can be rotated but not slanted The slant axis is the point directly opposite the midpoint handle to be used for shearing the object This point stays fixed in location the other sides and edges move in relation to it as the mouse is dragged make sure that the handle icon is showing before dragging As with rotation you can set the inclination to occur as steps of 15 by pressing the Shift key while moving the handle C a 3 Editing objects To change an object s attributes such as color border width among others you can use the Line and Filling toolbar or the context menu If the Line and Filling toolbar Figure 170 is not visible you can display it using View gt Toolbars gt Line and Filling From here you can edit the most common object attributes You can also open the Line dialog by clicking on the Line icon and the Area dialog by clicking on the Area amp icon to see more options Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw dar mE Mm v O foo vme a G g 10 1 styles and 4 Formatting 4 Line ae 7 Area 2 Line 5 Line Width 8 9 Area Style Filling 3 Arrow Style 6 Line Color 10 Shadow Figure 170 Line and Filling toolbar When you select text this toolbar changes to show text formatting options Figure 171 w o T arial v 18 v Bis uU Ay A al AY Figure 171 Line and Filling toolbar when text is selected Th
148. case the Open dialog appears Select the file you want and then click Open In the Open dialog you can reduce the list of files by selecting the type of file you are looking for For example if you choose Text documents as the file type you will only see documents Writer can open including odt doc txt if you choose Spreadsheets you will see ods xsl and other files that Calc opens You can also open an existing document that is in an OpenDocument format by double clicking on the file s icon on the desktop or in a file manager such as Windows Explorer If you have associated Microsoft Office file formats with OOo you can also open these files by double clicking on them Under Microsoft Windows you can use either the OOo Open and Note Save As dialogs or the ones provided by Microsoft Windows See Using the Open and Save As dialogs on page 27 Saving documents To save a new document 1 Choose File gt Save 2 When the Save As dialog appears enter the file name and verify the file type if applicable To save an open document with the current file name choose File gt Save This will overwrite the last saved state of the file Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 25 Password protection To protect an entire document from being viewable without a password use the option on the Save As dialog to enter a password This option is only available for files saved in OpenDocument formats or the older Ope
149. cell to the right of this dropdown list This opens a dropdown list for the Vacations table Select Date from the Vacations table list It should now look like Figure 191 Click OK Tables involved Fuel T Vacations T Fields involved Vacations Date Date Figure 191 Selected fields in a relationship 6 Modifying the Update options and Delete options section of the Relation window Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 2393 a Right click the line connecting the Date fields in the two table lists to open a context menu b Select Edit to open the Relation window Figure 192 c Select Update cascade d Select Delete cascade Update options Delete options No action C No action Set null Set null C Set default _ Set default OK Cancel Help Figure 192 Update options and Delete options section While these options are not absolutely necessary they do help Having these options selected permits you to update a table that has a relationship defined with another table It also permits you to delete a field from the table Creating a database form Databases are used to store data But how is the data put into the database Forms are used to do this In the language of databases a form is a front end for data entry and editing Thursday April 12 2007 gt Fuel Purchases FuelCost FuelQuanity 276 45 11 650 Odometer PaymentType Figure 193 Fields of a si
150. come a single arrow with two heads Drag Ip the bottom of the table to make it longer and easier to see all of the fields in the table Fuel ir FuellD Date FuelCost FuelQuanity Odometer PaymentT ype Figure 245 Fuel table in query Step 3 Add fields to the table at the bottom 1 Double click the FuellD field in the Fuel table 2 Double click the Odometer field Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 293 3 Double click the FuelQuantity field The table at the bottom of the query window should now have three columns Figure 246 Field Alias Table Sort Visible Function Criterion Figure 246 Query table FuellD i Odometer FuelQuantity Fuel Fuel Fuel Step 4 Set the criterion for the query We want to the query s FuelID to begin with the numeral 1 1 Type gt 0in the Criterion cell under FuelID in the query table 2 Click the Run Query icon in the Query Design toolbar This icon is circled in red in Figure 247 Figure 247 Query Design OEA Figure 248 contains the Fuel table with my entries and the query results based upon the Fuel table FuellD Date FuelCost FuekQuantity Odometer FuellD Odometer Fuel uantity 0 Friday 16 00 14 690 704 2 1 178 7 6 430 1 Friday M 7 00 6 430 78 7 2 1032 3 19 570 2 Saturday 20 00 19 570 1032 3 3 1239 4 15 150 3 Saturday 16 00 15 150 1239 4 4 4 Sunday lt AutoFie lt AutoFie Figure 248 Fuel table and query of the fue
151. created your own ram templates or added templates from other sources slide masters from those templates will also appear in this list Figure 144 Available master pages slides 190 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Creating slide masters You can create a new slide master in a similar way to modifying the default slide master To start enable editing of slide masters by View gt Master gt Slide Master On the Master View toolbar click the New Master icon A second slide master appears in the Slides pane Modify this slide master to suit your requirements It is also recommended that you rename this new slide master right click on the slide in the Slides pane and select Rename master from the popup menu When you are done close the Master View toolbar to return to normal Slide editing mode Applying a slide master In the Tasks Pane be sure the Master Pages section is showing To apply one of the slide masters to al slides in your presentation click on it in the list To apply a different slide master to one or more selected slides 1 In the Slide Pane select the slides you want to change 2 In the Tasks Pane right click on the slide master you want to apply to the selected slides and click Apply to Selected Slides on the pop up menu Loading additional slide masters Sometimes in the same set of slides you may need to mix multiple Slide masters that may belong to different templates
152. creating in Design View 277 creating using a Wizard 257 entering data 285 modifying 261 subform 257 tab order 275 database reports creating 298 modifying 305 Static 299 database table create using wizard 242 dynamic 303 joined fields 258 relationships 253 dBase database 278 default file format 48 default formatting 193 196 default template 74 deleting files 26 derivative markup Math 321 Design View Base creating anew table 248 creating forms 277 creating queries 292 dictionaries installing 52 dictionary 93 different first page 79 digital rights management DRM 330 digital signature 335 DIM 372 dispatch framework 377 dispatch helper 372 distorting an image 231 dithering 37 dockable window 23 document closing 30 create from template 68 creating 24 opening 25 Starting new 24 document status option 34 Documentation Project 15 download updates automatically 46 downloading OpenOffice org 13 Draw 204 236 drawing circle or ellipse 217 duplication 232 Flash export 236 HTML export 236 inserting pictures 235 line 214 rectangle 216 Save in a foreign format 236 Drawing toolbar 208 duplication 232 dynamic gradients 231 E e mailing Mail Merge Wizard 333 several recipients 332 Writer document as attachment 332 edit document properties before saving 48 ellipse drawing 217 en dash and em dash 97 envelope formatting address blocks 117 mail merge from database 117 printing 116 envelope printing 116 EPS images i
153. ct and move the cursor before the sign Press Ctrl C to copy the selected text to the clipboard Press End to move the cursor to the end of the line 374 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 10 Press Backspace twice to remove the two trailing spaces 11 Press Home to move the cursor to the start of the line 12 Press Ctrl V to paste the selected number to the start of the line 13 Pasting the value also pasted an extra space so press Backspace to remove the extra space 14 Press Tab to insert a tab between the number and the name 15 Press Home to move to the start of the line 16 Press down arrow to move to the next line 17 Stop recording the macro and save the macro It takes much longer to read and write the steps than to record the macro Work slowly and think about the steps as you do them With practice this becomes second nature The generated macro has been modified to contain the step number in the comments to match the code to the step above Listing 2 Copy the numeric value to the start of the column sub CopyNumToColl rem ee eee rem define variables dim document as object dim dispatcher as object rem rem get access to the document document ThisComponent CurrentController Frame dispatcher createUnoService com sun star frame DispatchHelper rem 2 Press Ctrl Right
154. cts P Fontwork Shape Edits the shape of the selected object You can choose from a palette of shapes Vrda vw d mw Avl JOS awl OS Figure 306 Fontwork toolbar showing palette of shapes Fontwork Same Letter Heights Changes the height of characters in the object Toggles between normal height some characters taller than others for example capital letters d h and others and all letters the same height Figure 307 Left normal letters right same letter heights 348 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 hh 4 AY Fontwork Alignment Changes the alignment of characters Choices are left align center right align word justify and stretch justify The effects of the text alignment can only be seen if the text spans over two or more lines In the stretch justify mode all the lines are filled completely Fontwork Character Spacing Changes the character spacing and kerning in the object For custom spacing input a percentage value 100 is normal spacing less than 100 is tight spacing more than 100 is expanded Spacing Using the Formatting toolbar Now let us go further and customize the Fontwork object with several more attributes Left Align Center Right Align Word Justify Stretch Justify Fontwork Charact Very Tight Tight Normal Loose Very Loose Custom Kern Character Pairs Click on the Fontwork object The Formatting toolbar changes t
155. cuments Data can be placed into Writer and Calc documents from the tables in the data source window In Writer values from individual fields can be inserted Or a complete table can be created in the Writer document One common way to use a data source is to perform a mail merge Selecting Tools gt Mail Merge Wizard or clicking on the Mail Merge icon a small paper and envelope icon on the View Data Tip Source pane launches the Mail Merge wizard which steps through creating a mail merge document This is discussed in Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge in the Writer Guide Writer documents To insert a field from a table opened in the data source window into a Writer document click on the field name the gray square at the top of the field list and with the left mouse button held down drag the field onto the document In a Writer document it will appear as lt FIELD gt where FIELD is the name of the field you dragged For example enter the cost of meals and who paid for them on a certain date of a vacation Make a sentence of this data On date our breakfast cost amount paid by name our lunch cost amount paid by name and our supper cost amount paid by name Write the words of the sentence with the exception of the words in parentheses Use the correct field names in the place of the words in parentheses 1 Replacing data e Begin the sentence by typing the word On e Click the field name Data in the
156. d All w soffice All w sun All Il IgnoreAllList All Options Check spelling as you type Check uppercase words Check words with numbers Check capitalisation Check special regions eh el i Figure OO Choosing languages dictionaries and options for checking spelling 54 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Here you can also check which user defined custom dictionaries are active by default and add or remove dictionaries by clicking the New or Delete buttons Choosing Internet options Use the Internet Options pages to define search engines and save proxy settings for use with OpenOffice org If you are using a Netscape or Mozilla browser such as Firefox you can enable the Mozilla Plug in so you can open OOo files in your browser print them save them and work with them in other ways If you are using a Unix or Linux based operating system including Mac OS X an additional page of E mail options is available where you can specify the e mail program to use when you send the current document as e mail Figure 36 Under Windows the operating system s default e mail program is always used i Options Internet E mail OpenOffice org l Load Save Sending documents as e mail attachments H Language Settings l OpenOffice org Writer E mail program mozilla thunderbird OpenOffice org Writer Web OpenOffice org Base Charts amp Internet Proxy Search E mail Mozilla Plug in
157. d format you need 4 Click Save From this point on all changes you make to the document will occur only in the Microsoft Word document You have actually changed the name of your document If you want to go back to working with the OOo version of your document you must open it again 86 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 To have 000 save documents by default in the Microsoft Word file format go to Tools gt Options gt Load Save See Tip Choosing options for loading and saving documents in Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org Save as DB Document Files Microsoft Office Title Type Size CI Auto Save Folder CI Family Folder CI Graphic Images Folder Miscellaneous Folder CI Gutlook Folder CI Templates Folder File name chapter_template_V2 File type Ope nDic ent Text odt eee i cancel rain tai Text odt OpenDocument Text Template ott Help i OpenOffice org 1 0 Text Document sxw _ Save with passwo feo org 1 0 Text Document Template stw Microsoft Word 6 0 doc Rich Text Format rtf StarWriter 5 0 sdw StarWriter 5 0 Template vor Figure 58 Saving a file in Microsoft Word format Working with text Working with text selecting copying pasting moving in Writer is Similar to working with text in any other program OOo also has some convenient ways to select items that are not next to each other select a vertical block of text and paste unformatted text Selecting
158. d by a colon and then the lower right hand cell reference For example to select the range that would go from A3 to C6 you would enter A3 C6 Range of non contiguous cells 1 Select the cell or range of cells using one of the methods above 2 Move the mouse pointer to the start of the next range or single cell 3 Hold down the Control key and click or click and drag to select a range 4 Repeat as necessary 136 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Selecting columns and rows Entire columns and rows can be selected very quickly in OOo Single column or row To select a single column click on the column identifier letter see Figure 95 To select a single row click on the row identifier number Multiple columns or rows To select multiple columns or rows that are contiguous 1 Click on the first column or row in the group 2 Hold down the Shift key 3 Click the last column or row in the group To select multiple columns or rows that are not contiguous 1 Click on the first column or row in the group 2 Hold down the Control key 3 Click on all of the subsequent columns or rows while holding down the Control key Entire sheet To select the entire sheet click on the small box between the A column header and the 1 row header see Figure 102 Al O O A O i 2 Figure 102 Select All box Select All You can also use the keyboard to select the entire sheet by pressing Cont
159. d select Insert gt Note or press Ctr A t N The anchor point of the note is connected by a dotted line to a box on the right hand side of the page where you can type the text of the note OOo automatically adds at the bottom of the note the name or initials of the author and a time stamp Figure 80 shows an example of text with notes from two different authors Select Tools gt Options gt User Data to configure the name you want to appear in the Author field of the note or to change it If more than one person edits the document each author is automatically allocated a different background color Note sample riter document has been vastly improved in i OOo notes are now displayed at the side of H a Ce EAA ET ERTL a eal NTE PTS a ee ichele Zarri gt user who created them To insert a note in Yesterday 23 34 kal 1 the text the note refers to and select he anchor point of the note is connected by Cello Suite 1 de ofthe page where you can type your BWV1007 ttom the author of the note as well as a Prelude created lt ref gt shows an example of text Allemande Minuets configure the name you want to appear in Sarabande It Courante nt each author will be alitomatically Gigue Johan Sebastian Bach Today 23 37 Figure 80 Notes in OO03 Right clicking on any note pops up a menu where you can delete the current note all the notes from the same author or all the notes in the document From this menu you can als
160. d to your desktop system Keys that are assigned to the desktop system are not Note available to OOo Try to assign different keys either for OOo described in Chapter 14 or for your desktop system see your system s documentation 410 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Function key shortcuts Shortcut Keys Result F1 Starts the OpenOffice org Help In the OpenOffice org Help jumps to main help page Shift F1 Activates What s This extended tip help for the mouse pointer which turns into a question mark Move the pointer over an item command icon or control to view the extended tip Shift F2 Displays an extended tip for the item command icon or control currently selected by using the keyboard Ctrl F4 or Alt F4 Closes the current document Closes OpenOffice org when the last open document is closed F6 Sets focus in next subwindow Shift F6 Sets focus in previous subwindow F10 Activates the first menu File menu Shift F10 Opens the context pop up menu Ctrl F11 Opens the Style Catalog General shortcut keys for OpenOffice org Shortcut Keys Result Enter key Activates the focused button in a dialog Esc Terminates the action or dialog If in OpenOffice org Help goes up one level Spacebar Toggles the focused checkbox in a dialog Arrow keys Changes the active control field in an option section of a dialog Tab Advances focus to the next section or element in a dialog Shift Tab Moves
161. data source window and drag it to the right of the word On e The sentence becomes On lt Date gt If you have Field shadings turned on View gt Field shading lt Date gt has a gray background Otherwise it does not 2 Replacing first amount e Continue typing after lt Date gt our breakfast cost e Click the Breakfast field name and drag it to the right of what you have just typed e Make sure you have the proper spacing between the field names and the words before and after them e Results so far On lt Date gt our breakfast cost lt Breakfast gt Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 281 3 Replacing the first name Continue typing after lt Breakfast gt paid by making sure to add a space afterward Click the Bpayment field name and drag it to the right of what you just typed Place a comma after lt Bpayment gt Results so far On lt Date gt our breakfast cost lt Breakfast gt paid by lt BPayment gt 4 Follow these examples to fill in the rest of the fields in the sentence Use lt Lunch gt and lt Lpayment gt for the second set of amount and name in the sentence Use lt Supper gt and lt Spayment gt for the third set of amount and name in th sentence Final results On lt Date gt our breakfast cost lt Breakfast gt paid by lt BPayment gt our lunch cost lt Lunch gt paid by lt LPayment gt our supper cost lt Supper gt paid by lt SPayment gt 5 Add data to the f
162. de Bk BT AtAvantGarde Md BT Al BakerSienet BT Figure 16 Font list Left With preview Right Without preview Bitstream Vera Sans Mono Bitstream Vera Serif Font Lists Show font history When you select this option the last five fonts you have assigned to the current document are displayed at the top of the font list 3D view Use OpenGL Specifies that all 3D graphics from Draw and Impress will be displayed in your system using OpenGL capable hardware If your system does not have OpenGL capable hardware this setting will be ignored 3D view Use OpenGL Optimized output Select this option for optimized OpenGL output Disable the optimization in case of graphical errors of 3D output 3D view Use dithering The Use dithering option uses dithering to display additional colors when the computer s graphics system offers less than the optimal 16 million 24 bit colors Dithering creates the illusion of new colors and shades by varying the pattern of color pixels Varying the patterns of black and white dots for instance produces different Shades of gray Internally 3 D graphics are always created with 16 million colors 24 bit color depth and dithering can be used to Note compensate when fewer actual colors are available Without dithering several bits of color information would be omitted leading to significantly reduced image quality 3D view Object refresh during interaction Specifies that if you rotate or
163. de master There are cases however where it is desirable to revert a manually modified element of the slide to the style defined in the slide master to do that select that element and choose Format gt Default Formatting from the menu bar Sometimes you may want to try several of the available layouts to see which one is more suitable for your contents Applying a layout only requires that you open the Layouts section of the Tasks pane and double click on the new layout Alternatively you can right click on the desired layout thumbnail and select Apply to selected slide from the pop up menu Adding text to all slides Some of the supplied slide masters have text objects in the footer You can add other text objects to the master page for your slides to act as a header or a footer 1 Choose View gt Master gt Slide Master from the menu bar 2 On the Drawing toolbar see Figure 140 select the Text icon 3 Click once and drag in the master page to draw a text object and then type or paste your text into the object or add fields as described below 4 Choose View gt Normal when you are finished To add a field such as the date or page number to a text object in the header or footer choose Insert gt Fields and select the required field from the submenu If you want to edit a field in your slide select it and choose Edit gt Fields The fields you can use in Impress are e Date fixed e Date variable updates aut
164. default in a PDF viewer The selections should be self explanatory Figure 287 Initial View page of PDF Options dialog User Interface page of PDF Options dialog On the User Interface page you can choose more settings to control how a PDF viewer displays the file Some of these choices are particularly useful when you are creating a PDF to be used as a presentation or a kiosk type display Window options section e Resize window to initial page Causes the PDF viewer window to resize to fit the first page of the PDF e Center window on screen Causes the PDF viewer window to be centered on the computer screen e Open in full screen mode Causes the PDF viewer to open full screen instead of in a smaller window e Display document title Causes the PDF viewer to display the document s title in the title bar 328 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Figure 288 User Interface page of PDF Options dialog User interface options section e Hide menubar Causes the PDF viewer to hide the menu bar Hide toolbar Causes the PDF viewer to hide the toolbar Hide window controls Causes the PDF viewer to hide other window controls Transitions In Impress displays slide transition effects as their respective PDF effects Bookmarks Select how many heading levels are displayed as bookmarks if Export bookmarks is selected on the General page Links page of PDF Options dialog On this page you can choose how links are ex
165. depend on the selected printer consult the printer s documentation for details e What pages to print how many copies to print and in what order to print them Use dashes to specify page ranges and commas or semicolons to separate ranges for example 1 5 11 14 34 40 Selection is the highlighted part of a page or pages e What items to print Click the Options button to display the Printer Options dialog Figure 82 Print x Printer Mame HP LaserJet 5L bal Status Default printer Ready Type HP LaserJet SL Location LPT1 Comment Print to File Print range Copies OETI Number of copies 1 Pages l i Figure 81 The Print dialog 112 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Printer Options Contents Pages Motes Graphics Left pages None Tables Right pages O Notes only Drawings _ Reversed End of document Help Controls _ Brochure End of page Background Print black Other Print automatically inserted blank pages Create single print jobs _ Paper tray From printer settings ax Figure 82 Printer Options dialog for Writer Selecting print options for a document Selections on the Printer Options dialog apply to this printing of this document only To specify default printing options you need to use two pages in Tools gt Options OpenOffice org Print see Chapter 2 and OpenOffice org Writer Print which looks very similar to the Printer Options dia
166. der to enter answers Forms are used in three ways e To create a simple document for the recipient to complete such as a questionnaire sent out to a group of people who fill it in and return it e To link into a database or data source and allow the user to enter information Someone taking orders might enter the information for each order into a database using a form To view information held in a database or data source A librarian might call up information about books Writer offers several ways to fill information into a form including check boxes option buttons text boxes pull down lists and spinners See Chapter 15 Using Forms in Writer in the Writer Guide Using fields Fields are extremely useful features of Writer They are used for data that changes in a document such as the current date or the total number of pages and for inserting document properties such as name author and date of last update Fields are the basis of cross 122 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 referencing see below automatic numbering of figures tables headings and other elements and a wide range of other functions far too many to describe here See Chapter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide for details Using cross references If you type in references to other parts of the document those references can easily get out of date if you reword a heading add or remove figures or reorganize topics Replace any
167. document in Writer without using the Wizard then use the Wizard to send it This method is described here 332 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 To use the Mail Merge Wizard to send a previously created Writer document 1 Click Tools gt Mail Merge Wizard On the first page of the wizard Figure 292 select Use the current document and click Next Figure 292 select starting document 2 On the second page Figure 293 select E mail message and click Next lt _ gt Figure 293 Select document type 3 On the third page Figure 294 click the Select Address List button Select the required address list even if only one is shown and then click OK If the address list you need is not shown here you can click Add to find it and add it to the list 4 Back on the Select address list page click Next On the Create salutation page Figure 295 deselect This document should contain a salutation Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 333 Figure 294 Selecting an address list 5 In the left hand list click 8 Save print or send OOo displays a Creating documents message and then displays the Save print or send page of the Wizard 6 Select Send merged document as E Mail The lower part of the page changes to show e mail settings choices see Figure 296 7 Type a subject for your email and click Send documents OOo sends the e mails Mail Merge Wizard Steps Create a salutation 1 Se
168. drag it to a new location Figure 4 Handle of docked toolbar E Untitled Opentitice ore Writer File Edit wiew Insert Format Table Tools Window Help E AB a Ge OA n all Times Mew Roman wE Figure 3 Moving a docked toolbar Title bar of floating toolbar T X Bullets and Numbering gt Zyn e Figure 4 Moving a floating toolbar im I t I 22 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Floating toolbars OOo includes several additional context sensitive toolbars whose defaults appear as floating toolbars in response to the cursor s current position or selection For example when the cursor is in a table a floating 7able toolbar appears and when the cursor is in a numbered or bullet list the Bullets and Numbering toolbar appears You can dock these toolbars to the top bottom or side of the window if you wish see Moving toolbars on page 22 Docking floating windows and toolbars Toolbars and some windows such as the Navigator and the Styles and Formatting window are dockable You can move re size or dock them to an edge To dock a window or toolbar do one of the following e Click on the title bar of the floating window and drag it to the side until you see the outline of a box appear in the main window then release the window This method depends on your styles and T Lad LA cd a ES q Default First line indent Heading settings so it may not work fo
169. e Gluepoints and connectors All Draw objects have associated invisible gluepoints Most objects have four gluepoints as shown in Figure 166 ee E ee ee ee k Figure 166 Four gluepoints Gluepoints are different from handles the small blue or green squares around an object Use the handles to move or resize an object use the gluepoints to attach connectors to an object You can add more gluepoints and customize gluepoints using the toolbar of the same name Gluepoints become visible when you click Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 219 the Gluepoints icon on the Drawing toolbar and then move the end of a connector over the object Connectors are a type of line or arrow whose ends dock to glue points on other objects When you move the other object the connector moves with it Connectors are particularly useful for making organizational charts You can reorganize the blocks of your chart and all the connected objects stay connected Figure 167 shows two Draw objects and a connector Figure 167 A connector between two objects Draw has a range of advanced connector functions You can change connector types using the context menu or by opening the floating Connectors toolbar click on the Connector icon For more about connectors and gluepoints see Chapter 9 Organization Charts Flow Diagrams and More in the Draw Guide Drawing geometric shapes Geometric shapes include basic sh
170. e When you have finished typing text click outside the text frame Double click on the text at any time to edit it 218 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 When you type text the upper toolbar includes the usual paragraph attributes indents first line and tab stops You can change the style of all or part of the text The Styles and Formatting window also works here select Format gt Styles and Formatting or press F11 to launch so you can create Graphics styles that you can reuse for other text frames Graphics styles affect all of the text within a text frame To style parts of the text use direct formating with the toolbar Text frames can also have fill colors shadows and other attributes just like any other Draw object You can rotate the frame and write the text at any angle These options are available by right clicking on the object Use the Callout tool located on the Drawing toolbar to create callouts also known as captions or figure labels If you double click on an object or press F2 or the Text icon in the Drawing toolbar when an object is selected text is written in the center of the object and remains within the object Nearly any kind of object contains such an additional text element These texts have slight differences to those in text frames concerning position and hyphenation For more about text see Chapter 2 Drawing Basic Shapes and Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guid
171. e gt button to move the Photo field from the Available fields window to the Selected fields window It will be at the bottom of the list directly below the NumberofTracks field 5 Ifa mistake is made in the order as listed above click on the field name that is in the wrong order to highlight it Use the Up or Down arrow on the right side of the Selected Fields list see Figure 177 to move the field name to the correct position Click Next Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 243 oelected fields Field information Field name Field Type DatePurchased AutoValue Format Entry required Notes fl h NumberofTracks oat Photo Add Remove Move Figure 177 Order of fields Below the Selected Fields list are two buttons one with a and Caution one witha These buttons are used to add or to remove fields A from the Selected Fields list Be careful when using these buttons until well acquainted with how to create tables Figure 177 Step 2 Set field types and formats In this step you give the fields their properties When you click a field the information on the right changes You can then make changes to meet your needs See Figure 178 Click each field one at a time and make the changes listed below Figure 178 Changing field types 244 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 If any of these fields requires an entry set Entry required to Yes If Entry required is set to Yes this fie
172. e you could define a Heading 1 paragraph to be followed by a Text Body paragraph A more complex example would be Title followed by Author followed by Abstract followed by Heading 1 followed by Text Body By setting up these sequences you can avoid manually applying styles in most cases 80 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 OpenOf fice org3 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer Word processing with OpenOffice org What ts Writer Writer is the word processor component of OpenOffice org OOo In addition to the usual features of a word processor spell checking thesaurus hyphenation autocorrect find and replace automatic generation of tables of contents and indexes mail merge and others Writer provides these important features e Templates and styles see Chapter 3 e Powerful page layout methods including frames columns and tables e Embedding or linking of graphics spreadsheets and other objects e Built in drawing tools e Master documents to group a collection of documents into a single document e Change tracking during revisions e Database integration including a bibliography database e Export to PDF including bookmarks see Chapter 10 e And many more These features are covered in detail in the Writer Guide The Writer interface The main Writer workspace is shown in Figure 53 The menus and toolbars are described in Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org Some other features of th
173. e 191 description 189 fields 193 loading additional 191 modifying 192 Slide show organizing 201 see presentation 171 Slide Sorter view Impress 178 Slides adding text 188 hide 189 inserting 186 layouts 186 master 188 189 modifying 188 Slides pane Impress 171 snap functions 211 Snap to grid 212 Solaris system requirements 13 sort order database fields 290 special characters 95 spelling checker 92 spelling options 54 Standard toolbar 21 StarBasic 308 starting a new document 24 starting OpenOffice org 16 Status Bar Draw 206 Style dialog 63 64 styles 230 Apply Style list 61 assigning to shortcut keys 403 AutoUpdate 63 changing using Style dialog 63 creating by dragging and dropping 65 creating from selection 64 creating new 64 creating using Style dialog 64 custom 64 deleting 68 description 58 189 Fill Format 61 formatting text 196 graphic styles 190 linking 64 loading from template or document 67 modifying 62 presentation styles 190 types supported 58 updating from a selection 63 Styles and Formatting window 60 SUB 371 subforms database 277 Subroutines 379 Subroutines in macros 371 sun Microsystems 15 417 Sun Report Builder 308 Support 14 system font user interface 36 T Table Wizard database 243 Tasks pane Impress 173 tear off toolbars 21 template create document from 68 create from document 69 create using wizard 71 spreadsheet deleting 77 using as data source 278 d
174. e Writer interface are covered in this chapter File Edit View Insert Format Table Tools Window Help rel Spun a 1 GENEP 2 O C E ee es ee T Standard toolbar Formatting toolbar il EA Saul English USA INSRT STD E er oe Figure 53 The main Writer workspace in Print Layout view 82 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Status bar The Writer status bar provides information about the document and convenient ways to quickly change some document features From left to right the fields are as follows Page number Shows the current page number the sequence number of the current page if different and the total number of pages in the document For example if you restarted page numbering at 1 on the third page its page number is 1 and its sequence number is 3 To jump to the location of a bookmark right click on this field A list of bookmarks pops up click on the required one To jump to a specific page in the document double click in this field The Navigator opens Click in the Page Number field and type the required page number Page style Shows the style of the current page To change the page style right click on this field A list of page styles pops up choose a different style by clicking on it To edit the page style double click on this field The Page Style dialog opens Language Shows the language for the selected text Click to open a menu where you can choose
175. e automatically loaded A loaded library is displayed differently from a library that is not loaded To load the library and the modules it contains double click on the library Where are macros stored OpenOffice org stores user specific data in a directory under the user s home directory For example on Windows this is C Documents and Settings lt name gt Application Data User macros are stored in OpenOffice org2 user basic Each library is stored in its own directory off the basic directory It is not important to understand where macros are stored for casual use If you know where they are stored however you can create a backup share your macros or inspect them if there is an error For Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 381 example on one or more of my OpenOffice org upgrades all of my macros disappeared Although the macros were still on disk the macros were not copied to the new directories The solution was to import the macros into the new installation Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Dialogs to open the OpenOffice org Macros organizer dialog Another common way to open this dialog is to use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the OpenOffice org Macros dialog and then click the Organizer button see Figure 320 Figure 320 The macro organizer dialog Importing macros The OpenOffice org Macro Organizer dialog provides functionality to create delete and rename
176. e context menu When an object is selected you can right click on the object to bring up a context menu which provides additional access to the options Shown above and another way to change an object s attributes The entries with a small arrow on the right hand side contain a submenu Editing lines and borders Lines like arrows and the borders of an object are managed through the same dialog RA An object s border is just another type of line gt lt Y You can change some properties from the Line and Filling toolbar To see more options select the object and click on the Line icon or right click on the object and choose Line from the context menu This opens the Line dialog Common line properties In most cases the property you want to change is the line s style solid dashed invisible and so on its color or its width These options are all available from the Line and Filling toolbar Figure 170 You can also edit these properties from the Line dialog where you can also change the line s transparency Figure 172 illustrates different degrees of transparency 228 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Figure 172 The vertical lines have different levels of transparency 0 25 and 50 Drawing arrows Arrowheads and other line endings usually referred to collectively as arrows are a line property Select a line and click on the Arrow Style icon This opens the Arrowheads menu Seve
177. e document for example print copy or change it e With a permissions password set the PDF can be opened by anyone but its permissions can be restricted See Figure 290 e With both the open password and permission password set the PDF can only be opened with the correct password and its permissions can be restricted Permissions settings are effective only if the user s PDF viewer Note respects the settings Figure 291 shows the pop up dialog displayed when you click the Set open password button on the Security page of the PDF Options dialog After you set a password for permissions the other choices on the Security page shown in Figure 290 become available These selections should be self explanatory Figure 291 Setting a password to encrypt a PDF Exporting to other formats OOo uses the term export for some file operations involving a change of file type If you cannot find what you want under Save As look under Export as well OpenOffice org can export files to XHTML Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 331 In addition OOo Writer can export to BibTeX bib LaTeX 2e tex and MediaWiki txt OOo Draw and OOo Impress can export to Macromedia Flash swrf To export to one of these formats choose File gt Export On the Export dialog specify a file name for the exported document then select the required format in the File format list and click the Export button E mailing docume
178. e form and subform we will joint the Date fields of these two tables Figure 198 258 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 select the joins between your forms First joined subform field First joined main form field CE second joined subform field second joined main form field Figure 198 Selection of joined subform and main form fields 1 Select Date from the First joined subform field dropdown list This is the Date field in the Fuel table This is not the Primary key for the Fuel table but it is known as a Foreign key 2 Select Date from the First joined main form field dropdown list This is the Date field in the Vacations table This is the Primary key for the Vacations table Click Next Note Caution A It is possible to create a relationship between two tables that is based upon more than one pair of fields How to do that and why is discussed in the Base Guide When selecting a pair of fields from two tables to use as a relationship they have to have the same field type That is why we used the Date field from both tables both their field types are Date DATE Whether a single pair of fields from two tables are chosen as the relationship or two or more pairs are chosen certain requirements must be met for the form to work e No field from the subform can be the Primary key for its table FuelID cannot be used e Each pair of joined fields must have the same file type e One of the fields f
179. e had to use squiggly brackets to make the Note derivative Numbering equations Equation numbering is one of OOoMath s best hidden features The steps are simple but obscure 1 Start a new line 2 Type fn and then press F3 The fn is replaced by a numbered formula E mc 2 Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 321 Now you can double click on the formula to edit it For example here is the Riemann Zeta function c You can reference an equation as shown in Equation 2 with these steps 1 Insert gt Cross reference 2 Click on the References tab Figure 283 3 Under Type select Text 4 Under Selection pick the equation number 5 Under Format choose Reference 6 Click Insert Done If you later add more equations to the paper before the referenced equation all the equations will automatically renumber and the cross references will update 3 Figure 284 Inserting a cross reference to an equation number Tip To insert the equation number without parenthesis around it choose Numbering instead of Reference under Format 322 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 OpenOf ficeorg3 Chapter 1 O Printing Exporting and E mailing Introduction This chapter provides general information about printing exporting and e mailing documents from OOo Quick printing Click the Print File Directly icon to send the entire document to the default printer defined fo
180. e heading Apply column name AutoFormat Create row only Cancel Help Figure 236 Insert Database Columns dialog 4 Move the fields you want in your table from the Database Columns list to the Table column s list e To place the fields in the order you select click the field and use the single arrow to move the fields in the order you desire You can also limit the fields you use to less than all of the fields available e Ifyou want to use all of the fields use the double arrow pointing to the right to move all of them at one time The order of the fields in the table you create will be the same as in the data source table e Ifyou want to remove a single field from the Table Column s list click the field and use the single arrow pointing to the left e Ifyou want to start over by moving all of the fields back to the Database Columns list click the double arrow pointing to the left Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 283 5 Select the settings for your table Use the default settings as in Figure 236 6 Click OK 7 Save the document Calc spreadsheets There are two ways to enter data in a Calc spreadsheet One enters the data into the spreadsheet cells The other creates records in the spreadsheet just like they are done in creating a form in a database While you can directly access the data in the spreadsheet cells you can only see the data in the records created in the spreadsheet
181. e in color palettes in OOo 40 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Font options You can define replacements for any fonts that might appear in your documents If you receive from someone else a document containing fonts that you do not have on your system OpenOffice org will substitute fonts for those it does not find You might prefer to specify a different font from the one the program chooses On the OpenOffice org gt Fonts page Figure 20 e Select the Apply Replacement Table option e Select or type the name of the font to be replaced in the Font box If you do not have this font on your system it will not appear in the drop down list in this box so you need to type it in e In the Replace with box select a suitable font from the drop down list of fonts installed on your computer The checkmark to the right of the Replace with box turns green Click on this checkmark A row of information now appears in the larger box below the input boxes Select the options under Always and Screen In the bottom section of the page you can change the typeface and size of the font used to display source code such as HTML and Basic in macros Apply replacement table Font Replace with Helvetica Arial h 3 Replace with Font settings for HTML and Basic sources Fonts Automatic x Non proportional fonts only Size 10 w Figure 20 Defining a font to be substituted for another fon
182. e perforce had to forget his wife and his child and all the friends and possessions Figure 59 Selecting items that are not next to each other To select nonconsecutive items using the keyboard 1 Select the first piece of text For more information about keyboard selection of text see the topic Navigating and selecting with the keyboard in the Help 2 Press Shift F8 amp This puts Writer in Add mode The word ADD appears on the status bar 3 Use the arrow keys to move to the start of the next piece of text to be selected Hold down the Shift key and select the next piece of text 4 Repeat as often as needed 5 Now you can work with the selected text 6 Press Fsc to exit from this mode Selecting a vertical block of text You can select a vertical block or column of text that is separated by Spaces or tabs as you might see in text pasted from e mails program listings or other sources using OOo s block selection mode To change to block selection mode use Edit gt Selection Mode gt Block Area or click several times in the status bar on STD until it changes to BLK Page 1 1 Default English USA INSRT ca Now highlight the selection using mouse or keyboard as shown in Figure 60 88 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 January March April June July September October December Figure 60 Selecting a vertical block of text Cutting copying and pasti
183. e same Note time gives four views each with its own vertical and horizontal scroll bars Removing split views To remove a split view do any of the following e Double click on each split line e Click on and drag the split lines back to their places at the ends of the scroll bars e Select Window gt Split to remove all split lines at the same time You can also split the screen using a menu command Click in a cell that is immediately below and immediately to the right of where you wish the screen to be split and choose Window gt Split Tip Entering data using the keyboard Most data entry in Calc can be accomplished using the keyboard Entering numbers Click in the cell and type in the number using the number keys on either the main keyboard or the numeric keypad To enter a negative number either type a minus sign in front of it or enclose it in parentheses brackets like this 1234 By default numbers are right aligned and negative numbers have a leading minus symbol Entering text Click in the cell and type the text Text is left aligned by default Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 145 Entering numbers as text If a number is entered in the format 01481 Calc will drop the leading 0 Exception see Tip below To preserve the leading zero for example for telephone area codes type an apostrophe before the number like this 01481 The data is now regarded as text by Calc Formulas and f
184. e slide shows requires some knowledge of the elements which the slides contain Slides containing text use styles to determine the appearance of that text Slides containing objects are created the same way that drawings are created in Draw For this reason we recommend that you also study Chapter 3 Working with Templates and Styles and Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw Parts of the main Impress window The main Impress window Figure 132 has three parts the Slides pane Workspace and Tasks pane Additionally several toolbars can be displayed or hidden during the creation of a presentation You can remove the Slides pane or Tasks pane from view by clicking the X in the upper right corner You can also show or hide these panes using View gt Slide Pane or View gt Tasks Pane Tip Slides pane The Slides pane contains thumbnail pictures of the slides in your presentation in the order they will be shown unless you change the order Clicking a slide selects it and places it in the Workspace While it is there you can apply any changes desired to that particular slide Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 171 File Edit View Insert Format Tools Slide Show Window Help oe Ses vies eexnes oe N Slides Slide Sorter Normal Outline Notes Handout Master Pages Layouts me 1 b Table Design Custom Animation 5 amp Slide Transition gt BeT 2 9 0 0 BA k KY ee OF A 1 04 7 9 83 0 00 0 00 20
185. e spacing and borders and can include character formatting Character styles affect selected text within a paragraph such as the font and size of text or bold and italic formats Frame styles are used to format graphic and text frames including wrapping type borders backgrounds and columns Numbering styles apply similar alignment numbering or bullet characters and fonts to numbered or bulleted lists Cell styles include fonts alignment borders background number formats for example currency date number and cell protection Graphics styles in drawings and presentations include line area Shadowing transparency font connectors dimensioning and other attributes Presentation styles include attributes for font indents spacing alignment and tabs Different styles are available in the various components of OOo as listed in Table 1 OpenOffice org comes with many predefined styles You can use the styles as provided modify them or create new styles as described in this chapter Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 59 Table 1 Styles available in OOo components Style Type Writer Draw Impress Page Paragraph Character Frame Numbering Cell Presentation Graphics included in Frame styles Applying styles OpenOffice org provides several ways for you to select styles to apply Using the Styles and Formatting window 1 Click the Styles and Formatting icon h located at the left hand
186. e they will appear faded as in Figure 96 Selecting items in a sheet or spreadsheet Selecting cells Cells can be selected in a variety of combinations and quantities Single cell Left click in the cell The result will look like the left side of Figure 99 You can verify your selection by looking in the Name box Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 135 Range of contiguous cells A range of cells can be selected using the keyboard or the mouse To select a range of cells by dragging the mouse 1 Click in a cell 2 Press and hold down the left mouse button 3 Move the mouse around the screen 4 Once the desired block of cells is highlighted release the left mouse button To select a range of cells without dragging the mouse 1 Click in the cell which is to be one corner of the range of cells 2 Move the mouse to the opposite corner of the range of cells 3 Hold down the Shift key and click To select a range of cells without using the mouse 1 Select the cell that will be one of the corners in the range of cells 2 While holding down the Shift key use the cursor arrows to select the rest of the range The result of any of these methods looks like the right side of Figure 99 You can also directly select a range of cells using the Name box Click into the Name box as described in Using a cell reference on page 132 To select a range of cells enter the Tip cell reference for the upper left hand cell followe
187. eader drop down list or specify a custom header using the buttons below If you are formatting a footer the choices are the same Custom header Click in the area Left Center Right that you want to customize then use the buttons to add elements or change text attributes Opens the Text Attributes dialog Inserts the total number of pages Inserts the File Name field z Inserts the Date field Inserts the Sheet Name field Inserts the Time field Inserts the current page number Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 169 OpenOf ficeorg3 Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress Presentations in OpenOffice org What is Impress Impress is OpenOffice org s slide show presentations program You can create slides that contain many different elements including text bulleted and numbered lists tables charts clip art and a wide range of graphic objects Impress also includes a spelling checker a thesaurus prepackaged text styles and attractive background styles This chapter includes instructions screenshots and hints to guide you through the Impress environment while designing the easier presentations Although more difficult designs are mentioned throughout this chapter explanations for creating them are in the Impress Guide If you have a working knowledge of how to create slide shows we recommend you use the Impress Guide for your source of information To use Impress for more than very simpl
188. eady know exactly what some of the slides will contain You may only have a general idea of what you want on some of the slides That is alright You can make some changes as you go Change your outline to match the changes you make in your slides The important part is that you have a general idea of what you want and how to get it Put that information on paper That makes it much easier to create the presentation Using the Presentation Wizard You can start Impress in several ways e From the OOo Welcome screen if no component is open e From the system menu or the OOo Quickstarter Details vary with your operating system see Chapter 1 for more information e From any open component of OOo Click the triangle to the right of the New icon on the main toolbar and select Presentation from the drop down menu or choose File gt New gt Presentation from the menu bar When you start Impress the Presentation Wizard appears Figure 139 If you do not want the wizard to start every time you launch Impress select the Do not show this wizard again checkbox You can enable it again later if you need under Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Impress gt General gt Wizard and select the Start with wizard checkbox Leave the Preview checkbox selected so templates slide designs and slide transitions appear in the preview box as you choose them Tip Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 181 Presentation Wizard q Ty
189. earch conditions The search conditions available are listed below They allow us to compare the name we entered with the names of the artist in our database and decide whether to include a particular artist in our query or not is equal to the same as is not equal to not the same as is smaller than comes before is greater than comes after is equal or less than the same as or comes before is equal or greater than the same as or comes after like similar to in some way Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 291 These conditions apply to numbers letters using the Note alphabetical order and dates 1 Since we are only searching for one thing we will use the default setting of Match all of the following 2 We are looking for a particular artist so select is equal to 3 Enter the name of the artist in the Value box Click Next Step 4 Select type of query We want simple information so the default setting Detailed query is what we want Click Next at the bottom of the window Since we have a simple query the Grouping and Grouping Note conditions are not needed Those two steps are skipped in our query Step 5 Assign aliases if desired We want the default settings Click Next Step 6 Overview Name the query Suggestion Query Artists To the right of this are two choices Select Display Query Click Finish Step 7 Modify the query We are skipping this step since we have nothing to modify If
190. ed a design the Existing Design choice is not available HTML Export Eg R Assign design New design gt Existing Design Select an existing design or create a new one eee 4 Click Next to select the type of web pages to create e Standard HTML one page for each slide with navigation links to move from slide to slide e Standard HTML with frames one page with a navigation bar on the left hand side uses slide title as navigation links Click on links to display pages in right hand side e Automatic one page for each slide with each page set with the Refresh meta tag so a browser automatically cycles from one page to the next Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 363 e WebCast generates an ASP or Perl application to display the Slides Unfortunately OOo has no direct support for PHP as yet HTML Export Publication type Options Standard HTML format Create tite page Standard HTML with frames C Automatic WebCast 5 Decide how the images will be saved PNG GIF or JPG and what resolution to use When choosing a resolution consider what the majority of your viewers might have If you use a high resolution then a viewer with a medium resolution monitor will have to scroll sideways to see the entire slide probably not desirable Save graphics as Monitor resolution PNG Low resolution 640x480 pixels GIF O Medium resolution 800x600 pixels PG High resolution
191. ed a hidden element again you can reverse the process and show the element To hide or show sheets rows and columns use the options on the Format menu or the right click context menu For example to hide a row first select the row and then choose Format gt Row gt Hide or right click and choose Hide Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 157 To hide or show selected cells choose Format gt Cells from the menu bar or right click and choose Format Cells On the Format Cells dialog go to the Cell Protection tab Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection Protection L_ Hide all Cell protection is only effective after the current p sheet has heen protected Protecte Select Protect Document from the Tools menu _ Hide formula and specify Sheet Print L_ Hide when printing The cells selected will be omitted when printing Figure 123 Hiding or showing cells Outline group controls If you are continually hiding and showing the same cells you can simplify the process by creating outline groups which add a set of controls for hiding and showing the cells in the group that are quick to use and always available If the contents of cells falls into a regular pattern such as four cells followed by a total then you can use Data gt Group and Outline gt AutoOutline to have Calc add outline controls based on the pattern Otherwise you can set out
192. ed function from the Category and Function lists 4 Now select the desired shortcut keys in the Shortcut keys list and click the Modify button at the upper right 5 Click OK to accept the change Now the chosen shortcut keys will execute the function chosen in step 3 above whenever they are pressed 402 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 All existing shortcut keys for the currently selected Function are listed in the Keys selection box If the Keys list is empty it indicates that the chosen key combination is free for use If it were not and you wanted to reassign a shortcut key combination that is already in use you must first Delete the existing Key Shortcut keys that are greyed out in the listing on the Customize dialog such as F1 and F10 are not available for reassignment Note Example Assigning styles to shortcut keys You can configure shortcut keys to quickly assign styles in your document Some shortcuts are predefined such as Ctr 0 for the Text body paragraph style Ctri 1 for the Heading 1 style and Ctr 2 for Heading 2 You can modify these shortcuts and create your own 1 Click Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard The Keyboard page of the Customize dialog Figure 335 opens Figure 335 Defining keyboard shortcuts for applying styles Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 403 2 3 4 5 6 7 To have the shortcut key assignment available only with one component for example Writer
193. ed until the mouse is released If you hold down the Shift key while moving the line the line will Note rotate in 45 degree increments Mirror copies Officially this useful command does not yet exist in Draw It can however be easily emulated Move the axis of symmetry to the desired location of the mirror axis Copy the object to the clipboard Flip the object then click on an empty area of the Draw screen in order to deselect the object Paste from the clipboard to put a copy of the object in its original location and now you have a mirror copy me Distorting an image There are three tools on the Effects menu that let you drag the corners and edges of an object to distort the image The Distort tool distorts an object in perspective the Set to Circle slant and Set in Circle perspective tools both create a pseudo three dimensional effect See Chapter 4 of the Draw Guide for details Dynamic gradients You can control transparency gradients in the same manner as color gradients Both types of gradient can be used together With a Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 231 transparency gradient the direction and degree of an object s fill color changes from opaque to transparent in a regular gradient the fill Changes from one color to another but the degree of transparency remains the same See Chapter 4 of the Draw Guide for details Duplication Duplication makes copies of an object while applying a
194. ed with Writer 107 e Using the Page Style dialog can specify margins to two decimal places If you change the margins using the rulers the new margins Note affect the page style and will be shown in the Page Style dialog the next time you open it To change margins using the rulers 1 The gray sections of the rulers are the margins see Figure 79 Put the mouse cursor over the line between the gray and white sections The pointer turns into a double headed arrow 2 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to move the margin Figure 79 Moving the margins The small arrows on the ruler are used for indenting paragraphs They are often in the same place as the page margins so you need to be careful to move the margin marker not the arrows Place the mouse pointer between the arrows and when the pointer turns into a double headed arrow you can move the margin the indent arrows will move with it Tip To change margins using the Page Style dialog 1 Right click anywhere on the page and select Page from the pop up menu 2 On the Page tab of the dialog type the required distances in the Margins boxes Adding notes to a document The use of notes in a Writer document has been improved in OOO3 Notes are now displayed at the side of the page and color coded according to the user who created them 108 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 To insert a note in the text place the cursor in the text an
195. eereeeerereeees 256 Accessing other data SOUTCeS sssssesssreesssssecessereresseseereeesereeeesees 277 Using data sources in OpenOffice Org cessscsscsessseseseseseereresesesees 279 Fatermg data in a TO rae fae aces 2a teaecendatadssteeeneaasg ENE ETE E G 285 Oe ica ee pei de eeren e Pe ENFERN EE EENT NE 288 Eoen EREE AE sarees cane veeynt E ENA A 298 Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math sessesecsecceseesecoceseeseeseseesecseseeoe 309 Ne N E E EEA E EEAS E E E EEE RA 310 E a E r E E OEE EA AS 311 7 OS ects E E E E A E P E A E E E 316 TO h o o i AEN E A AEE E EEA E T N 319 Common problem ALEAS cece cece eee eee esc eeceesseuceeeuseeeueeeeceeeeeeeees 320 6 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing ccccccccccccsccsssssccecs 323 DRTC OIN D T ARI E EE E T E EET EEEE 324 EUA AAT Ah P o e AOE E E E A E E E saeenaeneenes 324 LORETO P aa AEAEE 324 ESPON O POT eR EE E EEA EEEE 325 Exporting to other OA eerren r E S 331 Pee I dOCUMONIS irersiissrir iin nnn nere Err E EEE EER 202 Digital signing of GOCU NIC Si rsccodiecindiscntsawstsnew Beavaasewssnawetadneranennnden 335 Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and FONtWOTrk cccccccccscsssssscecs 337 PRT MOA a aca nc endaneachoereenceecsucetyshucnyssonewsesintaaniseomerecatneesesnaanees 338 Inserting an image from a fil cece cece ec eccecceccecenceesensenseeees 338 Inserting images from a gra
196. elow Load Load user specific settings with the document Load printer settings with the document L Edit document properties before saving Always create backup copy r Save AutoRecovery information every 14 Minutes Save URLs relative to file system Save URLs relative to internet Default file format and ODF settings ODF format version 1 2 recommended Size optimization for ODF format Warn when not saving in ODF or default format Document type Always save as Text document ODF Text Document Figure 28 Choosing Load and Save options Load user specific settings with the document When you save a document certain settings are saved with it For example your choice in the options for OOo Writer of how to Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 47 update links is affected by the Load user specific settings option Some settings printer name data source linked to the document are always loaded with a document whether or not this option is selected If you select this option these document settings are overruled by the user specific settings of the person who opens it If you deselect this option the user s personal settings do not overrule the settings in the document Load printer settings with the document If this option is not selected the printer settings that are stored with the document are ignored when you print it using the Print File Directly icon The default printer in your system will be
197. en Source Initiative OSI approved Lesser General Public License LGPL The LGPL can be viewed on the OOo website at http www openoffice org licenses Igpl license html For more general information on OOo s licensing please refer to http www openoffice org license html What is open source The ideals of open source software can be explained by the four essential rights which are embodied within the Free Software Foundation s General Public License GPL e The right to use the software for any purpose e Freedom to redistribute the software for free or for a fee e Access to the complete source code of the program that is the blueprints e The right to modify any part of the source or use portions of it in other programs Another view of this philosophy comes from the Open Source Definiton The basic idea behind open source is very simple When programmers can read redistribute and modify the source code for a piece of software the software evolves People improve it people adapt it people fix bugs And this can happen at a speed that if one is used to the slow pace of conventional software development seems astonishing 418 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 For more information on Free and Open Source software visit these websites Open Source Initiative OSI http www opensource org Free Software Foundation FSF http www gnu org What is OpenDocument Starting w
198. en by one or more other objects above it You can rearrange the stacking order of objects move an object to the front or to the back of the stack by selecting the object clicking Modify gt Arrange and selecting the appropriate Bring Forward or Send Backward option or by right clicking the object and selecting Arrange from the context menu then selecting from the list of Bring Forward or Send Backward options On the Drawing toolbar the Arrange tear off menu on the button contains the above options A keyboard shortcut is Shift Ctr to bring an object to the top and Shift Ctrl to send an object to the bottom Draw also provides tools for aligning multiple objects details are given in the Draw Guide Selecting several objects To select or deselect several objects one by one press the Shift key and click on the various objects to be selected or deselected One click on an object selects it a second click deselects it 224 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Moving and dynamically adjusting an object s size There are several ways of moving or changing the size of an object The method described here will be called dynamic in the sense that it is carried out using the mouse When you dynamically change an object remember to check the central area of the status bar at the bottom of your screen This area shows detailed information about the ongoing manipulation For example during resizing you will see the fo
199. end of the object bar or click Format gt Styles and Formatting or press F11 The Styles and Formatting window shows the types of styles available for the OOo component you are using Figure 38 shows the window for Writer with Page Styles visible You can move this window to a convenient position on the screen or dock it to an edge hold down the Ctr key and drag it by the title bar to where you want it docked 2 Click on one of the icons at the top left of the Styles and Formatting window to display a list of styles in a particular Category 3 To apply an existing style except for character styles position the insertion point in the paragraph frame or page and then double click on the name of the style in one of these lists To apply a Character style select the characters first At the bottom of the Styles and Formatting window is a dropdown list In Figure 38 the window shows Automatic Tip meaning the list includes only styles applied automatically by OOo You can choose to show all styles or other groups of styles for example only custom styles 60 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 New Style from Selection Update Style Load Styles Fill Format Mode Heading 5 Automatic wr Figure 38 The Styles and Formatting window for Writer showing paragraph styles Using Fill Format mode Use Fill Format to apply a style to many different areas quickly without having to go back to t
200. enoffice org native lang html Native Language Project Support for installing and using OOo on Mac OS X Mac Support http porting openoffice org mac index html Extensive discussion forum for OpenOffice org issues from setup to advanced programming features http user services openoffice org en forum OpenOffice org Community Forum Andrew Pitonyak the author of OpenOffice org Macros Explained maintains this site which provides extensive documentation on OOo s macro capability Many good referral links are also provided http www pitonyak org oo php OpenOffice org Macro Information Read more about the support options for OOo at http support openoffice org index html Paid support and training Alternatively you can pay for support services Service contracts can be purchased from a vendor or consulting firm specializing in OpenOffice org OOo is supported by Sun Microsystems Inc under the Sun Software Support program which includes two levels of support that cover extended business hours or around the clock service for mission critical deployments Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 15 A list of independent consultants and the services they offer listed alphabetically by region and then by country is provided on the OpenOffice org website Extensions and add ons Several websites provide extensions and add ons to enhance OpenOffice org The following table lists a few of these websites See Ch
201. ens Figure 241 The information we want is what albums are by a certain musical group or individual the album s author We can include when each album was bought Steps Select the fields columns for your query 1 Field selection Tables O Available fields Fields in the Query NumberotTracks ee ee Cee Cen Figure 241 First page of the Query Wizard Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 289 When working with a query more than one table can be used Since different tables may contain the same field names the Not format for naming fields in a query is Table name and field name oe A period is placed between the table name and the field name For example The Lunch field of the Vacation table used ina query has the name Vacation Lunch Step 1 Select the fields 1 Select the CD Collection table from the dropdown list of tables e Ifthe Tables selection is not Table CD Collection click the arrow circled in red in Figure 241 e Click Table CD Collection in the list to select it 2 Select fields from the CD Collection table in the Available fields list a Click AlbumTitle and use the gt button black oval in Figure 241 to move it to the Fields in Query list b Move the Artist and DatePurchased fields in the same manner c Use the up arrow to change the order of the fields artist album and date purchased e Click the CD Collection Artist field e Click the up arrow to move it above CD
202. ent but knowing about them might be of interest e You can write a macro so that values can be passed to the subroutine The values are called arguments Recorded macros do not accept arguments Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 371 e Another kind of subroutine is called a function A function is a subroutine that returns a value The keyword FUNCTION is used rather than SUB to define a function Generated macros are always of type SUB Defining variables using DIM You can write information on a piece of paper so that you can look at it later A variable like a piece of paper contains information that can be changed and read The DIM statement is similar to setting aside a piece of paper to be used to store a message or note The EnterMyName macro defines the variables document and dispatcher as type object Other common variable types include string integer and date A third variable named args1 is an array of property values A variable of type array allows a single variable to contain multiple values similar to storing multiple pages in a single book Values in an array are usually numbered starting from zero The number in the parentheses indicates the highest usable number to access a storage location In this example there is only one value and it is numbered zero Pulling the macro together The following details are very complete it is not important to understand all of the details The first line defines the s
203. epackaged layouts are shown You can choose the one you want use it as it is or modify it to your own requirements At present it is not possible to create custom layouts Table Design Fleven standard table styles are provided in this pane You can further modify the appearance of a table with the selections to show or hide specific rows and columns or to apply a banded appearance to the rows and columns Custom Animation A variety of animations for selected elements of a slide are listed Animation can be added to a slide and it can also be changed or removed later Slide Transition Fifty six transitions are available including No Transition You can select the transition speed slow medium fast You can also choose between an automatic or manual transition and how long you want the selected slide to be shown automatic transition only Workspace The Workspace has five tabs Normal Outline Notes Handout and Slide Sorter These five tabs are called View buttons There are also many toolbars that can be used during slide creation they are revealed by selecting them with View gt Toolbars The Workspace is below the View buttons This is where you assemble the various parts of your selected slide Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 173 Fach view is designed to make completing certain tasks easier In summary e Normal view is the main view for creating individual slides Use this view to format and design slides
204. epeats last command Calls the Find amp Replace dialog Searches for the last entered search term Toggles the view between fullscreen mode and normal mode in Writer or Calc Refreshes redraws the document view Enables or disables the selection cursor in read only text Applies the Italic attribute to the selected area or the word in which the cursor is positioned Applies the Bold attribute to the selected area or the word in which the cursor is positioned Applies the Underlined attribute to the selected area or the word in which the cursor is positioned 412 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Shortcut keys in the Gallery Result Tab Moves between areas Shift Tab Moves between areas backwards In the New Theme area of the Gallery Result Moves the selection up Shortcut Keys Shortcut keys Up arrow Down arrow Moves the selection down Ctrl Enter Shift F10 Ctrl U Ctrl R Ctrl D Insert Opens the Properties dialog Opens a context menu Refreshes the selected theme Opens the Enter Title dialog Deletes the selected theme Inserts a new theme In the Gallery preview area Result Jumps to the first entry Shortcut keys Home End Left Arrow Right Arrow Up Arrow Down Arrow Page Up Page Down Ctrl Shift Insert Ctrl I Ctrl T Ctrl P Spacebar Enter Step backward Jumps to the last entry Selects the next Gallery element on the left Selects the next Gall
205. ermine how the hyperlink will open This applies to documents that open in a Web browser e Form specifies if the link is to be presented as text or as a button e Text specifies the text that will be visible to the user e Name is applicable to HTML documents It specifies text that will be added as a NAME attribute in the HTML code behind the hyperlink e Event button this button will be activated to allow OOo to react to events for which the user has written some code macro This function is not covered in this book Editing hyperlinks To edit an existing link place the cursor anywhere in the link and click Edit gt Hyperlink The Hyperlink dialog Figure 312 opens Make your Changes and click Apply If you need to edit several hyperlinks you can leave the Hyperlink dialog open until you have edited all of them Be sure to click Apply after each one When you are finished click Close The standard default behavior for activating hyperlinks is to use Ctri click This behavior can be changed in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Security gt Options by deselecting the option Ctrl click required to follow hyperlinks If clicking in your links activates them check that page to see if the option has been deselected Saving Writer documents as web pages Writer s HTML capabilities include saving existing documents in HTML format creating new documents as HTML and creating several different types of web pages using
206. ery element on the right Selects the next Gallery element above Selects the next Gallery element below Scrolls up one screen Scrolls down one screen Inserts the selected object as a linked object into the current document Inserts a copy of the selected object into the current document Opens the Enter Title dialog Switches between themes view and object view Switches between themes view and object view Switches between themes view and object view Switches back to main overview only in object view Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts 4135 Selecting rows and columns in a database table opened by F4 Shortcut keys Result Spacebar Toggles row selection except when the row is in edit mode Ctrl spacebar Toggles row selection Shift spacebar Selects the current column Ctrl PgUp Moves pointer to the first row Ctrl PgDn Moves pointer to the last row Shortcut keys for drawing objects Shortcut keys Result Select the toolbar with Inserts a Drawing Object F6 Use the Down Arrow and Right Arrow to select the desired toolbar icon and press Ctrl Enter Select the document Selects a Drawing Object with Ctrl F6 and press Jab Tab Selects the next Drawing Object Shift Tab Selects the previous Drawing Object Ctrl Home Selects the first Drawing Object Ctrl End Selects the last Drawing Object Esc Ends Drawing Object selection Esc in Handle Exits Handle Selection Mode and returns to
207. es Writing Aids OpenOffice org Writer This is where you make settings concerning language and w OpenOffice org Writer Web OpenOffice org Figure 32 Language Setting Options On the right hand side of the Language Settings Languages page Figure 33 change the User interface Locale setting Default currency and Default languages for documents as required In the example English UK has been chosen for all the appropriate settings If you want the language dictionary setting to apply to the current document only instead of being the default for all new documents select the option labelled For the current document only Language of User interface Locale setting Decimal separator key English UK English UK s Same as locale setting Default currency GBF English UK wt Default languages for documents Western English UK w L _ ee Enhanced language support _ Enabled for Asian languages _ Enabled for complex text layout CTL _ For the current document only Figure 33 Choosing language options If necessary select the options to enable support for Asian languages Chinese Japanese Korean and support for CTL complex text layout languages such as Hindi Thai Hebrew and Arabic If you choose either of these options the next time you open this dia
208. es are not moved or copied only the location of each new object is added as a reference In a workgroup situation you may have access to a shared Gallery where you cannot change the contents unless authorized to do so and a user Gallery where you can add change or delete objects Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 345 The location of the user Gallery is specified in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Paths You can change this location and you can copy your gallery files sdv to other computers Gallery contents provided with OOo are stored in a different location You cannot change this location What is Fontwork With Fontwork you can create graphical text art objects for making your work more attractive There are many different settings for text art objects line area position size and more so you have a large choice You will surely find one that fits your document Fontwork is available with each component of OOo but you will notice Small differences in the way that each component displays it The Fontwork toolbars _ _ _ _ _ _ _ You can use two different toolbars for creating and editing a Fontwork object e Go to View gt Toolbars gt Fontwork Fontwork x oa AV b Y Y gt aa Figure 303 The floating Fontwork toolbar e Ifyou click on an existing Fontwork object the Formatting toolbar changes to display the Fontwork options as sh
209. escription 98 spreadsheets editing 72 opening 420 exporting 78 saving 422 Extension Manager 73 folders 77 432 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 update document styles from 73 Template Changer extension 408 Template Management dialog 66 templates importing 78 text bulleted or numbered list 197 default formatting 196 formatting pasted text 196 outline level 198 pasting 195 text boundaries show hide 44 text box AutoLayout 194 197 creating 194 moving 202 vertical alignment of text 195 text box tool 194 text documents opening 419 Text Formatting toolbar 196 text in Draw 218 theme deleting 345 themes 341 themes Gallery 345 three D view 37 title slide 185 toolbar icons macros 386 toolbars 174 adding commands 399 choosing icons for commands 400 Color Bar 208 creating 399 customizing 24 displaying or hiding 21 Draw 206 Drawing 208 Fontwork 346 Line and Filling toolbar 208 moving 22 Options Bar Draw 210 overview 21 tooltips 33 185 transparency 230 231 two digit years 34 U undoing groups 234 unformatted text pasting 196 ungrouping 234 unit of measurement 206 URL Recognition 355 user data options 32 user guides 15 user interface options 35 user specific settings 47 V variables in macros 372 VBA properties load save options 49 vector graphics 204 vertical alignment of text 195 video objects inserting 201 view options 35 W Web Layout 357 web page export
210. ew Ti gt AutoUpdate display d To update a formula manually press F9 or select View gt Update Right click menu Another way to access mathematical symbols is to right click on the equation editor This produces a menu as shown in Figure 275 Figure 275 Right click menu Not The entries in this menu correspond exactly to those in the SES Selection window 3135 Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math Markup You can type the markup directly on the equation editor For example you can type 5 times 4 to obtain 5x4 If you know the markup this can be the fastest way to enter a formula As a mnemonic the formula markup resembles the way the Tip formula reads in English Below is a short list of common equations and their corresponding markup Display Command Display Command a b sqrt a a 2 an int f x dx suman a lt hb infinity a times b x cdot y Greek characters Greek characters a B y etc are common in mathematical formulas These characters are not available in the selection box or the right click menu Fortunately the markup for Greek characters is simple Type a sign followed the name of the character in English e To type a lowercase Character write the name of the character in lowercase e To type an uppercase character write the name of the character in uppercase See the table below for some examples Lowercase Uppercase a lpha ALPHA beta BETA gamma GAMMA
211. ext automatically So they text will just keep going and goir This cell is set to wrap text automatically The cell will fit more text without getting wider Figure 117 Automatic text wrap 152 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Using manual line breaks To insert a manual line break while typing in a cell press Ctrl Enter This method does not work with the cursor in the input line When editing text first double click the cell then single click at the position where you want the line break When a manual line break is entered the cell width does not change Figure 118 shows the results of using two manual line breaks after the first line of text This line contains manual litte breaks Lines can be spaced out this way Also the cell width doesnt change but the text can go on C Figure 118 Cell with manual line breaks Shrinking text to fit the cell The font size of the data in a cell can automatically adjust to fit in a cell To do this select the Shrink to fit cell size option in the Format Cells dialog Figure 116 Figure Figure 119 shows the results 3 The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog Tie gik brow ta limps certe Ezydog d z Figure 119 Shrinking font size to fit cells Formatting numbers Several number formats can be applied to cells by using icons on the Formatting toolbar Select the cell then click the relevant icon ah a e VF KS Figure 1
212. ey apply to this printing of this document only For details see the chapters on the various OOo components To specify default printing options see Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org and the chapters on the various OOo components Exporting to PDF OpenOffice org can export documents to PDF Portable Document Format This industry standard file format is ideal for sending the file to someone else to view using Adobe Reader or other PDF viewers The process and dialogs are the same for Writer Calc Impress and Draw with a few minor differences mentioned in this section Quick export to PDF Click the Export Directly as PDF icon to export the entire document using your default PDF settings You are asked to enter the file name and location for the PDF file but you do not get a chance to choose a page range the image compression or other options Controlling PDF content and quality For more control over the content and quality of the resulting PDF use File gt Export as PDF The PDF Options dialog opens This dialog has five pages General Initial View User Interface Links and Security Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 325 Make your selections and then click Export Then you are asked to enter the location and file name of the PDF to be created and click Save to export the file General page of PDF Options dialog On the General page you can choose which pages to include in the PDF the
213. fice org Custom colors On User interf YULE J Changing the color of the grid points The default grid dots are light gray which can be hard to see To improve visibility go to Tools gt Options then OpenOffice org gt Appearance Figure 159 Save Drawing Presentation Grid Basic Syntax Highlighting Identifier Comment Number String Operator Me Black hd Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic 4 Figure 159 Changing the grid color Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 213 In the Drawing Presentation section you can change the color of the grid points On the Color Settings pulldown menu select a more Suitable visible color for example black Positioning objects with helper lines To simplify the positioning of objects it is possible to make visible guiding lines extensions of the edges of the object while it is being moved These guiding lines have no snap function The guiding lines can be de activated under Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt View gt Guides when moving or by clicking on the l icon on the Options toolbar The basic drawing shapes Draw provides a wide range of shapes located in palettes accessed from the Drawing Toolbar This chapter describes only a few of the basic shapes see the Draw Guide for a complete description of the shapes available These shapes include rectangles and square
214. fice org 1 x Text Document sxw OpenOffice org 1 x Text Document Template stw Microsoft Word 6 0 95 and 97 2000 XP doc Microsoft Word 2003 XML xml Appendix B Background Information 421 Rich Text Format rtf StarWriter 3 0 4 0 and 5 0 sdw StarWriter 3 0 4 0 and 5 0 Template vor Text txt Text Encoded txt Unified Office Format text uot uof HTML Document OpenOffice org Writer html and htm DocBook xml AportisDoc Palm pdb Pocket Word psw The rtf format is a common format for transferring text files between applications but you are likely to experience loss of formatting and images For this reason other formats should be used Note Saving spreadsheet files In addition to OpenDocument formats ods and ots Calc 3 can save in these formats OpenOffice org 1 x Spreadsheet sxc OpenOffice org 1 x Spreadsheet Template stc Microsoft Excel 97 2000 XP xls and xlw Microsoft Excel 97 2000 XP Template xlt Microsoft Excel 5 0 and 95 xls and xlw Microsoft Excel 2003 XML xml Data Interchange Format dif dBase dbf SYLK slk Text CSV csv and txt StarCalc 3 0 4 0 and 5 0 formats sdc and vor Unified Office Format spreadsheet uos HTML Document OpenOffice org Calc html and htm Pocket Excel pxl The Java Runtime Environment is required to use the mobile Note device filters for AportisDoc Palm Pocket Word and Pocket Excel
215. fields in a subform The Date column needs to be widened The field in the PaymentType column needs to be changed to a list box The label for PaymentType column needs to be two words Change the PaymentType column 1 Right click the label PaymentType to open a context menu Figure 218 Insert Column Replace with Delete Column Hide Columns Column Figure 218 Choices for modifying a control in a subform 270 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 2 Select Replace with and then select List box from the context menu 3 Again right click the label PaymentType to open a context menu 4 Select Column This opens the Properties window Figure 219 5 In the Label box change PaymentType to Payment Type 6 Click the Data tab 7 From the Type of list contents dropdown list select sql 8 Type the following exactly as it is written SELECT Type Type FROM Payment Type 9 Close the Properties window General Data Events NaMe ennenen Paymentl ype Label PaymentType H Enabled sccecseee Yes 7 Rlead onnly ceccceseeeese No 7 a bom Q List GV ITiGS 0 cececee0s Po Alignment Border color Ling Count 5o E Default selection PE Additional information Hap DE ck rapes Figure 219 Properties window for control in a subform Step 6 Replace fields with other fields beginning with part 5 contains more detailed instruction Tip Ste
216. g Styles and Templates What is a template A template is a model that you use to create other documents For example you can create a template for business reports that has your company s logo on the first page New documents created from this template will all have your company s logo on the first page Templates can contain anything that regular documents can contain such as text graphics a set of styles and user specific setup information such as measurement units language the default printer and toolbar and menu customization All documents in OpenOffice org OOo are based on templates You can create a specific template for any document type text spreadsheet drawing presentation If you do not specify a template when you start a new document then the document is based on the default template for that type of document If you have not specified a default template OOo uses the blank template for that type of document that is installed with OOo See Setting a default template on page 74 for more information What are styles A style is a set of formats that you can apply to selected pages text frames and other elements in your document to quickly change their appearance When you apply a style you apply a whole group of formats at the same time Many people manually format paragraphs words tables page layouts and other parts of their documents without paying any attention to styles They are used to wr
217. g the Area dialog reached by choosing Format gt Area or the pouring can icon on the Line and Filling toolbar On the Area dialog choose the tab marked Colors 208 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 m Area Area Shadow Transparency Colors Gradients Hatching Bitmaps Properties Name Blue 8 Add Color TITTI If IS Le Le Rca vw ae a is fs TIititt tl ie 1 Jol TT 2 BMRB z 6 oo Sn IT Dio oan Seeeee Figure 154 Changing the color palette To load another palette click on the Load Color List button circled The file selector dialog asks you to choose one of the standard OOo palettes files bearing the file extension soc For example web soc is a color palette that is adapted to creating drawings that are going to appear in Web pages The colors will correctly display on workstations with screens displaying at least 256 colors The color selection box also lets you individually change any color by modifying the numerical values in the fields provided to the right of the color palette You can use the color schemes known as CMYK Cyan Magenta Yellow Black RGB Red Green Blue or HSB Hue Saturation Brightness Clicking on the Edit button opens a special dialog to allow setting individual colors see Figure 155 Many more input possibilities are available in this dialog In the lower area you can enter values in the RGB and CMYK models as well as the HS
218. g the image into the document Release the mouse button 344 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Deleting images from the Gallery To delete an image from a theme 1 Right click on the name of the image file or its thumbnail in the Gallery 2 Click Delete on the pop up menu A message appears asking if you want to delete this object Click Yes Deleting the name of a file from the list in the Gallery does not Note delete the file from the hard disk or other location Adding a new theme to the Gallery To add a new theme to the Gallery 1 Click the New Theme button above the list of themes Figure 300 2 In the Properties of New Theme dialog click the General tab and type a name for the new theme 3 Click the Files tab and add images to the theme as described earlier Deleting a theme from the Gallery You can delete only theme that you have added to the Gallery you cannot delete any of the inbuilt themes To delete a theme from the Gallery 1 Go to Tools gt Gallery 2 In the left part of the Gallery select in the list the theme you wish to delete 3 Right click on the theme then click Delete on the pop up menu Location of the Gallery and the objects in it Graphics and other objects shown in the Gallery can be located anywhere on your computer s hard disk on a network drive or on a CD ROM Listings in the Gallery refer to the location of each object When you add graphics to the Gallery the fil
219. ge the appearance of the table or any newly created tables based on the Style options you select You can choose to add emphasis to a header and total row as well as the first and last columns of the table and apply a banded appearance to the rows and columns Having completed the table design entering data into the cells is Similar to working with text box objects Click in the cell you wish to add data to and begin typing To move around cells quickly use the following key options e The arrow keys move the cursor to the next table cell if the cell is empty otherwise they move the cursor to the next character in the cell e The Tab key moves to the next cell skipping over the contents of the cell Shift Tab move backwards in this manner Adding graphics spreadsheets charts and other objects Graphics in Impress are handled much the same as graphics in Draw For more information see Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw the Draw Guide or Chapters 4 5 and 6 in the Impress Guide Spreadsheets embedded in Impress include most of the functionality of spreadsheets in Calc and are therefore capable of performing extremely complex calculations and data analysis If you need to analyze your data or apply formulas these operations are best performed in a Calc spreadsheet and the results displayed in an embedded Impress spreadsheet To add a spreadsheet to a slide select the corresponding layout in the list of predefined layouts i
220. ges Click OK twice to print the first side of each page Flip the pages and put them back into the printer in the correct orientation to print on the blank side You may need to experiment a bit to find out what the correct arrangement is for your printer Click File gt Print and check Properties to make sure the printer setup is still correct Click Options again In the Pages section of the Printer Options dialog choose Brochure and Left page Click OK twice to print the second sides If your printer can do double sided then click on the options for Left pages Right pages and Brochure and it should not only do those but collate too Printing envelopes Printing envelopes involves two steps setup and printing To set up an envelope to be printed by itself or with your document 1 2 3 Click Insert gt Envelope from the menu bar In the Envelope dialog start with the Envelope tab Figure 85 Verify add or edit the information in the Addressee and Sender boxes the from on the envelope You can type information directly into the Addressee and Sender boxes or use the right hand drop down lists to select the database or table from which to draw the envelope information if desired See Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge in the Writer Guide for details on how to print envelopes from a database On the Format page Figure 86 verify or edit the positioning of the addressee and the sender information The
221. gh contrast appearance Automatically detect high contrast mode of operating system _ Use automatic font colour for screen display Use system colours for page previews Figure 24 Choosing accessibility options Java options If you install or update a Java Runtime Environment JRE after you install OpenOffice org or if you have more than one JRE installed on your computer you can use the OpenOffice org Java options page Figure 25 to choose the JRE for OOo to use Java options Use a Java runtime environment Java runtime environments JRE already installed Features 1 6 0 02 Parameters Class Path aa lt gt Location C Program Files Java jre1 6 0_02 Figure 25 Choosing a Java runtime environment Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 45 If you are a system administrator programmer or other person who customizes JRE installations you can use the Parameters and Class Path pages reached from the Java page to specify this information If you do not see anything listed in the middle of the page wait a few minutes while OOo searches for JREs on the hard disk If OOo finds one or more JREs it will display them there You can then select the Use a Java runtime environment option and if necessary choose one of the JREs listed Online Update options On the OpenOffice org Online Update page Figure 26 you can choose whether and how often to have OOo check the OOo website for program updates
222. h values that continue the sequence For example if you select three cells containing the values 1 2 and 3 and fill the subsequent cell Calc will insert the value 4 Using a fill series A more complex use of the Fill tool is to use a fill series The default lists are for the full and abbreviated days of the week and the months of the year but you can create your own lists as well Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 147 To add a fill series to a spreadsheet select the cells to fill choose Edit gt Fill gt Series In the Fill Series dialog select AutoFill as the Series type and enter as the Start value an item from any defined series The selected cells then fill in the other items on the list sequentially repeating from the top of the list when they reach the end of the list Fill Series Direction Series type Down O Linear O Growth C Up _ Date AutoFill Start value January Figure 111 Specifying the start of a fill series result is in Figure 112 A You can also use Edit gt Fill gt Series l January to create a one time fill series for 2 aay numbers by entering the start and end 3 Al values and the increment For example 5 May if you entered start and end values of 1 6 June and 7 with an increment of 2 you would A uly ugus get the sequence of 1 3 5 7 3 SE eri In all these cases the Fill tool creates 10 October only a momentary connection between 11 November the cell
223. hanged template The next time you open a document that was created from the changed template the following message appears The Styles in this document do not match your current Styles Should your current Styles be applied to this document Yes Figure 49 Apply current styles message Click Yes to apply the template s changed styles to the document Click No if you do not want to apply the template s changed styles to the document Whichever option you choose the message box closes and the document opens in OOo Adding templates using the Extension Manager The Extension Manager provides an easy way to install collections of templates graphics macros or other add ins that have been packaged into files with a OXT extension See Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org for more about the Extension Manager This Web page lists many of the available extensions http extensions services openoffice org To install an extension follow these steps 1 Download an extension package and save it anywhere on your computer 2 In OOo select Tools gt Extension Manager from the menu bar In the Extension Manager dialog click Add 3 A file browser window opens Find and select the package of templates you want to install and click Open The package begins installing You may be asked to accept a license agreement 4 When the package installation is complete the templates are available for use through File gt Ne
224. he My Macros container is stored in your user area or home directory If a macro is contained in a document then a recorded macro will attempt to work on that document primarily because it uses ThisComponent for its actions Fvery library container contains a library named Standard It is better to create your own libraries with meaningful names than to use the Standard library Not only are meaningful names easier to manage but they can also be imported into other library containers whereas the Standard library cannot OpenOffice org allows you to import libraries into a library Caution container but it will not allow you to overwrite the library named Standard Therefore if you store your macros in the A Standard library you cannot import them into another library container Just as it makes good sense to give your libraries meaningful names it is prudent to use meaningful names for your modules By default OpenOffice org uses names such as Module1 Feel free to use your own meaningful name As you create your macros you must decide where to store them Storing a macro in a document is useful if the document will be shared and you want the macro to be included with the document Macros stored in the application library container named My Macros however are globally available to all documents Macros are not available until the library that contains them is loaded The Standard library and Template library however ar
225. he Styles and Formatting window and double click every time This method is quite useful when you need to format many scattered paragraphs cells or other items with the same style 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window and select the style you want to apply 2 Click the Fill Format mode icon oO 3 To apply a paragraph page or frame style hover the mouse over the paragraph page or frame and click To apply a character style hold down the mouse button while selecting the characters Clicking on a word applies the character style for that word Repeat step 3 until you made all the changes for that style 4 To quit Fill Format mode click the Fill Format mode icon again or press the Esc key Cauti When this mode is active a right click anywhere in the aurion document undoes the last Fill Format action Be careful not to A accidentally right click and thus undo actions you want to keep Using the Apply Style list After you have used a style at least once in a document the style name appears on the Apply Style list at the left hand end of the Formatting toolbar next to the Styles and Formatting icon Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 61 You can open this list and click once on the style you want or you can use the up and down arrow keys to move through the list and then press Enter to apply the highlighted style Select More at the bottom of the list to open the Styles and Tip Formatting window
226. he correct number of times if necessary Tip f Change the Field Properties in the bottom section Change AutoValue from No to Yes Figure 179 Auto Value Yes Length 10 Format example o Bl Auto increment statement IDENTITY Figure 179 Field Properties section AutoValue g Set FuellD as the Primary key Right click on the green triangle to the left of Fuel D Figure 180 248 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Field Name Field Type gt FuellD Integer INTEGER Figure 180 Primary key field Click Primary Key in the context menu This places a key icon in front of FuellD The primary key serves only one purpose Any name can be used for this field It is not necessary to use FuelID as the name of the primary key field We have used it so we know to which table it belongs by its name Note 3 All other entries e Enter the next field name in the first column Field Name column e Select the Field Type for each field For Date use Date DATE Use the D key once to select it PaymentType uses Text VARCHAR the default setting All other fields use Number NUMERIC Use the N key once to select it e Select the Field Properties Figure 181 Field Properties Entry required No F Length 5 Format l example Decimal places 7 Default value Format example Figure 181 Field Properties section FuelCost FuelQuantity and Odometer need changes in the Field
227. he end of the text in the drawing object A printable character is inserted Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts 415 OpenOf ficeorg3 Appendix B Background Intormation History licensing and file formats Introduction OpenOffice org is both a product and an open source project If you are new to OOo its open source development and the community that produces and supports it you should read this appendix A short history of OpenOffice org The OpenOffice org project began when Sun Microsystems released the source code blueprints for its StarOffice software to the open source community on October 13 2000 This allowed Sun to use the technical expertise and rapid development times of an open source project in the development of its own software products All recent versions of Sun s StarOffice use source code developed by the OpenOffice org community However the products do not provide exactly the same features due to the copyrights of third parties that are not compatible with open source licensing OpenOffice org 1 0 the product was released on April 30 2002 Read more about OpenOffice org s history and organization at http about openoffice org Information about StarOffice can be found at http www sun com software star staroffice The OpenOffice org community OpenOffice org s Mission Statement is To create aS a community the leading international office suite that will run on all maj
228. he page Figure 17 Here you can choose whether to be warned if the paper size or orientation specified in your document does not match the paper size or orientation available for your printer Having these warnings turned on can be quite helpful particularly if you work with documents produced by people in other countries where the standard paper size is different from yours 38 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Reduce print data Settings for Printer Print to file Printer _ Reduce transparency _ Reduce gradients _ Reduce bitmaps _ Convert colours to greyscale Printer warnings Paper size Transparency Paper orientation Figure 17 Choosing general printing options to apply to all OOo components If your printouts are coming out incorrectly placed on the page or chopped off at the top bottom or sides or the printer is refusing to print the most likely cause is page size incompatibility Tip Path options You can change the location of files associated with or used by OpenOffice org to suit your working situation In a Windows system for example you might want to store documents by default somewhere other than My Documents In the Options dialog click OpenOffice org gt Paths To make changes select an item in the list shown in Figure 18 and click Edit On the Select Paths dialog not shown add or delete folders as required and then click OK to return to the Options di
229. he particular field Friday May 25 2007 16 00 14 692 704 2 Kevin Friday May 25 2007 7 00 6 428 778 7 Dan Record i of 2 umage Figure 240 Sample record of the Vacation form and subform Creating queries Queries are used to get specific information from a database Using our CD Collection table we will create a list of albums by a particular artist We will do this using the Wizard The information we might want 288 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 from the Fuel table includes what our fuel economy is We will do this using the Design View Queries blur the differences between a database and a data source A database is only one type of data source However searching for usable information from a data source requires a Note query Since the query one part of a database does this the data source appears to become one part of that database its table or tables Query results themselves are special tables within the database Using the Wizard to create a query Queries created by the wizard provide a list or lists of information based upon what one wants to know It is possible to obtain a single answer or multiple answers depending upon the circumstances Queries which require calculations are best created with the Design view In the main database window Figure 176 click the Queries icon in the Databases section then in the Tasks section click Use Wizard to Create Query The Query Wizard window op
230. he selected cells are almost as useful with text as with numbers In addition to each unique entry automatic filters include the option to display all entries the ten highest numerical values and all cells that are empty or not empty as well as a standard filter Their drawback is that they are somewhat limited In particular they do not allow regular expressions so you cannot display contents that are similar but not identical by using automatic filters Standard filters are more complex than automatic filters You can set as many as three conditions as a filter combining them with the operators AND and OR Standard filters are mostly useful for numbers although a few of the conditional operators such as and lt gt can also be useful for text Other conditional operators for standard filters include options to display the largest or smallest values or a percentage of them Useful in themselves standard filters take on added value when used to further refine automatic filters Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 159 Advanced filters are structured similarly to standard filters The differences are that advanced filters are not limited to three conditions and their criteria are not entered in a dialog Instead advanced filters are entered in a blank area of a sheet then referenced by the advanced filter tool to apply them Sorting records Sorting arranges the visible cells on the sheet In Calc you can sort by up
231. he text in the desired position Do not worry if it does not look right it will in a minute 2 Select the text you have just pasted 3 Select Format gt Default formatting from the menu bar 4 Use the four arrow buttons in the Text Formatting toolbar to move the text to the appropriate position and give it the appropriate outline level The button with the arrow pointing left promotes the list entry by one level for example from Outline 3 to Outline 2 the right arrow button demotes the list entry by one level the up and down arrow buttons move the list entry 5 Apply manual formatting as required to sections of the text to change font attributes tabs and so on If you are pasting text in a text box you can still use styles to quickly format the text Note that one and only one graphic style can be applied to the copied text To do that 1 Paste the text in the desired position 2 Select the text you have just pasted 3 Select the desired graphic style 4 Apply manual formatting as required to sections of the text Presentation styles are very different from Writer styles and Tip are applied in quite a different way 196 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Creating bulleted and numbered lists The procedure to create a bulleted or numbered list is quite different depending on the type of text box used although the tools to manage the list and customize the appearance are the same In text boxes created
232. he two rulers can have different Meter Kilometer units i Foot od Miles Point Pica Figure 150 Ruler units Status bar The Status bar is located at the bottom of the workspace The middle part of the Status bar shows Draw specific fields as identified in Figure 151 For details on the contents and use of these fields please refer to the Draw Guide The sizes are given in the current measurement unit not to be confused with the ruler units This unit is defined in Tools gt Note Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt General where you can also change the scale of the page Another way to change the scale is to double click on the number shown in the status bar aie A i ial i Layout Controls Dimension Lines lt gt Ril m e T 4 4 7O O e B O t 2 flim mio Rectangle selected i 0 20 6 80 fest 4 20 x 2 00 o Side 1 1 Layout Default Page Template Infomation oom Figure 151 Items on the Draw status bar Toolbars The various Draw toolbars can be displayed or hidden according to your needs To display or hide the toolbars click View gt Toolbars On the menu that appears choose which toolbars you want to display 206 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 You can also select the buttons that you wish to appear on the corresponding toolbar On the View gt Toolbars menu select Customize click on the Toolbars tab select the toolbar you want to change
233. her than typing Senior Management every time you use that phrase you might just type sm and press F3 Or you can save a formatted Note like the one on this page as AutoText and then insert a copy by typing note and pressing FS To assign some text to an AutoText shortcut 1 2 3 4 5 6 Type the text into your document Select the text so it is highlighted Select Edit gt AutoText or press Control F3 Enter a name for your shortcut Writer will suggest a one letter Shortcut which you can change Click the AutoText button on the right and select New text only from the menu Click Close to return to your document If the only option under the AutoText button is Import either Tip you have not entered a name for your AutoText or there is no text selected in the document AutoText is especially powerful when assigned to fields See Chapter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide for more information 96 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Inserting dashes and non breaking spaces You can insert a dash by using the Special Characters window or by using AutoCorrect For more about AutoCorrect see Controlling OOO s AutoCorrect functions in Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org and Using AutoCorrect on page 95 in this chapter is an en dash that is a dash the width of the letter n in the font you are using It is U 2013 scroll down to the General P
234. his document to be opened in read only mode only This option protects the document against accidental changes It is still possible to edit a copy of the document and save that copy with the Same name as the original Select the Record changes option to enable recording changes This is the same as Edit gt Changes gt Record To allow other users of this document to apply changes but prevent them from disabling change recording click the Protect buton and enter a password Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 43 Appearance options Writing editing and page layout are often easier to do when you can see as much as possible of what is going on in your document You may wish to make visible such items as text table and section boundaries in Writer documents page breaks in Calc and grid lines in Draw or Writer In addition you might prefer different colors from OOo s defaults for such items as note indicators or field shadings On the OpenOffice org Appearance page Figure 23 you can specify which items are visible and the colors used to display various items e To show or hide items such as text boundaries select or deselect the options next to the names of the items e To change the default colors for items click the down arrow in the Color Setting column by the name of the item and select a color from the pop up box e To save your color changes as a color scheme click Save type a name in the Scheme box then cl
235. holders Contour mode Text placeholders Line contour only Exit all groups z A i J a Gi Positioning objects with snap functions In Draw objects can be positioned to grid points to special snap points and lines to object frames to single object points or to page edges This function is known as Snap In this manner objects can be very accurately positioned in a drawing If you want to use the snap function it is much easier to work with the highest practical zoom value It is possible to use two different snap functions at the same time for example snap to a guide line and to the page edge It is best however to activate only those functions that you really need This section describes the snap to grid function For more information about this and the other snap functions see Chapter 8 Tips and Tricks and Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 211 Snap to grid Use this function to move an object exactly to a grid point see Figure 157 This function can be switched on and off with View gt Grid gt Figure 157 With snap to grid objects align to the grid precisely Showing the grid Make the grid visible under View gt Grid gt Display Grid Alternatively turn the grid on and off with the icon on the Options toolbar Configuring the grid The color spacing and resolution of the grid points can be individually chosen for each axi
236. hown that OpenOffice org Basic macros will be lost Export Print layout Select this option to export the print layout of the current document as well The HTML filter supports CSS2 Cascading Style Sheets Level 2 for printing documents These capabilities are only effective if print layout export is activated Export Copy local graphics to Internet Select this option to automatically upload the embedded pictures to the Internet server when uploading using FTP Export Character set Select the appropriate character set for the export Choosing language settings You may need to do several things to set the language settings to what you want e Install the required dictionaries e Change some locale and language settings e Choose spelling options Install the required dictionaries OOo3 automatically installs several dictionaries with the program To add other dictionaries use Tools gt Language gt More Dictionaries Online OOo will open your default web browser to a page containing links to additional dictionaries that you can install Follow the prompts to install them 52 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Change locale and language settings You can change some details of the locale and language settings that OOo uses for all documents or for specific documents In the Options dialog click Language Settings gt Languages Options Language Settings OpenOffice org ya Language Settings Languag
237. hows Slides Pictures and other items Click the sign by any of the categories to display the list of objects in that category 28 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 To open the Navigator click its icon 2 on the Standard toolbar or press F5 or choose Edit gt Navigator on the main menu bar You can dock the Navigator to either side of the main OOo window or leave it floating see Docking floating windows and toolbars on page 23 To hide the list of categories and show only the toolbars at the top click the List Box On Off icon sA Click this icon again to show the list box The Navigator provides several convenient ways to move around a document and find items in it e When a category is showing the list of objects in it double click on an object to jump directly to that object s location in the document Objects are much easier to find if you have given them names when creating them instead of keeping OOo s default graphics1 graphics2 Table1 Table2 and so on which may not correspond to the position of the object in the document If you only want to see the content in a certain category highlight the category and click the Content View icon Until you click the icon again only the objects of that category will be displayed e Click the o second icon from the left at the top of the Navigator to display the Navigation toolbar Figure 9 Here you can pick one of the categories and use the Previou
238. hows all the items of the selected type In the Format list choose the format required Usually this will be Reference to insert the full text of the heading or caption Category and Number to insert the word Figure or Table and its number but without the caption text Numbering to insert only the figure or table number without the word Figure or Table or Page to insert the number of the page the referenced text is on Click Insert Using bookmarks Bookmarks are listed in the Navigator and can be accessed directly from there with a single mouse click You can cross reference to bookmarks as described above In HTML documents bookmarks are converted to anchors that you can jump to using a hyperlink 1 Select the text you want to bookmark Click Insert gt Bookmark 2 On the Insert Bookmark dialog the larger box lists any previously defined bookmarks Type a name for this bookmark in the top box and then click OK to save Insert Bookmark Fa Bookmarks insertpagenum usedocproperties Cancel Figure 92 Inserting a bookmark 124 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 OpenOf ficeorg3 Chapter 6 Getting Started with Calc Using spreadsheets in OpenOffice org What is Calc Calc is the spreadsheet component of OpenOffice org OOo A spreadsheet simulates a worksheet on your computer you can fill the worksheet with data usually numerical data and then manipulate the data t
239. hy Kathleen 46 00 71 00 3 00 6 00 16 001717 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 400535 50 4900 Figure 105 Frozen rows and columns You can set the freeze point at one row one column or both a row and a column as in Figure 105 Freezing single rows or columns 1 Click on the header for the row below where you want the freeze or for the column to the right of where you want the freeze 2 Select Window gt Freeze A dark line appears indicating where the freeze is put Freezing a row and a column 1 Click into the cell that is immediately below the row you want frozen and immediately to the right of the column you want frozen 2 Select Window gt Freeze Two lines appear on the screen a horizontal line above this cell anda vertical line to the left of this cell Now as you scroll around the screen everything above and to the left of these lines will remain in view 142 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Unfreezing To unfreeze rows or columns select Window gt Freeze The check mark by Freeze will vanish Splitting the window Another way to change the view is by splitting the window also known as splitting the screen The screen can be split either horizontally or vertically or both This allows you to have up to four portions of the spreadsheet in view at any one time Why would you want to do this Imagine you have a large spreadsheet and one of the cells has a number in it which is used by three formulas in o
240. ick OK Colour scheme Scheme OpenOffice org Custom colours On User interface elements Colour setting Preview Document background C Automatic Pn Text boundaries C Automatic Application background L Automatic Object boundaries i Automatic wt Table boundaries C Automatic j Font colour Lo Automatic a Unvisited links CO Automatic J Visited links Ante Gmailin hard ae l Di ia Figure 23 Showing or hiding text object and table boundaries Accessibility options Accessibility options include whether to allow animated graphics or text how long help tips remain showing some options for high contrast display and a way to change the font for the user interface of the OpenOffice org program see Figure 24 44 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Accessibility support relies on Sun Microsystems Java technology for communications with assistive technology tools See Java options below The Support assistive technology tools option is not shown on all OOo installations See Assistive Tools in OpenOffice org in the Help for other requirements and information Select or deselect the options as required Miscellaneous options _ Support assistive technology tools program restart required _ Use text selection cursor in read only text documents Allow animated graphics Allow animated text Help tips disappear after seconds Options for hi
241. ields of the sentence Click the gray box to the left of the row of data you want to add That row should be highlighted like the second row of Figure 61 Click the Data to Fields icon circled in black in Figure 61 This should fill the fields with the data from the row you chose Click another row and then click this icon again The data in the sentence changes to this selected row of data Save the document Adding data in table format is a little easier and takes perhaps a few less steps Some of the steps will be quite similar Data can be added this way as a fields or text Following the following steps I leave this to the reader with which to Note experiment by changing the selections in the Insert Database Columns to see what results you can get 282 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 g A Ag Z ts I ANHI YS Ps te 778 C AA an 4 00 12 An Nan Figure 235 Selected row in data source window 1 Navigate to the place you want to place the table and click the location 2 Click the gray box to the left of each row of the data source that you want to be a row in your table 3 Click the Data to text icon to open the Insert Database Columns dialog Figure 236 The Data to texticon is circled in red in Figure 235 insert Database Columns a Insert data as a B Fields Table Database columns Table columnis BPayment es J C Breakfast Date LPayment Lunch Miscellaneous eee Insert tabl
242. ifferent slides in the presentation from the Speed drop down menu Medium is a good choice for now 8 Click Create A new presentation is created You might want to accept the default values for both Effect and Speed unless you are skilled at doing this Both of these values Tip can be changed later while working with Slide transitions and animations These two are explained in more detail in Chapter 9 of the Impress Guide If you selected From template on step 1 of the Wizard the Next Note button will be active on step 3 and other pages will be available These pages are not described here 184 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Formatting a presentation Now put your presentation together based on your outline Remember to save frequently while working on the presentation to prevent any loss of information should Caution something unexpected occur You might also want to activate A the AutoRecovery function Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General Make sure Save AutoRecovery information every is selected and that you have entered a recovery frequency Creating the first slide The first slide is normally a title slide Decide which of the layouts will best suit your purposes for this first slide simplicity would be appropriate in this instance You can use the prepackaged layouts available in the Layout section of the Tasks pane Suitable layouts are Title Slide which also contains a section for a subtitle
243. ifically set operations unions intersections and or complements and any combinations of these For example we listed all of our criteria in one row That means that all of these criteria have to be met before a row of values will be created in the query This is how the and operator works on sets It also requires having a copy of the Hsqidb User Guide available from http hsqldb org Note Creating reports Reports provide information found in the database in a useful way In this they are similar to queries Reports are generated from the database s tables or queries They can contain all of the fields of the table or query or just a selected group of fields Reports can be static or dynamic Static reports contain the data in the selected fields at the time the report was created Dynamic reports can be updated to show the latest data 298 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Dynamic reports update only the data that is changed or added to a table or query It does not show any modifications made to Caution a table or query For example open the fuel economy query you just created For the End Reading Odometer A Fuel Odometer column change the number 1 to the number 3 after creating the report below The report will be identical before and after you make the change For example a report on vacation expenses divided into categories Should probably be a static report because it is based upon specific dat
244. ight click the Grey box to the left of Date Select Primary key from the context menu Name the table Vacations and save it 250 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Figure 183 Example of Description entries Creating tables for the list box When the same information can be used in several fields design a table for each type of information Each table will contain two fields the information field and ZD in this order You must create these tables with the information field listed first and the and the ID field listed last Failure to do so will produce the wrong results For my Payment table I use Name Caution and ID as my fields with Dan Kevin and Cash being the Name A entries The corresponding ID entries are 0 1 2 When the Name field is listed first in the table one of the three names will appear in the payment field of the Fuel table If the ID field is listed first 0 1 or 2 appear in the payment field instead 1 Follow the directions in Creating tables in Design View on page 248 In the table we will create the two fields can be Type and PaymentID Make sure that the AutoValue is set to Yes for the PaymentID field Set the PaymentID field as the primary key See Figure 184 2 Save the table using the name Payment Type Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 251 Field Name Field Type ype Text VARCHAR PaymentiD Integer INTEGER Figure 184 Table in Design View If you have
245. in Graphics and frames anchored to paragraph may move away from their positions during import any incorrect positioning remains when the PDF is saved again From Sun Microsystems Open source Presenter Console Provides extra control over slide shows presentations for example the presenter has ability to see the upcoming slide the slide notes and a presentation timer while the audience sees only the current slide The Presenter Console displays the elements in three easily changeable views e The first view displays the current slide including the effects and the upcoming slide e The second view shows the speaker s notes in large clear and scalable type plus the current and upcoming slide e The third view is a slide sorter view with the slide thumbnails From Sun Microsystems Open source The Presenter Console works only on an operating system that Note Supports multiple displays Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 407 Report Builder Creates stylish complex database reports from Base You can define group and page headers group and page footers and calculation fields Export your reports into PDF or OpenDocument formats or send them as email attachments From Sun Microsystems Open source Professional Template Pack II Provides more than 120 templates for Writer Calc and Impress Available in several languages After you have installed this Extension you will find the templates under Fi
246. in response to the cursor s current position or selection For example when the cursor is on a graphic the Formatting bar provides tools for formatting graphics when the cursor is in text the tools are for formatting text Displaying or hiding toolbars To display or hide toolbars choose View gt Toolbars then click on the name of a toolbar in the list An active toolbar shows a checkmark beside its name Tear off toolbars are not listed in the View menu Submenus and tear off toolbars Toolbar icons with a small triangle to the right will display submenus tear off toolbars and other ways of selecting things depending on the icon Figure 2 shows a tear off toolbar from the Drawing toolbar Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 21 The tear off toolbars can be floating or docked along an edge of the screen or in one of the existing toolbar areas To move a floating tear off toolbar drag it by the title bar See Moving toolbars below Click here and drag Toolbar tears off and floats ____y Flowchart x OO Sie OO eae D O O Omp U O O amia o u d Aca OO Oo Cig x O A Vis x Oo A Vis QB80ca Of ee O A K ee Z Figure 2 Example of a tear off toolbar Moving toolbars To move a docked toolbar place the mouse pointer over the toolbar handle hold down the left mouse button drag the toolbar to the new location and then release the mouse button Figure 3 To move a floating toolbar click on its title bar and
247. in themes indicated by an icon of another color Method 1 selecting a file 1 2 3 4 5 6 In the theme s Properties on the Files page click the Find Files button The Select path dialog opens You can enter the path for the file s directory in the Path text box or you can navigate to locate the file s directory Use the File type drop down list to help limit the search Click the Select button to start the search A list of graphic files is then displayed in the window You can use the File type filter again to further limit the search Select the files to add To select more than one file hold the Control key down while you click on each file Finally click Add Method 2 drag and drop 1 2 3 4 5 Open the document containing an image you want to add to the Gallery and display the Gallery theme to which you want to add it Position the mouse pointer above the image without clicking If the mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol the image refers to a hyperlink In this case press the A t key while you click the image to select it without activating the link If the mouse pointer does not change to a hand symbol you can simply click the image to select it Once the image is selected evident from the green selection handles around it release the mouse button Click again on the image keeping the mouse button pressed for more than two seconds Without releasing the mouse button dra
248. ing Bullets or apply them as you type Using the Bullets and Numbering toolbar You can create nested lists where one or more list items has a sublist under it as in an outline by using the buttons on the Bullets and Numbering toolbar Figure 71 You can move items up or down the list or create subpoints and even change the style of bullets Use View gt Toolbars gt Bullets and Numbering to see the toolbar The appearance of the icons may vary with your operating system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View Bullets and Numbering x gt o dk te EET IITTI 9 10 11 12 13 14 H a j HH i co 1 Bullets On Off 6 Move Up One Level with 10 Move Down 2 Numbering On Off Sub points 11 Move Up in Sub points 3 Numbering Off 7 Move Down One Level 12 Move Down in Sub points with Sub points 4 Up One Level 8 Insert Unnumbered Entry 13 Restart Numbering 5 Up One Level 9 Move Up 14 Bullets and Numbering Figure 71 Bullets and Numbering toolbar 100 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Hyphenating words To turn automatic hyphenation of words on or off 1 Press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window Figure 72 2 On the Paragraph Styles page of the Styles and Formatting window right click on Default in the list and select Modify Styles and Formatting WEOE af 4 E Figure 72 Modifying a style 3 On
249. ing Started with OpenOffice org 3 Printing rows or columns on every page If a sheet is printed on multiple pages you can set up certain rows or columns to repeat on each printed page For example if the top two rows of the sheet as well as column A need to be printed on all pages do the following 1 Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Edit On the Edit Print Ranges dialog type the rows in the text entry box under Rows to repeat For example to repeat rows 1 and 2 type 1 2 In the Rows to repeat list none changes to user defined Edit Print Ranges Xx Frint range Rows to repeat Columns to repeat Figure 128 Specifying repeating rows 2 Columns can also repeat type the columns in the text entry box under Columns to repeat For example to repeat column A type A In the Columns to repeat list none changes to user defined 3 Click OK You do not need to select the entire range of the rows to be Note repeated selecting one cell in each row works Page breaks While defining a print range can be a powerful tool it may sometimes be necessary to manually tweak Calc s printout To do this you can use a manual break A manual break helps to ensure that your data prints properly You can insert a horizontal page break above or a vertical page break to the left of the active cell Inserting a page break To insert a page break 1 Navigate to the cell where the page break will begin
250. ing a single column or row above Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 139 Working with sheets Like any other Calc element sheets can be inserted deleted and renamed Inserting new sheets There are many ways to insert a new Sheet The first step for all of the methods is to select the sheets that the new sheet will be inserted next to Then any of the following options can be used e Click on the Insert menu and select Sheet or e Right click on its tab and select Insert Sheet or e Click into an empty space at the end of the line of sheet tabs see Figure 103 Click here to insert a new sheet Figure 103 Creating a new sheet Active Sheet FI Fach method will open the Insert Sheet dialog Figure 104 Here you can select whether the new sheet is to go before or after the selected Sheet and how many sheets you want to insert If you are inserting only one sheet there is the opportunity to give the sheet a name Insert Sheet Position O After current sheet Sheet New sheet No of sheets _ From file Figure 104 Insert Sheet dialog 140 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Deleting sheets Sheets can be deleted individually or in groups Single sheet Right click on the tab of the sheet you want to delete and select Delete Sheet from the pop up menu or click Edit gt Sheet gt Delete Multiple sheets To delete multiple sheets select them as described ea
251. ing extensions This section describes several of the more important and popular extensions to OpenOffice org In each case you need to first install the extension as described in the previous section 406 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 PDF Import Enables you to make minor modifications to the text of existing PDF files when the original source files do not exist or you are unable to open the source files Whenever possible modify the source and regenerate the PDF to obtain the best results When the extension is installed PDF is listed as a choice in the File Type drop down list in the File gt Open dialog PDF documents open in Draw Depending on the complexity of the layout changes may be easy or difficult to make and the saved result may or may not preserve the original layout Font substitution may occur Each line of text appears in a separate text box If part of the text is in a different font or font variation for example bold or italic that part of the line is in a separate text box Thus a single line of text may contain several separate text boxes If you edit the text in one box the result may overlap the text in the following box or leave a conspicuous gap between the two portions of text If this occurs you need to manually adjust the spacing between the boxes Graphics with transparent backgrounds are imported with black backgrounds and these black backgrounds remain when the edited PDF is saved aga
252. ing fields for these calculations you must follow this format table or query name followed by a period follow by the field name For hyphenated or multiple word names table Caution or query use double quotes around the table or query name The query will then add the rest of the double quotes as in VAN Figure 232 Use the arithmetical symbol between the two More than one calculation can be done by using parentheses to group the arithmetical operations Step 9 Run the query and make some modification After we run the query to make sure it works correctly we will hide all of the fields that we do not need 1 Click the Run Query icon in the Design Query toolbar Figure 247 The results are in Figure 255 Fuekuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading FuellD Fue FuellD Distance End Reading Odometer Fuer Odometer End Reading Fuelua 6 430 778 7 70421 a5 MEO OOOO 19 570 1032 3 178 7 1 253 6 12 96 15 150 1239 4 1032 3 1 207 1 13 67 Figure 255 Result of running the fuel economy query Notice that not all of the last column label is visible because some of the labels are long We can fix this problem by using an alias for many of the fields The labels are replaced by their aliases 2 Add Aliases Type in the aliases as they are listed in Figure 256 FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading End Reading Quanity Begin End Fuel Economy End Reading End Reading Fuel Figure 2
253. ing menu or create new menus that call macros For more about modifying menus see Chapter 14 Keyboard shortcuts Use Tools gt Customize to open the Customize dialog and select the Keyboard tab Assigning keyboard shortcuts is discussed in Chapter 14 Event In OpenOffice org when something happens we say that an event occurred For example a document was opened a key was pressed or the mouse moved OpenOffice org allows events to cause a macro to be called the macro is then called an event handler Full coverage of event handlers is well beyond the scope of this document but a little knowledge can accomplish much Be careful when you configure an event handler For example assume that you write an event handler that is Caution called every time that a key is pressed but you make a A mistake so the event is not properly handled One possible result is that your event handler will consume all key presses forcing you to forcibly terminate OpenOffice org Use Tools gt Customize to open the Customize dialog and select the Fvents tab see Figure 325 The events in the Customize dialog are related to the entire application and specific documents Use the Save In box to choose OpenOffice org or a specific document Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 387 Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events ti Assign Start Application Macro e Close Application Create Document Open Document Remove Save
254. ion Style e Documents Background image lt no background image gt o Main layout Layout details The icon set is used For presentations in HTML Format Web site information Preview Site title Document Creation Date Last Change Date Filename 6 Enter general information such as Title and HTML Metadata information Click Next Web Wizard Steps 0s Enter general information for your web site 1 Introduction Title Test Website Documents Main layout HTML Metadata Layout details Description Test Data Style E mail Web site information Copyright notice Preview Created 26 05 05 Modified 26 05 05 7 Chose where to save the file and preview the page if you wish Click Finish Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 361 Web Wizard Steps Where do you want to publish your web site Introduction Click Preview to see a preview in your browser Documents Preview Main layout Publish the new web site To a local Folder C Documents and Settings Jean Hollis weberi Documents My Websites Style To a ZIP archive Web site information l 2 3 4 Layout details 5 6 T Preview Publishing via FTP Proxy is not supported Save settings recommended Save as Web Wizard Settings1 w To edit or view the document s underlying HTML code click View gt HTML Source or click the HTML Source icon on the Main toolbar Saving Calc spreadsheets as web pages Calc can
255. ions for OOo applications User Interface Icon size and style The first box specifies the display size of toolbar icons Automatic Small or Large The Automatic icon size option uses the setting for your operating system The second box specifies the icon set theme here the Automatic option uses an icon set compatible with your operating system and choice of desktop for example KDE or Gnome on Linux User Interface Use system font for user interface If you prefer to use the system font the default font for your computer and operating system instead of the font provided by OOo for the user interface select this option User interface Screen font antialiasing Not available in Windows Select this option to smooth the screen appearance of text Enter the smallest font size to apply antialiasing Menu icons in menus Select this option if you want icons as well as words to be visible in menus Font Lists Show preview of fonts When you select this option the font list looks like Figure 16 Left with the font names shown as an example of the font with the option deselected the font list shows only the font names not their 36 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 formatting Figure 16 Right The fonts you will see listed are those that are installed on your system meremees v w Bi J Bitstream Vera Sans 11 ATArial n A r Arial Blach At Arial Black Arial Narrow AT Arial Narrow AtAvantGar
256. isc Notes 3 Close the Properties window All of the listings in the Properties window can be modified by you For example by changing the Alignment from Left to Tip Center the word or words in the label are centered within the Label When you have some time you might want to experiment with different settings just to see the results you get Step 5 Change the widths of the labels and fields We want the following controls to be 2 cm wide 0 8 inches Breakfast Lunch Supper Odometer Snack No Tolls Snack Cost Motel and Misc All of the payment fields were changed in step 2 but Misc Payment needs to be changed to 3 cm 1 2 inches 1 Click Breakfast The border around it appears with eight green handles 2 Move the cursor over the middle green handle on the right The cursor changes into a single arrow 3 Drag and drop the cursor to the left to shorten the control or to the right to lengthen the control Use the guide lines to determine the width 4 Repeat for the other listed controls 266 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Step 6 Replace fields with other fields We want to replace the PaymentType field with a List Box Then we can choose the type of payment from the Payment Type table rather than having to manually enter the type In my case each of my payment types begins with a different letter If I enter the first letter of the payment type the rest of the word automatically appears I can the
257. ith Version 2 0 OpenOffice org by default saves documents in Open Document Format ODF OpenOffice org 3 has adopted version 1 2 of the OpenDocument standard OpenDocument is an XML based file format for office documents text documents spreadsheets drawings presentations and more developed at OASIS an independent international standards group Unlike other file formats ODF is an open standard It is publicly available royalty free and without legal or other restrictions therefore ODF files are not tied to a specific office suite and anybody can build a program that interprets these files For this reason ODF is quickly becoming the preferred file format for government agencies schools and other companies who prefer not to be too dependent on a particular software supplier File formats OOo can open OpenOffice org can open a wide variety of file formats in addition to the OpenDocument formats Opening text documents In addition to OpenDocument formats odt ott oth and odm Writer 3 can open the formats used by OOo 1 x sxw stw and sxg and the following text document formats Microsoft Word 6 0 95 97 2000 XP doc and dot Microsoft Word 2003 XML xml Microsoft Word 2007 XML docx docm dotx dotm Microsoft WinWord 5 doc WordPerfect Document wpd WPS 2000 Office 1 0 wps tf txt and csv StarWriter formats sdw sgl vor DocBook xml Appendix B Background Information 419
258. ith people who are still using older versions of OpenOffice org it is recommended that you save the document using ODF version 1 0 1 1 48 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Size optimization for ODF format OpenOffice org documents are XML files When you select this option OOo writes the XML data without indents and line breaks If you want to be able to read the XML files in a text editor in a structured form deselect this option Document type If you routinely share documents with users of Microsoft Word you might want to change the Always save as attribute for text documents to one of the Word formats VBA Properties Load Save options On the Load Save VBA Properties page Figure 29 you can choose whether to keep any macros in MSOffice documents that are opened in OOo Microsoft Word 97 2000 X P Load Basic code Save original Basic code Microsoft Excel 97 2000 P C Executable code Save original Basic code Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP Save original Basic code Figure 29 Choosing Load Save VBA Properties e If you choose Save original Basic code the macros will not work in OOo but are retained if you save the file into Microsoft Office format e If you choose Load Basic code to edit the changed code is saved in an OOo document but is not retained if you save into an MSOffice format e If you are importing a Microsoft Excel file containing VBA code you can select the option Executable code Whereas nor
259. iting documents according to physical attributes For example you might specify the font family font size and any formatting such as bold or italic Styles are Jogical attributes Using styles means that you stop saying font size 14pt Times New Roman bold centered and you start saying Title because you have defined the Title style to have those characteristics In other words styles means that you shift the emphasis from what the text or page or other element looks like to what the text is Styles help improve consistency in a document They also make major formatting changes easy For example you may decide to change the indentation of all paragraphs or change the font of all titles For a long document this simple task can be prohibitive Styles make the task easy 58 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 In addition styles are used by OpenOffice org for many processes even if you are not aware of them For example Writer relies on heading styles or other styles you specify when it compiles a table of contents Some common examples of style use are given in Examples of style use on page 79 OpenOffice org supports the following types of styles Page styles include margins headers and footers borders and backgrounds In Calc page styles also include the sequence for printing sheets Paragraph styles control all aspects of a paragraph s appearance such as text alignment tab stops lin
260. k the arrow next to the Font Size box on the Formatting toolbar For other formatting you can use the Bold Italic or Underline icons To choose a font color click the arrow next to the Font Color icon to display a color palette Click on the required color To define custom colors use Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Colors Ssee Appendix D of the Calc Guide To specify the language of the cell useful because it allows different languages to exist in the same document and be spell checked correctly use the Font tab of the Format Cells a To soe dialog Use the Font Effects tab to set other font Zn Se ETE characteristics See Chapter 10 of the Calc EE Guide for more information Automatic Formatting the cell borders To quickly choose a line style and color for the borders of a cell click the small arrows next to the Line Style and Line Color icons on the Formatting toolbar In each case a palette of choices is displayed For more control including the spacing between the cell borders and the text use the Borders tab of the Format Cells dialog There you can also define a shadow See Chapter 10 of the Calc Guide for details The cell border properties apply to a cell and can only be changed if you are editing that cell For example if cell C3 has Note a top border which would be equivalent visually to a bottom border on C2 that border can only be removed by selecting C3 It cannot be removed in C2
261. l table Step 5 Save and close the query Since this query contains the ending odometer reading for our calculations name it End Reading when saving it Then close the query Step 6 Create the query to calculate the fuel economy 1 Click Create Query in Design View to open a new query 294 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 2 Add the Fuel table to the query just as you did in step 2 Add tables But do not close the Add Tables window 3 Add the End Reading query to this query a Click the Query radio button to get the list of queries in the database Figure 249 Add Table or Query Tables Queries amp Query_CD Collection Figure 249 Selecting queries to add to another query b Click End Reading c Click Add and then click Close Step 7 Add fields to the table at the bottom of the query We are going to calculate the fuel economy To do this we need the FuelQuantity and distance traveled Since the FuelQuantity we want to use is at the ending odometer reading we will use the End Reading query to get it We will also use the Odometer field from the Fuel table and End Reading query Fuel End Reading FuellD FuellD Date Odometer FuelCost FuelQuantity Cosh aati Figure 250 Tables in this query 1 Double click Fue Quantity in the End Reading query 2 Double click Odometer in the End Reading query 3 Double click Odometer in the Fuel table Field IFuelQuantity
262. l the controls When you release the mouse button a border with its green handles appears around the controls you selected Figure 202 Lunch Tols Figure 202 Selecting multiple controls Move the cursor over one of the fields It changes to a double arrow Figure 203 Figure 203 Double arrow Drag the group of controls to where you want them Before changing the Date field we will move the Lunch and Tolls controls to the right 5 cm 2 inches 262 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Tip Note When either changing a size or moving a control two properties of the Form Design toolbar should be selected Snap to Grid and Guides when Moving Your controls will line up better and an outline of what you are moving moves as the cursor moves You should also have both rulers active Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt View Since the form is created in Writer that is where you have to make sure both horizontal and vertical rulers have a check in the box in front of them I use centimeters when making changes in a form because centimeters are more accurate than inches When moving controls fields and their labels placement is also more accurate You can change your rulers from inches to centimeters by right clicking each ruler and selecting centimeter from the context menu You do not have to understand what centimeters are You only have to match your controls labels or fields to Specific numer
263. lation to the page margins It does not move as you add or delete text e To Paragraph The object is associated with a paragraph and moves with the paragraph It may be placed in the margin or another location e To Character The object is associated with a character but is not in the text sequence It moves with the paragraph but may be placed in the margin or another location This method is similar to anchoring to a paragraph e As Character The object is placed in the document like any character and moves with the paragraph as you add or delete text before the object Ungroup icon Ungroups the selected objects so you can manage them individually Group icon Groups the selected objects so you can manage them as a single object Using menu options You can use some the choices on the Format menu to anchor align arrange and group selected Fontwork objects wrap text around them and flip them horizontally and vertically You can also right click on a Fontwork object and choose many of the Same options from the pop up menu In addition the pop up menu provides quick access to the Line Area Text and Position and Size dialogs The Line and Area dialogs are described on pages 350 and 351 The Text dialog offers only a few options for Fontwork objects and is not discussed here JIZ Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 On the Position and Size dialog Figure 311 you can enter precise values concerning size and po
264. lay the full Help system press F1 or select OpenOffice org Help from the Help menu In addition you can choose whether to activate tooltips extended tips and the Help Agent using Tools gt Options gt General If tooltips are enabled place the mouse pointer over any of the icons to see a Small box tooltip with a brief explanation of the icon s function For a more detailed explanation select Help gt What s This and hold the pointer over the icon Free online support The OpenOffice org community not only develops software but provides free volunteer based support Users of OOo can get comprehensive online support from community venues such as newsgroups forums or mailing lists There are also numerous websites run by users that offer free tips and tutorials 14 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Free OpenOffice org support Free community support provided by a network of hundreds of experienced users You must be subscribed to post messages To subscribe send a blank email to users subscribe openoffice org List archives are here http www openoffice org servlets SummarizeList listName users Users Mailing List Templates user guides how tos and other documentation http documentation openoffice org See also the Documentation wiki http wiki services openoffice org wiki Documentation Documentation Project Information resources and mail lists in your language http projects op
265. ld must have something in it For example if FirstName has Entry required set to Yes having an entry with the first name missing will not be allowed In general only set Entry required to Yes if something must always be put in that field By default Entry required is set to No Note e CollectionID Change AutoValue from No to Yes e AlbumTitle Entry required If all of your music is in albums change Entry required to Yes Otherwise leave Entry required as No Length Unless you have an album title that exceeds 100 characters in length counting the spaces do not change the length In Base the maximum length of each field must be specified on creation It is not easy to change this later so if in doubt specify a greater length Base uses VCHAR as the field format for text fields This format only uses the actual number of characters in a field up to the limit set So a field containing 20 characters will only use space for 20 characters even if the limit is set at 100 Two album titles containing 25 and 32 characters respectively will use space for 25 and 32 characters and not 100 characters Note e Artist Use the Default setting And since music has authors set Entry Required to Yes e Date Purchased Length default setting Entry required should be No You may not know the date e Format Only change the Entry Required setting from Noto Yes e Notes No changes are required e Numberoflracks Change the Field
266. lder To import a template into a template folder 1 Inthe Template Management dialog select the folder into which you want to import the template 2 Click the Commands button and choose Import Template from the drop down menu A standard file browser window opens 3 Find and select the template that you want to import and click Open The file browser window closes and the template appears in the selected folder 4 If you want type a new name for the template and then press Enter Exporting a template To export a template from a template folder to another location 1 Inthe Template Management dialog double click the folder that contains the template you want to export A list of the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name 2 Click the template that you want to export 3 Click the Commands button and choose Export Template from the drop down menu The Save As window opens 4 Find the folder into which you want to export the template and click Save 78 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Examples of style use The following examples of common use of page and paragraph styles are taken from Writer There are many other ways to use styles see the guides for the various components for details Defining a different first page for a document Many documents such as letters and reports have a first page that is different from the other pages in the document For example the first p
267. le gt New gt Templates and Documents From Sun Microsystems Freeware Template Changer Adds two new items to the File gt Templates menu that allow you to assign a new template to the current document or to a folder of documents All styles and formatting will be loaded from that template and the document will behave as it was created using that template Open source 408 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 OpenOf ficeorg3 Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts Introduction You can use OpenOffice org OOo without requiring a pointing device Such as a mouse or trackball by using its built in keyboard shortcuts Tasks as varied and complex as docking and un docking toolbars and windows or changing the size or position of objects can all be accomplished with only a keyboard OOo has a general set of keyboard shortcuts available in all components and a component specific set directly related to the work of that component Writer Calc Impress Draw and Base This appendix lists the general set For component specific shortcuts see the relevant component guide For help with OOo s keyboard shortcuts or using OOo with a keyboard only search the OOo Help using the shortcut or accessibility keywords In addition to using the built in keyboard shortcuts listed in this Appendix you can define your own See Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org for instructions Some of the shortcut keys may be assigne
268. le button to make the spreadsheet read only All of the fields will show the value for the data of the first record you selected 6 Add the Form Navigation toolbar View gt Toolbars gt Form Navigation 4 Record 2 of 2 Cu 4 gt Deo Figure 237 Navigation arrows of a form 7 Click the arrows on the Form Navigation toolbar to view the different records of the table The arrows are circled in red The number in the box changes when you change the record number by clicking an arrow The data in the fields changes correspondingly to the data for that particular record number Entering data in a form Records are used to organize the data we enter into a form They also organize the data we enter into a subform Figure 238 PT Dwe Foot Fuetvanty Odometer Payment Type Figure 238 Single Record Fach type of field allows a different method to enter the data In most if not all cases more than one method can be used Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 285 The first step to entering data in a form is to open it from the main database window 1 Click the Forms icon in the Database list 2 Find the form s name in the Forms list Vacations 3 Double click the form s name The quickest way to enter a date in the Date field is to click the arrow that opens the dropdown calendar Then click the day the you want Figure 239 To change the month use the following steps Then use the Jab key to go to the Odo
269. lect Al files from the Save as Type list 3 Next enter a name for the keyboard configuration file in the File name box or select an existing file from the list If you need to browse to find a file from another location 4 Click Save A confirmation dialog appears if you are about to overwrite an existing file otherwise there will be no feedback and the file will be saved 404 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Loading a saved keyboard configuration To load a saved keyboard configuration file and replace your existing configuration click the Load button near the bottom right of the Customize dialog and then select the configuration file from the Load Keyboard Configuration dialog Resetting the shortcut keys To reset all of the keyboard shortcuts to their default values click the Reset button near the bottom right of the Customize dialog Use this feature with care as no confirmation dialog will be displayed the defaults will be set without any further notice or user input Assigning macros to events In OOo when something happens we say that an event occured For example a document was opened a key was pressed or the mouse moved You can associate a macro with an event so the macro is run when the event occurs For example a common use is to assign the open document event to run a macro that performs certain setup tasks for the document To associate a macro with an event use the Events page of the Customi
270. lect starting document This document should contain a salutation z Select document type 3 Select address list Dear Mrs lt Last Mame gt Dear Mr lt Last Mame 6 Edit document Gender 7 Personalize document a Save print or send Figure 295 Deselecting a salutation 334 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Steps Save print or send the document Select starting document Select one of the options below Select document type Save starting document Select address list C Save merged document Print merged document to Pa e Create salutation E Mail settings To E mail Address Copy to Subject Edit document mm Personalize document oo Save print or send Send as HTML Message ba test email message odt Send all documents From 1 5 Send documents Figure 296 Sending a document as an email message Digital signing of documents To sign a document digitally you need a personal key the certificate A personal key is stored on your computer as a combination of a private key which must be kept secret and a public key which you add to your documents when you sign them You can get a certificate from a certification authority which may be a private company or a governmental institution When you apply a digital signature to a document a kind of checksum is computed from
271. les to HTML PDF or Flash PDF export is the same as for any part of OpenOffice org as described in Chapter 10 Printing E mailing and Exporting Flash export creates a swf file HTML export uses a conversion wizard that creates as many web pages as there are pages in your Draw document You can optionally choose to display the pages in frames with a navigator and can set an index page For more information see Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages Saving Documents as HTML Files 236 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 OpenOf ficeorg3 Chapter amp Getting Started with Base OpenOfrtice org s database component Introduction A data source or database is a collection of pieces of information that can be accessed or managed by OpenOffice org OOo For example a list of names and addresses is a data source that could be used for producing a mail merge letter A shop stock list could be a data source managed through OOo OpenOffice org uses the terms Data Source and Database to refer to the same thing which could be a database such as MySQL or dBase or a spreadsheet or text document holding data Note This chapter covers creating a database showing what is contained in a database and how the different parts are used by OOo It also covers using the Base component of OOo to register other data sources A data source can be a database spreadsheet or text document Data sources are only introduced in thi
272. libraries modules and dialogs Select the library container to use and then click the Import button to import macro libraries see Figure 321 Tip You cannot import the library named Standard On Linux the OpenOffice org specific files are stored in a directory whose name begins with a period Directories and files with names beginning with a period are not shown in a Tip normal selection dialog To open the directory I navigated to the parent directory entered the name openoffice org2 0 and then clicked Open This opened the directory which was not initially shown 382 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 andrew0 home andy openoffice org 0 user basic MacroFormatterADP E ca al Date modified dialog xlb XLB File 296 Bytes 10 26 2006 22 53 06 script xlb XLB File 357 Bytes 10 26 2006 22 53 06 File type BASIC Cancel Help Figure 321 Select a macro library to import Navigate to the directory containing the library to import There are usually two files from which to choose dialog xlb and script xlb It does not matter which of these two files you select both will be imported Select a file and click Open to continue see Figure 322 File name script xlb MacroFormatterADP eee ee Cancel Options C Insert as reference read only Replace existing libraries Figure 322 Choose library import options If the library already exists it will not be replaced unless Replace existing libra
273. line groups manually by selecting the cells for grouping then choosing Data gt Group and Outline gt Group On the Group dialog you can choose whether to group the selected cells by rows or columns When you close the dialog the outline group controls are visible between either the row or column headers and the edges of the editing window The controls resemble the tree structure of a file manager in appearance and can be hidden by selecting Data gt Outline gt Hide Details They are strictly for on screen use and do not print The basic outline controls have plus or minus signs at the start of the group to show or hide hidden cells However if one or more outline group is nested in another the controls have numbered buttons for hiding different levels of group 158 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 If you no longer need a group place the mouse cursor in any cell in it and select Data gt Group and Outline gt Ungroup Jo remove all groups on a sheet select Data gt Group and Outline gt Remove Figure 124 Outline group controls Filtering which cells are visible A filter is a list of conditions that each entry has to meet in order to be displayed You can set three types of filters from the Data gt Filter sub menu Automatic filters add a drop down list to the top row of a column that contains commonly used filters They are quick and convenient and because the condition includes every unique entry in t
274. ll be used See Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org for more about the OOo Open and Save dialogs Document status Choose whether printing a document counts as changing the document If this option is selected then the next time you close the document after printing the print date is recorded in the document properties as a change and you will be prompted to save the document again even if you did not make any other changes Year two digits Specifies how two digit years are interpreted For example if the two digit year is set to 1930 and you enter a date of 1 1 30 or later into your document the date is interpreted as 1 1 1930 or later An earlier date is interpreted as being in the following century that is 1 1 20 is interpreted as 1 1 2020 34 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Memory options In the Options dialog click OpenOffice org gt Memory Some considerations e More memory can make OpenOffice org faster and more convenient for example more undo steps require more memory but the trade off is less memory available for other applications and you could run out of memory altogether e To load the Quickstarter an icon on the desktop or in the system tray when you start your computer select the option near the bottom of the dialog This makes OpenOffice org start faster the trade off is OOo uses some memory even when not being used This option called Enable systray quickstarter is not available
275. ll these facilities though different in application are based around the concept of a registered data source a spreadsheet or database containing the name and address records and other information from which is derived the variable information necessary to their function Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge in the Writer Guide describes the process Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 121 Using master documents Master documents are typically used for producing long documents such as a book a thesis or a long report or when different people are writing different chapters or other parts of the full document so you don t need to share files A master document joins separate text documents into one larger document and unifies the formatting table of contents ToC bibliography index and other tables or lists Yes master documents do work in Writer However until you become familiar with them you may think that master documents are unreliable or difficult to use See Chapter 13 Working with Master Documents in the Writer Guide Creating fill in forms A standard text document displays information a letter report or brochure for example Typically the reader may edit everything or nothing in any way A form has sections that are not to be edited and other sections that are designed for the reader to make changes For example a questionnaire has an introduction and questions which do not change and spaces for the rea
276. llowing information displayed This information changes when the mouse is moved Object position Object dimensions Current proportional page si pe l _ Eo 44 06 13 29 12 66 x 0 59 75 ig Slide 1 2 Layo ut Default Dynamic movement of objects To move an object select it and then click within the object s border and hold down the left mouse button while moving the mouse To drop the object at its new location release the mouse button During movement the shape of the object appears as dotted lines to help with AOE repositioning If you have selected Guides when moving in ____ Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt View then during movement dotted lines 3 3 appear to help with repositioning lalt a Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 223 Dynamic size modification of objects To change the size of an object or group of Rens ae selected objects with the mouse you need to move one of the handles located around the selection As shown in the following illustration the outline of the resulting new object appears as a dotted line The results differ depending on which handle you use If you choose a corner handle you will resize the object along two axes at the same time If you use a side handle the objects will only be resized along one axis If you press the Shift key at the same time as you carry out the resizing operation the size change will be carried out symmetrica
277. lly with respect to the two axes this enables you to keep the aspect height length ratio of the object Note Rotation Rotating an object lets you move the object around an axis To do this dynamically use the red handles as you do when changing the size of the object Rotation works in a slightly different way for 3D objects because the rotation occurs in 3D space and not in one plane See Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects in the Draw Guide regarding rotation when Edit Points mode is active Note To rotate an object or a group of objects drag the red corner handle points of the selection with the mouse The mouse cursor takes the shape of an arc of a circle with an arrow at each end A dotted outline of the object being rotated appears and the current angle of rotation is dynamically shown in the status bar Rotations are made about an axis which is displayed as a small symbol You can move the axis of rotation with the mouse as shown in Figure 109 If you hold down the Shift key during the rotation the operation will be carried out in increments of 15 226 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Mouse cursor Cs Figure 169 Rotating an object Inclination and perspective To slant or shear objects use the red handles located at the midpoint of an edge of the selected objects The mouse pointer changes to a when the pointer hovers over one of these midpoint handles Not every object can be slanted basi
278. log Some items of interest on the Printer Options dialog include e In the Contents section you might choose not to print graphics or page background in drafts for example to save toner or ink e In the Pages section you can choose Print only left even numbered pages or only right odd numbered pages These settings are useful when you want to print on both sides of the page but do not have a printer that handles this automatically Print in reversed page order Brochure the results of this selection are discussed in Printing a brochure on page 115 e In the Notes section you can choose whether to print any notes that have been added to your document using Insert gt Note and where to print the notes Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 113 Printing in black and white on a color printer You may wish to print documents in black and white on a color printer to save expensive color ink or toner Common uses are for drafts or documents to be photocopied in black and white Several choices are available To print the current document in black and white or grayscale 1 Click File gt Print to open the Print dialog 2 Click Properties to open the properties dialog for the printer The available choices vary from one printer to another but you Should find an option for Color See your printer s help or user manual for more information 3 The choices for color may include black and white or gra
279. log you will see some extra choices under Language Settings as shown in Figure 34 These choices Searching in Japanese Asian Layout and Complex Text Layout are not discussed here Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 53 Options Language Settings OpenOffice org paer Load Save ee Ss Save CA Language Settings Languages Writing Aids Searching in Japanese Asian Layout Complex Text Layout Figure 34 Extra pages available when enhanced language support options are selected This is where you make settings concerning language and writin OpenOffice org Choose spelling options To choose the options for checking spelling click Language Settings gt Writing Aids In the Options section of the page Figure 35 choose the settings that are useful for you Some considerations e If you do not want spelling checked while you type deselect Check spelling as you type and select Do not mark errors To find the second item scroll down in the Options list e If you use a custom dictionary that includes words in all upper case and words with numbers for example AS 400 select Check uppercase words and Check words with numbers e Check special regions includes headers footers frames and tables when checking spelling Writing aids Available language modules M OpenOffice org Hunspell SpellChecker lV ALTLinux LibHnj Hyphenator W OpenOffice org New Thesaurus User defined dictionaries standar
280. look like Those changes are explained in the next step e Close the Properties window OE oe es a te cee T a A S oe T es e ee S iC es F E o E cote o Errar tt aaah ee a a aa Figure 21 6 Position of con trols in main form Step 7 Change the Note field We want the Note control where it is located in Figure 216 Since it has a memo field type it needs a vertical scrollbar for additional text space if desired 1 Control click the Note field The green handles should surround the Note field but not its label 2 Click the Control icon to open the Properties window Figure 217 Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 269 3 Scroll down to the Scrollbars setting Change the selection from None to Vertical in this dropdown list General Data Events Background color __ 0x0ODDDDDD 7 A A a ea a red 3D look i Text DGS chee ve decade cn Multi line 7 Text lines end with LF Unix z Scrollbars VENCA None Horizontal Hide selection Additional information Both Halip TEND cicicscccsceecesdsncans Hal URL Figure 217 Scrollbar selections in the Properties window 4 Close the Properties window 5 Lengthen the Note field a Move the cursor over the middle green handle at the bottom of the Note field It becomes a vertical single arrow b Drag the cursor down until the length is 6 cm 2 4 inches Step 8 Change labels and
281. lt Original gt click it to select it e The types of Presentation Backgrounds are shown in Figure 140 By clicking an item you will see a preview of the slide design in the Preview window Impress contains three choices under Presentations lt Original gt Introducing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy e lt Original gt is for a blank presentation slide design e Both Introducing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy have their own prepackaged slide designs Each design appears in the Preview window when its name is clicked Introducing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy are prepackaged presentation templates They can be used to create a presentation by choosing From template in the first step Figure 139 Note 4 Select how the presentation will be used under Select an output medium Most often presentations are created for computer screen display Select Screen Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 183 5 Click Next The Presentation Wizard step 3 appears Presentation Wizard select a slide transition No Effect speed Medium Select the presentation type 2 Default O Automatic I 00 00 10 e a review 00 00 10 Figure 141 Selecting a slide design 6 Choose the desired slide transition from the Effect drop down menu 7 Select the desired speed for the transition between the d
282. lue Andrew Pitonyak dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 argsl1 end sub The macro in Listing 1 is not as complicated as it first appears Learning a few things helps significantly in understanding the generated macros The discussion starts with features near the top of the macro listing and describes them If you like to avoid details then simply change the text Andrew Pitonyak to what you want to insert at the current cursor position Comments start with REM The keyword REM short for remark starts a macro comment All text after REM on the same line is ignored As a short cut the single quote character can also be used to start a comment StarBasic is not case sensitive for keywords so REM Rem and rem all start a comment If you use symbolic constants Tip defined by the API it is safer to assume that the names are case sensitive symbolic constants are an advanced topic not usually needed by people that use the macro recorder Defining subroutines with SUB Individual macros are stored in subroutines defined with the keyword SUB The end of a subroutine is indicated by the words END SUB The code starts by defining the subroutine named Main which is empty and does nothing The next subroutine EnterMyName contains the generated code Ti OpenOffice org creates an empty subroutine named Main Ip when it creates a module There are advanced topics that are beyond the scope of this docum
283. macro recorder and the dispatcher You can also write macros that directly access the objects that comprise OpenOffice org In other words you can directly manipulate a document Directly manipulating OOo s internal objects is an advanced topic that is beyond the scope of this chapter A simple example however demonstrates how this works Listing 4 Append the text Hello to the current document Sub AppendHello Dim oDoc Dim sTextService Dim oCurs REM ThisComponent refers to the currently active document oDoc ThisComponent REM Verify that this is a text document STextService com sun star text TextDocument If NOT oDoc supportsService sTextService Then MsgBox This macro only works with a text document Exit Sub End If REM Get the view cursor from the current controller oCurs oDoc currentControLller getViewCursor REM Move the cursor to the end of the document oCurs gotoEnd False REM Insert text Hello at the end of the document oCurs Text insertString oCurs Hello False End Sub 390 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Finding more information Numerous resources are available that provide help with writing macros Use Help gt OpenOffice org Help to open the OOo help pages The upper left corner of the OOo help system contains a drop down list that determines which help set is displayed To view the help for Basic the drop down must display Help about OpenOffice org Basic Included
284. mall dialog pops up If you might want to reuse this design you can give it a name and Save it Otherwise click Do Not Save Name HTML Design Do Not Save Saving Draw documents as web pages Exporting drawings from OpenOffice org s Draw application is similar to exporting a presentation from Impress Use File gt Export and select HTML Document as the file type When using the wizard you can choose to create the web page at any time by clicking the Create button 366 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 OpenOf fice org3 Chapter 1 3 Getting Started with Macros Using the macro recorder Your first macro A macro is a saved sequence of commands or keystrokes that are stored for later use An example of a simple macro is one that types your address The OpenOffice org macro language is very flexible allowing automation of both simple and complex tasks Macros are especially useful to repeat a task the same way over and over again OpenOffice org macros are usually written in a language called StarBasic or just abbreviated Basic Although you can learn Basic and write macros there is a steep learning curve to writing macros from scratch The usual method for a beginner is to use the built in macro recorder which records your keystrokes and saves them for use Most tasks in OpenOffice org are accomplished by dispatching a command sending a command which is intercepted and used The macro recorder w
285. mally the code is preserved but rendered inactive if you inspect it with the StarBasic IDE you will notice that it is all commented with this option the code is ready to be executed Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 49 Microsoft Office Load Save options On the Load Save Microsoft Office page Figure 30 you can choose what to do when importing and exporting Microsoft Office OLE objects linked or embedded objects or documents such as spreadsheets or equations Select the L options to convert Microsoft OLE objects into the corresponding OpenOffice org OLE objects when a Microsoft document is loaded into OOo mnemonic L for load Select the S options to convert OpenOffice org OLE objects into the corresponding Microsoft OLE objects when a document is saved in a Microsoft format mnemonic S for save MathsType to OpenOffice org Maths OpenOffice org Maths to MathsType rs E WinWord to OpenOffice org Writer OpenOffice org Writer to WinWord E Excel to OpenOffice org Calc OpenOffice org Calc to Excel B PowerPoint to OpenOffice org Impress OpenOffice org Impress to PowerPoint L Load and convert the object S Convert and save the object Figure 30 Choosing Load Save Microsoft Office options HTML compatibility Load Save options Choices made on the Load Save HTML Compatibility page Figure 31 affect HIML pages imported into OpenOffice org and those exported from OOo See HT
286. me webpage 7 Save as type HTML ocument Cancel styles Heading 1 ha Default Figure Heading 1 Figure 313 Creating a series of web pages from one document 358 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Creating web pages using a Wizard OOo s Web wizard allows you to create several types of standard web pages To use it 1 Select File gt Wizards gt Web Page On the first page of the Wizard choose settings and click Next Note If this is your first web page the only settings option is Default Pa Web Wizard Steps Introduction 4 introduction This Web Wizard is to aid you in publishing documents on the Internet 2 Documents TE will convert the documents so that they can be viewed by a web browser In addition it Will generate a Table of Contents page with links For easy access to the documents The Web Wizard will also allow you bo customize the design and layout of your web site You will be able to keep the documents you have published on the web up to date and add or remove documents at any time Choose settings For the Web Wizard default gt kad Cancel 2 Choose or browse to the document you would like to format The Title Summary and Author information is picked up from the document s properties if necessary edit it Click Next Steps Select the documents you want to publish 1 Introduction Web site content Documents Ol 1765 Creating WebPages
287. ment dialog select the folder that you want to delete 2 Click the Commands button and choose Delete from the drop down menu A message box appears and asks you to confirm the deletion Click Yes Moving a template To move a template from one template folder to another template folder 1 In the Template Management dialog double click the folder that contains the template you want to move A list of the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name 2 Click the template that you want to move and drag it to the desired folder If you do not have the authority to delete templates from the source folder this action copies the template instead of moving it Deleting a template You cannot delete templates supplied with OOo or installed using the Extension Manager you can only delete templates that you have created or imported Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 77 To delete a template 1 Inthe Template Management dialog double click the folder that contains the template you want to delete A list of the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name 2 Click the template that you want to delete 3 Click the Commands button and choose Delete from the drop down menu A message box appears and asks you to confirm the deletion Click Yes Importing a template If the template that you want to use is in a different location you must import it into an OOo template fo
288. meter field e Click the left arrow before September to go back one month August 2008 e Click the right arrow after 2008 to go forward one month October 2008 e Multiple clicks in either direction will change the month the same number of times as the number of clicks The year also changes as you move from January back to December or December forward to January each time q September 2008 p SMTWTFS 1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1415 16 17 18 190 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Today None Figure 239 Calendar dropdown The Odometer Tolls and Motel fields are numerical fields Enter values directly into them or use the up and down arrows When the value is entered use the 7ab key to go to the next field e Clicking the up arrow increases the value and the down arrow decreases the value one unit e These two arrows only change the numerals to the left of the decimal place e Numerals to the right of the decimal place must be changed by deleting them and typing the desired ones The Motel s Payment field is a dropdown list If as in my case all of the elements of the list start with different letters typing the first letter selects the desired letter 286 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 e If two or more elements of the list have the same first letter repeated typing of the first letter will cycle through the elements with this same first letter So if you accidentally go past the the element you wanted y
289. mmands x AJ OOoCompuberCode J Help AJ OOokeyvstroke AJ OOoChaphumber AJ OOoStrongeEmphasis EF Default EF OOo able Text EF OOoFooter T OCoComputerCade p Address Book Figure 43 Copying a style from one document to another Loading styles from a template or document You can copy styles by loading them from a template or another document 1 Open the document you want to copy styles into 2 In the Styles and Formatting window long click on the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon and then click on Load Styles see Figure 40 3 On the Load Styles dialog Figure 44 find and select the template you want to copy styles from Load Styles Categories Templates HE Systems phb Help Presentation Presentation Backgrounds Presentations US SizZes Text d Frame Pages C Numbering d Overwrite From File Figure 44 Copying styles from a template into the open document 4 Select the categories of styles to be copied Select Overwrite if you want the styles being copied to replace any styles of the same names in the document you re copying them into 5 Click OK to copy the styles You will not see any change on screen Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 67 To copy the styles from another document click the From File Note button to open a window from which you can select the required document If your document has a table of contents and if you have used custom s
290. mple Figure 194 Simple Form with form additions A simple form consists of the fields from a table Figure 193 More complex forms can contain much more These can contain additional text graphics selection boxes and many other elements Figure 194 is 256 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 made from the same table with a text label Fuel Purchases a list box placed in PaymentType and a graphic background Using the Wizard to create a form We will use the Form Wizard to create two forms CD Collection and Vacations The CD Collection form will be a simple form while the Vacations form will contain a form and a subform We will create the Vacations form with its subform and let you modify the CD Collection form using the same process In the main database window Figure 176 click the Form icon Double click Use Wizard to Create Form to open the wizard Figure 195 Simple forms require only some of these steps while more complex forms may use all of them Step 1 Select fields 1 Under Tables or queries select Vacations as the table Available fields lists the fields for the Vacations table 2 Click the right double arrow to move all of these fields to the Fields in the form list Click Next Select the fields of your form Tables or queries Table Vacations Available fields Fields in the form Date a Odometer Breakfast Lunch Supper Motel Tolls BPayment LPayment Figure 195
291. n go to the next field 1 Control click the Payment field for Breakfast The green handles appear around the field but not around the Label Figure 211 Breakfast Payment rg eS Figure 211 Selecting a field of a control 2 Right click within the green handles and select Replace with gt List Box Figure 208 is the context menu which contains the Replace with selection and Figure 212 is the list of replacement fields 4 Button rec Label field f Group Box List Box Check Box Radio Button Combo Box Image Button File Selection Date Field Time Field Numerical Field Currency Field Pattern Field Image Control Formatted Field ocroll bar opin Button Navigation Bar Figure 212 Replacement fields e R io e a _ bea oo all En m H 3 Click the Control icon in the Form Controls toolbar Figure 210 to open the Properties window 4 On the General tab scroll down to the Dropdown selection Change the No to Yes in this dropdown list Figure 213 Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 267 General Data Events Alignment c cccccce Left Background color 0xOODDDDDD ba Bordat aiaia 3D look v Dropdown UOO O Line Coumi oeae TE Figure 213 Dropdown list open to reveal choices 5 Click the Data tab Type of list contents is a dropdown list Change it to Sql General Data Events Data field c BPayment
292. n PDF 327 equation inserting 310 numbering 321 equation editor 310 brackets 319 derivative markup 321 equations over more than one line 319 floating window 316 font size 318 formula layout 319 limits to sum integral 320 markup 314 matrix markup 320 right click menu 313 Selection window 311 event handling 387 export directly as PDF 325 export HTML 51 exporting to PDF 325 extended tips 33 extension Sun Report Builder 308 Extension Manager 73 308 Index 427 extensions 389 405 extensions and addons sources of 16 F fax icon adding to toolbar 120 401 fax sending 120 FDF 327 fields 193 fields bookmark 124 bookmarks 123 cross reference 123 Fields dialog box References tab 123 file locations 39 file sharing options 42 43 Fill Format 61 fill editing 229 Flash export 362 flip an object 230 floating toolbars 22 23 floating window 23 font history 37 ignore settings when importing HTML 51 options 41 preview 30 replacement table 41 replacements 41 sizes for HTML 50 Fontwork alignment 349 anchoring 352 area options 351 attributes 349 character spacing 349 creating an object 346 editing an object 348 Formatting toolbar 349 Gallery 346 grouping 352 line options 350 moving and resizing objects 353 positioning options 352 same letter heights 348 toolbar 346 348 Form Wizard 257 Formatting toolbar 21 formula editor See equation editor 316 formula files opening 421 formula layout 319 Free Software
293. n also work with drawings directly from within Writer and Impress using a subset of the functions and tools from Draw Draw s functionality is very extensive and complete Although it was not designed to rival high end graphics applications Draw possesses more functions than the majority of drawing tools that are integrated into office productivity suites A few examples of drawing functions might whet your appetite layer management magnetic grid point system dimensions and measurement display connectors for making organization charts 3D functions enabling small three dimensional drawings to be created with texture and lighting effects drawing and page style integration and B zier curves to name a few This chapter introduces some of Draw s features but it does not attempt to cover all of the them See the Draw Guide and the application Help for more information The Draw workspace The main components of the Draw workspace are shown in Figure 148 You can surround the drawing area with toolbars and information areas The number and position of the visible tools vary with the task at hand or user preferences Therefore your setup may appear a little different For example many people put the main Drawing toolbar on the left hand side of the workspace not at the bottom as shown here You can split drawings in Draw over several pages Multipage drawings are used mainly for presentations The Pages pane on the left side
294. n tabs Area Shadow Transparency Colors Gradients Hatching Bitmaps Area tab Choose from the predefined list a color bitmap gradient or hatching pattern to fill the selected object Shadow tab Set the shadow properties of the selected object Transparency tab Set the transparency properties of the selected object Colors tab Modify the available colors or add new ones to appear on the Area tab Gradients tab Modify the available gradients or add new ones to appear on the Area tab Hatching tab Modify the available hatching patterns or add new ones to appear on the Area tab Bitmaps tab Create simple bitmap patterns and import bitmaps to make them available on the Area tab Area Style Filling boxes Select the type of the fill of the selected object For more detailed settings use the Area icon Figure 310 Area options dialog Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 351 Positioning options Rotate icon Rotate the selected object manually using the mouse to drag the object To Foreground icon Moves the selected object in front of the text To Background icon Moves the selected object behind the text Alignment icon Modifies the alignment of the selected objects Bring to front icon Moves the selected object in front of the others Send to back icon Moves the selected object behind the others Change Anchor icon Switch between anchoring options e To Page The object keeps the same position in re
295. n the Tasks pane This inserts a placeholder for a spreadsheet in the center of a slide To insert data and modify the formatting of the spreadsheet it is necessary to activate it and enter the edit mode To do so double click inside the frame with the green handles 200 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Alternatively select Insert gt Spreadsheet from the main menu bar This opens a small spreadsheet in the middle of the slide When a spreadsheet is inserted using this method it is already in edit mode It is also possible to insert a spreadsheet as an OLE object To add a chart to a slide select the corresponding layout in the list of predefined layouts in the task pane or use the Insert Chart feature Impress offers the capability of inserting in a slide various other types of objects such as music or video clips Writer documents Math formulas generic OLE objects and so on A typical presentation may contain movie clips sound clips OLE objects and formulas other objects are less frequently used since they do not appear during a slide Show For details on using spreadsheets charts and other objects in Impress refer to Chapter 7 of the Impress Guide Setting up the slide show Impress gives you the tools to organize and display a slide show including e Which slides to show and in what order e Whether to run the show automatically or manually e Transitions between slides e Animations on individual slides e I
296. nOffice org 1 x formats 1 On the Save As dialog select the checkbox beside Save with password and then click Save You will receive a prompt Enter Password Password Confirm 2 Type the same password in the Password field and the Confirm field and then click OK If the passwords match the document is saved password protected If the passwords do not match you receive the prompt to enter the password again Passwords must contain a minimum of 5 characters Until you Note have entered 5 characters the OK button remains inactive OOo uses a very strong encryption mechanism which makes it almost impossible to recover the contents of a document in case you lose the password Saving a document automatically You can choose to have OpenOffice org save files for you automatically Automatic saving like manual saving overwrites the last saved state of the file To set up automatic file saving 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General 2 Mark Save AutoRecovery information every and set the time interval Renaming and deleting files You can rename or delete files within the OOo dialogs just as you can in your usual file manager However you cannot copy or paste files within the dialogs 26 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Using the Open and Save As dialogs You can choose whether to use the OpenOffice org Open and Save As dialogs or the ones provided by your operating system To vie
297. naries and add or delete words in a dictionary e On the Font tab of the Paragraph Styles dialog you can set paragraphs to be checked in a specific language different from the rest of the document See Chapter 7 Working with Styles in the Writer Guide for more information Using language tools OOo provides some tools that make your work easier if you mix multiple languages within the same document or write documents in various languages You can set the language for the whole document selected paragraphs or even individual words or characters In versions earlier than OOo 3 0 it was necessary to use styles in order to insert within a document paragraphs or individual groups of characters that use a different language while now this can be conveniently done from the main menu Tip Using character and paragraph styles is still the preferred method as styles allow a greater level of control and make changing the language much faster See Chapter 7 Working with Styles in the Writer Guide for information on how to manage the language settings of a style The main advantage of changing the language is that you can then use the correct dictionaries to check spelling and apply the localized versions of Autocorrect replacement tables thesaurus and hyphenation rules The language tools can be found in Tools gt Languages on the main menu as shown in Figure 66 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 93 Tools Window Help
298. nents Draw Calc Impress Base go to the File menu of the Writer window and select the component you want OOo does not automatically put a shortcut icon on the desktop but you can add one if you wish If you don t know how to add shortcut icons for launching programs please consult the help for your operating system Starting from an existing document You can start OOo by double clicking the filename of an OOo document in a file manager such as Windows Explorer The appropriate component of OOo will start and the document will be loaded Note for Windows users If you have associated Microsoft Office file types with OOo then when you double click on a doc Word file it opens in Writer xls Excel files open in Calc and ppt Powerpoint files open in Impress If you did not associate the file types then when you double click on a Microsoft Word document it opens in Microsoft Word if Word is installed on your computer Excel files open in Excel and Powerpoint files open in Powerpoint You can use another method to open Microsoft Office files in OOo and Save in those formats from OOo See Opening an existing document on page 25 for more information Using the Quickstarter under Windows The Quickstarter is an icon that is placed in the Windows system tray during system startup It indicates that OpenOffice org has been loaded and is ready to use The Quickstarter loads library DLL files required by OOo th
299. ng View gt Toolbar gt Formatting from the menu bar 3 Type the text and press Enter to start a new bulleted line 4 The default list type is a bulleted list The mechanisms to change the appearance of the list are explained on page 198 Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 197 Creating a new outline level 1 If necessary press Enter to begin a new line 2 Press Tab Each time you press Tab the line indents to the next outline level Pressing Enter creates a new line at the same level as the previous one To return to the previous level press Shift Tab In the AutoLayout text boxes promoting or demoting an item in the list corresponds to applying a different outline style so the second outline level corresponds to Outline 2 style the third to Outline 3 style and so on Unlike styles in Writer do not try to change the outline level by selecting the text and then clicking the desired outline style Due to the way the presentation styles work it is not possible to apply them in this way Note Changing the appearance of the list You can fully customize the appearance of a list changing the bullet type or numbering for the entire list or for single entry All of the changes can be made using the Bullets and Numbering dialog which is accessed by selecting Format gt Bullets and Numbering or by clicking on the Bullets and Numbering icon on the text formatting toolbar For the entire list 1
300. ng document and the new template If they are not you will need to use Search and Replace to replace old styles with new ones See Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer for more about replacing styles using Search and Replace Method 1 This method includes any graphics and wording such as legal notices that exists in the new template as well as including styles If you don t want this material you need to delete it Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 75 1 Use File gt New gt Templates and Documents Choose the template you want If the template has unwanted text or graphics in it delete them 2 Open the document you want to change It opens in a new window Press Control A to select everything in the document Paste into the blank document created in step 1 3 Update the table of contents if there is one Save the file Method 2 This method does not include any graphics or text from the new template it simply includes styles from the new template and establishes an association between the template and the document 1 Download the Template Changer extension from http extensions services openoffice org and install it as described on page 73 2 Close and reopen OpenOffice org Now the File gt Templates menu has two new choices Assign Template current document and Assign Template folder 3 Open the document whose template you want to change Choose File gt Templates gt Assign Template current d
301. ng text Cutting and copying text in Writer is similar to cutting and copying text in other applications You can use the mouse or the keyboard for these operations Cut Use Edit gt Cut or Control X or the Cut icon on the toolbar Copy Use Edit gt Copy or Contro C or the Copy icon P it k LZ Paste Use Edit gt Paste or Control V or the Paste icon D i If you simply click on the Paste icon any formatting the text has such as bold or italics is retained To make the pasted text take on the formatting of the surrounding text where it is being pasted click the triangle to the right of the Paste icon and select Unformatted text from the menu Figure 61 eMe Ad amp g OpenOffice org Writer DDE link HTML HyperText Markup Language Formatted text RTF Unformatted text Figure 61 Paste menu Finding and replacing text and formatting Writer has a Find and Replace feature that automates the process of searching for text inside a document In addition to finding and replacing words and phrases you can e Use regular expressions wildcards to fine tune a search see the Help for details e Find and replace specific formatting see the Writer Guide e Find and replace paragraph styles see the Writer Guide To display the Find amp Replace dialog Figure 62 use the keyboard shortcut Control F or select Edit gt Find amp Replace Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 89 Type the
302. nput Line the remainder of the Formula bar You can edit the cell contents of the current cell here or you can do that in the current cell To edit inside the Input Line area click the appropriate part of the Input Line area then type your changes To edit within the current cell just double click the cell Individual cells The main section of the screen displays the individual cells in the form of a grid with each cell being at the intersection of a particular column and row 128 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 At the top of the columns and at the left hand end of the rows are a series of gray boxes containing letters and numbers These are the column and row headers The columns start at A and go on to the right and the rows start at 1 and go on down These column and row headers form the cell references that appear in the Sheet Area box on the Formula Bar Figure 101 These headers can also be turned off by selecting View gt Column amp Row Headers Sheet tabs At the bottom of the grid of cells are the sheet tabs see Figure 96 These tabs enable access to each individual sheet with the visible or active sheet having a white tab Clicking on another sheet tab displays that sheet and its tab turns white You can also select multiple sheet tabs at once by holding down the Control key while you click the names aT j Inactive Sheet Active Sheet Inactive Sheet z j lt Sheet 2 3 Default Figure 96
303. nt See Copying and moving styles on page 65 Creating new custom styles You may want to add some new styles You can do this in two ways e Creating a new style using the Style dialog e Creating a new style from a selection Creating a new style using the Style dialog To create a new Style using the Style dialog right click in the Styles and Formatting window and select New from the pop up menu If you want your new style to be linked with an existing style first select that style and then right click and select New If you link styles then when you change the base style for example by changing the font from Times to Helvetica all the linked styles will change as well Sometimes this is exactly what you want other times you do not want the changes to apply to all the linked styles It pays to plan ahead The dialogs and choices are the same for defining new styles and for modifying existing styles See the chapters on styles in the user guides for details Creating a new style from a selection You can create a new Style by copying an existing style This new style applies only to this document it will not be saved in the template 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window and choose the type of style you want to create 2 In the document select the item you want to save as a style 3 In the Styles and Formatting window click on the New Style from Selection icon 64 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3
304. nt Format pdf 420 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Opening graphic files In addition to OpenDocument formats odg and otg Draw 3 can open the formats used by OOo 1 x sxd and std and the following graphic formats BMP JPEG JPG PCX PSD SGV WMF DXF MET PGM RAS SVM XBM EMF PBM PLT SDA TGA XPM EPS PCD PNG SDD TIF TIFF GIF PCT PPM SGF VOR Opening formula files In addition to OpenDocument Formula odf files Math 3 can open the format used by OOo 1 x sxm StarMath smf and MathML mml files When opening a Word document that contains an embedded equation editor object if the option for it is checked in Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt Microsoft Office the object will be automatically converted to an OpenOffice org Math object File formats OOo can save to Saving in an OpenDocument format guarantees the correct rendering of the file when it is transferred to another person or when the file is re opened with a later version of OpenOffice org It is strongly recommended that you use ODF as default file format However you can save files in other formats if you wish When sharing a document that you do not expect or want the recipient to modify the safest option is to convert the document to PDF OOo provides a very straightforward way to convert documents to PDF Tip Saving text documents In addition to OpenDocument formats odt and ott Writer 3 can save in these formats OpenOf
305. nt window O e 100 Document views Writer has several ways to view a document Print Layout Web Layout and Full Screen To access these and other choices go to the View menu and click on the required view When in Full Screen view press the Esc key to return to either Print or Web Layout view 84 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 When in Web Layout you can use the Zoom slider on the Status bar as described above In Print Layout you can use both the Zoom slider and the View Layout icons on the Status bar g Zoom amp View Layout Px Zoom factor View layout Optimal Automatic Fit width and height Single page O Fit width Columns Variable Lk oe Figure 55 Choosing Zoom and View Layout options You can also choose View gt Zoom from the menu bar to display the Zoom amp View Layout dialog see Figure 55 where you can set the Same options as on the Status bar In Web Layout view most of the choices are not available Moving quickly through a document In addition to the navigation features of the Status bar described above you can use the main Navigator window and the Navigation toolbar as described in Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org In Writer you can also display the Navigation toolbar by clicking on the small Navigation icon near the lower right hand corner of the window below the vertical scroll bar as shown in Figure 56 hal Previous 4 ral Figure 5
306. nteractions what happens when you click a button or link Chapter 9 of the Impress Guide describes these tools Most tasks associated with putting together a show from your slides are best done in Slide Sorter view Choose View gt Slide Sorter from the menu bar or click the Slide Sorter tab at the top of the workspace All of your slides appear in the workspace you may need to scroll to see them all Custom animations are found on the Tasks pane This is an advanced technique and is explained in Chapter 9 Slide Shows in the Impress Guide Your first slide show should probably have the same slide transition for all slides Setting Advance slide to On mouse click is the default and a simple setting If you want each slide to be shown for a specific amount of time click Automatically after and enter the number of seconds Click Apply to all slides Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 201 Slide transition choices are also found on the Tasks pane For more information about slide transitions see Chapter 9 in the Impress Guide The Slide transition section has a very useful choice Automatic preview Select its checkbox Then when you make any changes in a slide transition the new slide is previewed in the Slide Design area including its transition effect Tip Running the slide show To run the slide show do one of the following e Click Slide Show gt Slide Show e Click the Slide Show button on the Presentation toolba
307. nts OOo provides several ways to quickly and easily send documents as an e mail attachment in one of three formats OpenDocument OO0o s default format Microsoft Office formats or PDF To send the current document in OpenDocument format 1 Choose File gt Send gt Document as E mail OpenOffice org opens the e mail program specified in Tools gt Options gt Internet gt E mail The document is attached 2 In your e mail program enter the recipient subject and any text you want to add then send the e mail File gt Send gt E mail as OpenDocument Text or Spreadsheet or Presentation has the same effect If you choose E mail as Microsoft Word Excel or Powerpoint OOo first creates a file in one of those formats and then opens your e mail program with the file attached Similarly if you choose E mail as PDF OOo first creates a PDF using your default PDF settings as when using the Export Directly as PDF toolbar button and then opens your email program with the PDF file attached E mailing a document to several recipients To e mail a document to several recipients you can use the features in your e mail program or you can use OOo s mail merge facilities to extract email addresses from an address book You can use OOo s mail merge to send e mail in two ways e Use the Mail Merge Wizard to create the document and send it See Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge of the Writer Guide for details e Create the
308. numeric value Maximum displays the maximum value in the selection Minimum displays the minimum value in the selection Sum the sum of the values in the selection None Starting new spreadsheets A new spreadsheet can be opened from any component of OOo for example from Writer or Draw From the menu bar Click File and then select New gt Spreadsheet From the toolbar Use the New Document fF button on the Standard toolbar This button is always a page of text from the current component with a black arrow to the right Click the drop down arrow for a choice of what type of document to open text document spreadsheet and so on Click the button itself to create a new document of the type that is currently open if a spreadsheet is open a new spreadsheet document will be created From the keyboard If you already have a spreadsheet open you can press Control N to open a new spreadsheet 130 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 From a template Calc documents can also be created from templates if you have any Spreadsheet templates available Follow the above procedures but instead of selecting Spreadsheet from the File menu select Templates and Documents On the Templates and Documents window navigate to the appropriate folder and double click on the required template A new spreadsheet based on the selected template opens Opening existing spreadsheets An existing spreadsheet can also be opened fr
309. o apply some basic formatting to the text of the notes You can also change the font type size and alignment from the main menu To navigate from one note to the other open the Navigator F3 expand the Notes section and click on the note text to move the cursor to the anchor point of the note in the document Right click on the note to quickly edit or delete it You can also navigate the notes using the keyboard Use Ctrl Alt Page Down to move to the next note and Ctrl Alt Page Up to move to the previous note Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 109 Creating a table of contents Writer s table of contents feature lets you build an automated table of contents from the headings in your document Before you start make sure that the headings are styled consistently For example you can use the Heading 1 style for chapter titles and the Heading 2 and Heading 3 styles for chapter subheadings Although tables of contents can be customized extensively in Writer often the default settings are all you need Creating a quick table of contents is simple 1 When you create your document use the following paragraph styles for different heading levels such as chapter and section headings Heading 1 Heading 2 and Heading 3 These are what will appear in your table of contents You can use more levels of headings but the default setting is to use only the first three levels in the table of contents 2 Place the cursor where you
310. o delete everything in a cell contents and format check Delete all Delete Contents Selection Text Numbers Date amp time Formulas Notes Formats L Objects Figure 115 Delete Contents dialog 150 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Replacing all the data in a cell To remove data and insert new data simply type over the old data The new data will retain the original formatting Changing part of the data in a cell Sometimes it is necessary to change the contents of cell without removing all of the contents for example if the phrase See Dick run is in a cell and it needs to be changed to See Dick run fast It is often useful to do this without deleting the old cell contents first The process is the similar to the one described above but you need to place the cursor inside the cell You can do this in two ways Using the keyboard After selecting the appropriate cell press the F2 key and the cursor is placed at the end of the cell Then use the keyboard arrow keys to move the cursor through the text in the cell Using the mouse Using the mouse either double click on the appropriate cell to select it and place the cursor in it for editing or single click to select the cell and then move the mouse pointer up to the input line and click into it to place the cursor for editing Formatting data The data in Calc can be formatting in several ways It can either be edited as par
311. o or more modules and each module is contained in one library e A module contains zero or more macros and each macro is contained in one module Figure 318 Macro Library hierarchy Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the OpenOffice org Basic Macros dialog see Figure 319 All available library containers are shown in the Macro from list Every document is a library container capable of containing multiple libraries The application itself acts as two library containers one container for macros distributed with OpenOffice org called OpenOffice org Macros and one container for personal macros called My Macros As shown in Figure 319 only two documents are currently open Macro name Macro from Existing macros in Recorded Close easy Macros E OpenOffice org Macros 0117GS GettingStartedWithMacros_ AndrewBase Gl Gl E New Organizer Help Tel Figure 319 Library containers are shown on the left The OpenOffice org Macros are stored with the application runtime code which may not be editable to you unless you are an administrator This is just as well since these macros should not be changed and you should not store your own macros in the OOo container Unless your macros are applicable to a single document and only to a single document your macros will probably be stored in the My 380 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Macros container T
312. o print 112 324 envelopes 116 grayscale on color printer 114 labels 118 previewing 114 print options 113 printer selection 112 324 printing changes document status 34 Professional Template Pack extension 408 Q queries database aliases 297 creating using a Wizard 289 creating using Design View 292 joined fields 258 modifying 292 search conditions 291 Query Wizard database 289 Quickstarter 17 181 Quickstarter enabling 35 R raster graphics 235 rectangle drawing 216 regular expressions 89 relationships database 253 REM 371 remove manual formatting 193 remove personal information on saving 42 renaming files 26 replacement table font 41 Report Builder extension 408 Report Wizard database 300 RGB 209 right to left RTL layout 12 right click context menus 24 rotating an object 226 rulers Draw 205 S Save as web page 357 save AutoRecovery information 48 Save original Basic code 49 save relative URLs 48 Saving files 25 scaling factor user interface 35 Index 431 scanner 341 screen font antialiasing 36 security 26 security options 42 selecting objects 223 selection clipboard 38 selection modes 222 send backward 224 send document as e mail 332 setup options 32 Shadows 230 Shared extension 406 Shortcut keys 410 411 size optimization 49 Slanting an object 227 Slide Design dialog 191 Slide master 188 adding text 193 apply 191 author information 194 creat
313. o produce certain results organize the data or display the data in diagrams Alternatively you can enter data and then use Calc in a What If manner by changing some of the data and observing the results without having to retype the entire spreadsheet or sheet Spreadsheets sheets and cells Calc works with elements called spreadsheets Spreadsheets consist of a number of individual sheets each containing a block of cells arranged in rows and columns These cells hold the individual elements text numbers formulas etc which make up the data to be displayed and manipulated Fach spreadsheet can have many sheets and each sheet can have many individual cells In version 3 0 of OOo each sheet can have a maximum of 65 536 rows and a maximum of 1024 columns Parts of the main Calc window When Calc is started the main window looks similar to Figure 93 Title bar and Menu bar The Title bar at the top shows the name of the current spreadsheet If the spreadsheet is new then its name is Untitled X with X being a number When you save a new spreadsheet for the first time you will be prompted to enter a name Under the Title bar is the Menu bar When you choose one of the menus a submenu appears with other options The Menu bar can be modified as discussed in Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org Toolbars Under the Menu bar by default are three toolbars the Standard toolbar the Formatting toolbar and the F
314. o show all the options for editing the object For example the toolbar shown in Figure 308 appears when you use Fontwork in Writer Figure 308 Formatting toolbar with a Fontwork object selected in Writer Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 349 Note that in this figure the toolbar has been undocked for ease of illustration unless you have chosen to float the toolbar in this way it appears in its default docked position somewhere below the menu bar On the Formatting toolbar you have a large choice of options for customizing your object These choices are the same as the ones for other drawing objects You can read about them in more detail in the Draw Guide Line options Line icon Opens a dialog Figure 309 with three tabs Line Line Styles Arrow Styles Use the Line tab to edit the most common properties of the line around the selected Fontwork object by choosing from previously defined attributes including line style line color and arrow styles Use the Lines Styles and Arrow Styles tabs to edit the properties of line and arrow styles and define new styles Figure 309 Line options dialog Arrow Style icon Choose from the different arrow styles Line Style box Choose from the available line styles Line Width box Set the width of the line Line Color box Select the color of the line 350 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Area options Area icon Opens a dialog Figure 310 with seve
315. o this right click and choose Enter group or double click on the group Combining objects In contrast to grouping functions combinations create a new object Subsequent un combining in the same manner as ungrouping is not possible Select a collection of objects then right click and choose Combine from the pop up menu After you have selected more than one object the Merge Subtract and Intersect functions can be reached in the Modify gt Shapes menu or though the group s right click menu under the heading Shapes Aids for positioning objects Draw has various tools to help you arrange the objects with respect to each other e Moving an object to the front or to the back e Aligning objects with respect to each other 234 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 e Distributing the distance and space between objects See Chapter 5 Combining Multiple Objects in the Draw Guide for more information Editing pictures Draw contains a number of functions for editing raster graphics bitmaps for example photos scanned pictures and so on including import and and export as well as conversion from one format to another Draw can read in all the usual range of graphic file formats However it does not have the same capabilities as the specialized raster graphics programs like Adobe Photoshop or The Gimp See Chapter 6 Editing Pictures in the Draw Guide for details Working with 3D objects Although Draw does no
316. oFormat The Add button is now active 4 Click Add 5 In the Name box of the Add AutoFormat dialog type a meaningful name for the new format 156 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 6 Click OK to save The new format is now available in the Format list in the AutoFormat dialog Formatting spreadsheets using themes Calc comes with a predefined set of formatting themes that you can apply to your spreadsheets It is not possible to add themes to Calc and they cannot be modified However you can modify their styles after you apply them toa spreadsheet To apply a theme to a spreadsheet 1 Click the Choose Themes icon in the Tools toolbar If this toolbar is not visible you can show it using View gt Toolbars gt Tools The Theme Selection dialog appears This dialog lists the available themes for the whole spreadsheet and the Styles and Formatting window lists the custom styles for specific cells Tools x 2 In the Theme Selection dialog select the theme that you want to apply to the spreadsheet As soon as you select a theme some of the properties of the custom styles are applied to the open spreadsheet and are immediately visible 3 Click OK Hiding and showing data When elements are hidden they are neither visible nor printed but can still be selected for copying if you select the elements around them For example if column B is hidden it is copied when you select columns A and C When you ne
317. ocument 4 In the Select Template window find and select the required template and click Open 5 Save the document If you now look in File gt Properties you will see the new template listed at the bottom of the General page Organizing templates OOo can only use templates that are in OOo template folders You can create new OOo template folders and use them to organize your templates and import templates into those folders For example you might have one template folder for report templates and another for letter templates You can also export templates To begin choose File gt Templates gt Organize from the main menu The Template Management dialog opens All the actions made by the Commands button in the Template Note Management dialog can be made as well by right clicking on the templates or the folders 76 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Creating a template folder To create a template folder 1 In the Template Management dialog click any folder 2 Click the Commands button and choose New from the drop down menu A new folder called Untitled appears 3 Type a name for the new folder and then press Enter OOo saves the folder with the name that you entered Deleting a template folder You cannot delete template folders supplied with OOo or installed using the Extension Manager you can only delete template folders that you have created To delete a template folder 1 Inthe Template Manage
318. ocument is saved and then closed e Discard The document is closed and all modifications since the last save are lost e Cancel Nothing happens and you return to the document Caution Not saving your document could result in the loss of recently A made changes or worse still your entire file Closing OpenOffice org To close OOo completely click File gt Exit or close the last open document as described in Closing a document on page 30 If all the documents have been saved OOo closes immediately If any documents have been modified but not saved a warning message appears Follow the procedure in Closing a document to save or discard your changes 30 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 OpenOf ficeorg3 Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org Choosing options to suit the way you work Choosing options for all of OOo This section covers some of the settings that apply to all the components of OpenOffice org For information on settings not discussed here see the online help Click Tools gt Options The list in the left hand box varies depending on which component of OOo is open The illustrations in this chapter Show the list as it appears when a Writer document is open Click the sign to the left of OpenOffice org in the left hand section of the Options OpenOffice org dialog A list of subsections drops down Selecting an item of the subsection causes the right hand side of the dialog to display
319. od of accessing a spreadsheet does not allow you to i change anything in the spreadsheet All modifications must be Caution made in the spreadsheet itself This method only allows you to A view the contents of the spreadsheet run queries and create reports based upon the data already entered into the spreadsheet Registering databases created by O0O02 x and later This is a simple procedure Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Base gt Databases Under Registered databases there is a list of these databases Below this list are three buttons New Delete Edit To register a database created by OOo2 x or later 1 Click New 2 Browse to where the database is located 3 Make sure the registered name is correct 4 Click OK Using data sources in OpenOffice org Having registered the data source whether a spreadsheet text document external database or other accepted data source you can use it in other OpenOffice org components including Writer and Calc Viewing data sources Open a document in Writer or Calc To view the data sources available press F4 or select View gt Data Sources from the pull down menu This brings up a list of registered databases which will include Bibliography and any other database registered To view each database click on the to the left of the database s name This has been done for the Automobile database in Figure 232 Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 279 This brings up T
320. of the dialog changes according to the choice made for the hyperlink type A full description of all the choices and their interactions is beyond the scope of this chapter Here is a summary of the most common choices used in presentations For an Internet type hyperlink choose the type of hyperlink choose between Web FTP or Telnet and enter the required web address URL For a Mail and News type hyperlink specify whether it is a mail or news link the receiver address and for email also the subject For a Document type hyperlink specify the document path the Open File button opens a file browser leave this blank if you want to link to a target in the same presentation Optionally specify the target in the document for example a specific slide Click on the Target icon to open the Navigator where you can select the target or if you know the name of the target you can type it into the box For a New Document type hyperlink specify whether to edit the newly created document immediately or just create it Edit later and the type of document to create text spreadsheet etc For a presentation Edit now is the more likely choice The Select path button opens a directory picker The Further settings section in the bottom right part of the dialog is common to all the hyperlink types although some choices are more relevant to some types of links 356 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 e Set the value of Frame to det
321. of the fuel table food including meals and snacks motel total tolls and miscellaneous Since these purchases are made by one of two bank cards or with cash I want a field to state which payment type was used for each item What fields fit into the food category Breakfast lunch supper and snacks seem to fit Do I list all the snacks individually or list the total cost for snacks for the day I chose to divide snacks into two fields number of snacks and total cost of snacks I also need a payment type for each of these breakfast lunch supper and total cost of snacks What are the fields that are common to more than one area Date appears in all of the areas as does odometer reading and payment type How will I use this information about these three fields While on vacation I want the expenses for each day to be listed together The date fields suggest a relationship between the vacation table and the dates in each of these tables fuel and food This means that the date fields in these tables will be linked as we create the database The type of payment includes two bank cards and cash So we will create a table with a field for the type of payment and use it in list boxes in the forms While we have listed fields we will create in the tables of the database there is one more field that may be needed in a table the field for the primary key In some tables the field for the primary key has already been listed In other t
322. om any component of OOo From the menu bar Click File and then select Open From the toolbar Click the Open button amp on the Standard toolbar From the keyboard Use the key combination Contro O Fach of these options displays the Open dialog where you can locate the spreadsheet that you want to open You can also open a spreadsheet that has been recently worked on using the Recent Documents list This list can be accessed from the File menu directly below Open The list displays the last 10 files that were opened in any of the OOo components Tip Saving spreadsheets Spreadsheets can be saved in three ways From the menu bar Click File and then select Save From the toolbar Click on the Save button W on the Function bar If the file has been saved and no subsequent changes have been made this button is grayed out and unselectable From the keyboard Use the key combination Contro l S Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 131 If the spreadsheet has not been saved previously then each of these actions will open the Save As dialog Here you can specify the spreadsheet name and the location in which to save it If the spreadsheet has been previously saved then saving will overwrite the existing copy without opening the Save As dialog If you want to save the spreadsheet in a different location or with a different name then select File gt Save As Note Navigating within spreadsheets Going to a particula
323. omatically when you reload the file e Time fixed e Time variable updates automatically when you reload the file Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 193 e Author First and last names listed in the OpenOffice org user data e Page number slide number e File name To change the number format 1 2 3 or a b c or i ii iii etc for the page number field choose Format gt Page and then select Tip a format from the list in the Layout Settings area To change the author information go to Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt User Data Adding and formatting text Text in slides is contained in text boxes There are two ways to add text boxes to a slide e Choose a predefined layout from the Layouts section of the Tasks pane These text boxes are called AutoLayout text boxes e Create a text box using the text tool Using text boxes created from the Layout pane In Normal view 1 Click in the text box that reads Click to add text Click to add an outline or a similar notation 2 Type or paste your text in the text box Using text boxes created from the text box tool In Normal View 1 Click on the Text icon T on the Drawing toolbar If the toolbar with the text icon is not visible choose View gt Toolbars gt Drawing 2 Click and drag to draw a box for the text on the slide Do not worry about the vertical size and position the text box will expand if needed as you type 3 Release the mou
324. ommand chosen from this toolbar In both cases the last used command will be stored on the toolbar to make it quicker to call it up again T Line with Arrow Circle Line Ends with Arrow m with Arrow Square s Line gt T o Line ini Line with Arrows Line 45 Line with Square Arrow Line Starts with Arro N ine with Square Arrow e wit Lin Circle Arrow Figure 162 Lines and Arrows toolbar Drawing a rectangle or square Drawing rectangles is similar to drawing straight lines except that you use the Rectangle icon fj from the Drawing Toolbar The imaginary line drawn with the mouse corresponds to the diagonal of the rectangle In addition the outline of the future rectangle changes Shape as you drag the mouse around The outline is shown as a dashed line until you release the mouse button when the rectangle is drawn Starting point Figure 163 Drawing a rectangle Hold down the Shift key to draw a square Hold down the Alt key to draw a rectangle starting from its center To combine the effects hold down both the Shift and A t keys simultaneously 216 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Drawing a circle or ellipse To draw an ellipse also called an oval or a circle use the Ellipse icon from the Drawing Toolbar A circle is simply an ellipse where the two axes are the same length The ellipse drawn is the largest ellipse that would fit inside the imaginary
325. on all operating systems Undo Number of steps 100 Graphics cache Use for OpenOffice org 9 MB Memory per object 2 4 MB Remove from memory after 00 10 hh mm Cache for inserted objects Number of objects 20 OpenOffice org Quickstarter Load OpenOffice org during system start up Figure 14 Choosing Memory options for the OpenOffice org applications View options The choices of View options affect the way the document window looks and behaves In the Options dialog click OpenOffice org gt View On the page displayed Figure 15 set the options to suit your personal preferences Some options are described below User Interface Scaling If the text in the help files or on the menus of the OOo user interface is too small or too large you can change it by specifying a scaling factor Sometimes a change here can have unexpected results Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 35 depending on the screen fonts available on your system However it does not affect the actual font size of the text in your documents User Interface 3D view Scaling oom s Use OpenGL Icon size and style F F Use system font for user interface Object refresh during interaction Screen font antialiasing from E a Pixels Menu Mouse Show icons in menus Mouse positioning Font Lists No automatic positioning Show preview of fonts Middle mouse button Show font history Paste clipboard 8s Figure 15 Choosing View opt
326. ontent related to macros http ooextras sourceforge net examples http sourceforge net project showfiles php group id 43716 examples http homepages paradise net nz hillview OOo numerous excellent macros including reveal codes macros key macros and information on converting from MS Office Published material The following published sources contain macro examples The most obvious example is the documentation from Sun Start from Sun s documentation site http docs sun com app docs and search for StarOffice documentation Andrew Pitonyak wrote a book called OpenOffice org Macros Explained Two chapters are available as direct downloads from the publisher See http www pitonyak org book Dr Mark Alexander Bain wrote Learn OpenOffice org Spreadsheet Macro Programming see http www packtpub com openoffice ooobasic calc automation book 392 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 OpenOf ficeorg3 Chapter 1 4 Customizing OpenOffice org Introduction This chapter describes some common customizations that you may wish to do You can customize menus toolbars and keyboard shortcuts in OpenOffice org add new menus and toolbars and assign macros to events However you cannot customize context right click menus Other customizations are made easy by extensions that you can install from the OpenOffice org website or from other providers Customizations to menus and toolbars can be saved in a
327. open source project and its software is OpenOffice org The OpenOffice org software is a freely available full featured office Suite OOo 3 is a major upgrade of an already feature rich office suite If you have used previous versions of OOo please look over the new features list on the OOo wiki OOo s native file format is OpenDocument an open standard format that is being adopted by governments worldwide as a required file format for publishing and accepting documents OOo can also open and save documents in many other formats including those used by several versions of Microsoft Office OOo includes the following components Writer word processor Writer is a feature rich tool for creating letters books reports newsletters brochures and other documents You can insert graphics and objects from other components into Writer documents Writer can export files to HTML XHTML XML Adobe s Portable Document Format PDF and several versions of Microsoft Word files It also connects to your email client Calc spreadsheet Calc has all of the advanced analysis charting and decision making features expected from a high end spreadsheet It includes over 300 functions for financial statistical and mathematical operations among others The Scenario Manager provides what if analyses Calc generates 2 D and 3 D charts which can be integrated into other OOo documents You can also open and work with Microsoft Excel wo
328. or example Consider a database for a library It will contain a field for the names of the authors and another field for the names of the books There is an obvious relationship between the authors and the books they have written The library may contain more than one book by the same author This is what is known as a one to many relationship one author and more than one book Most if not all the relationships in such a database are one to many relationships Consider an employment database for the same library One of the fields contains the names of the employees while others contain the social security numbers and other personal data The relationship between the names and social security numbers is one to one only one social security number for each name If you are acquainted with mathematical sets a relational database can easily be explained in terms of sets elements subsets unions and intersections The fields of a database are the elements The tables are subsets Relationships are defined in terms of unions and intersections of the subsets tables To explain how to use a database we will create one for automobile expenses In the process we will be explaining how a database work Planning a database The first step in creating a database is to ask yourself many questions Write them down and leave some space between the questions to later write the answers At least some of the answers should seem obvious after you take
329. or platforms and provide access to all functionality and data through open component based APIs and an XML based file format The OpenOffice org project is primarily sponsored by Sun Microsystems which is the primary contributor of code to the Project Our other major corporate contributors include Novell RedHat RedFlag CH2000 IBM and Google Additonally over 450 000 people from nearly every curve of the globe have joined this Project with the idea of creating the best possible office suite that all can use This is the essence of an open source community With its free software licence and active Native Language Confederation OpenOffice org is a key player in the drive to eradicate digital exclusion and preserve minority languages threatened by being Appendix B Background Information 417 on the wrong side of the digital divide For tens of thousands of community members this makes the OpenOffice org community their volunteering opportunity of choice The OpenOffice org community invites contributors Whatever you do best you can do it for OpenOffice org As well as software developers the Community welcomes translators artists technical writers and editors testers people offering user support sales and marketing people lobbyists donors the list is long The Community operates internationally in all time zones linked by the internet How is OpenOffice org licensed OpenOffice org is distributed under the Op
330. orks by recording the commands that are dispatched see The dispatch framework on page 377 Creating a simple macro Imagine repeatedly entering simple information Although you can store the information in the clipboard if you use the clipboard for something else the contents are changed Storing the contents as a macro is a simple solution In some simple cases including the example used here a better solution is to use AutoText 1 Use Tools gt Macros gt Record Macro to start recording a macro A small window is displayed so you know that OpenOffice org is recording 2 Type the desired information or perform an appropriate series of operations In this case I typed my name Andrew Pitonyak 3 Click the Stop Recording button to stop recording save the macro and display the OpenOffice org Basic Macros dialog see Figure 314 4 Be certain to open the library container named My Macros Find the library named Standard under My Macros Be warned every library container has a library named Standard Select the Standard library and click New Module to create a new module to contain the macro Record X 368 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Library Containers Macros Save InspectMetaData Hae Close Save macro in Existing macros in DBInspe gtion Ca My Macros InspectMetaData OpenOffice org Macros AddResultSetToDoc 011765 GettingStartedWithMacros ResultSetToData l Ei
331. ormula bar 126 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Untitled1 OpenOffice org Calc lt ____ Title Bar File Edit wiew Insert Format Tools Data Windorx Help Menu Bar eve RE SIF aShly m k Ha R Standard Toolbar BNU C PWHOBMHEQ D dad aria fo F Bs U FEl ab 2 MW O a A G Jat ia Sa Ne Cl OE CU a S o a S Di o MN Toolbar Column Headers Active Cell Active Cell Indicator Row Headers e e e e e e Figure 93 Parts of the Calc window The icons on these toolbars provide a wide range of common commands and functions The toolbars can be modified as discussed in Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org Placing the mouse pointer over any of the icons displays a small box called a tooltip It gives a brief explanation of the icon s function For a more detailed explanation select Help gt What s This and hover the mouse pointer over the icon Tips and extended tips can now be turned on or off from Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt General In the Formatting toolbar the two rectangular areas on the left are the Font Name and Font Size menus see Figure 94 If there is something in these boxes they show the current setting for the selected area 6 mv Jo v Bs Ule Figure 94 Font name and font size Click the little button with an inverted triangle to the right of
332. ort final settings e Use the suggested name which is the same as the query e Select Static report e Click Finish 302 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Creating a dynamic report We will create a report with some statistics on our fuel consumption To do this we have to modify two queries End Reading and Fuel Economy We will be adding the FuelCost field to the End Reading query Then we will add the FuelCost field from the End Reading query to the Fuel Economy query When opening a query to edit it it might appear as in Figure 263 If you move your cursor over the black line circled in red it becomes a double headed arrow Drag and drop it to a lower position Tip Figure 263 Appearance of query when opened for editing 1 Add the FuelCost field to the End Reading query e Inthe Fuel table list double click to add FuelCost to the bottom table Figure 264 e Save and close the query FuellD Odometer FuelQuantity FuelCost Fuel Fuel Fuel Fuel x x x x gt 0 Figure 264 Adding an additional field to the query 2 Right click the End Reading query and select Edit from the context menu Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 303 3 Add the Fue Cost field from the End Reading query to the Fuel Economy query e Right click the Fuel Economy query and select Edit from the context menu e Double click the Fue Cost field in the End Reading query list to add it to the query table at the bo
333. ot available Tagged PDF Exports special tags into the corresponding PDF tags Some tags that are exported are table of contents hyperlinks and controls This option can increase file sizes Significantly Export bookmarks Exports headings in Writer documents and page names in Impress and Draw documents as bookmarks a table of contents list displayed by some PDF readers including Adobe Reader Export notes Exports notes in Writer and Calc documents as PDF notes You may not want this Create PDF form Submit format Choose the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file This setting overrides the control s URL property that you set in the document There is only one common setting valid for the whole PDF document PDF sends the whole document FDF sends the control contents HTML and XML Most often you will choose the PDF format Export automatically inserted blank pages If selected automatically inserted blank pages are exported to the PDF This is best if you are printing the PDF double sided For example books usually have chapters set to always start on an odd numbered right hand page When the previous chapter ends on Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 327 an odd page OOo inserts a blank page between the two odd pages This option controls whether to export that blank page Initial View page of PDF Options dialog On the Initial View page you can choose how the PDF opens by
334. otes to a document ssssccsssssssssssssrereseerereereerereereeeeeeee 108 Creating a table of contents sccsesesesssreessssereesereeresseseerersesseeeee 110 Creating indexes and bibliographieS ssessrssesesessseressrereseresessee 111 Working WII Cs ag ca canoe erreser EERE EEES 111 VEE TO O eana EEEE EERE 111 Sending a fax using Writer essssesseresseseererserereeeserereessererersesereee 120 Tracking changes to a document ssssssessreereereerererrerererrerrereeees 121 Using mail mOr accessed ese cerca hon areneann sae E EEA 121 Using master OC WING IS fccic di icetetacesenceicsncduwacdurwdienctinerniseecinsaceoeesis 122 Creating fill in OAS ss ceratenty nce enereespvencieaeaccoosacessnieedecauscecdecseuantacen ecs t22 Using TCLS sacoga ag ratentsrcdutiwsueiaereai aeecaecseaiowen teases nei veesaeenteusntacaeess 122 Using es 6 onl ao hs ac 1 0 ots Meee eee ee ee eee nr ee ee ee 123 DSC DOORIA E nE E E ASG 124 Chapter 5 Getting Started with Call ccccccccccsssscccccccccccssssssssceces 125 WENE Oc er E A S N E ee er 126 Spreadsheets sheets and CelIS ccc cece eee eeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeees 126 Parts of the main Calc WINDOW veces sce iceinsidtasasccensiniverontacseetaddduscmandets 126 4 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Starting NEW SPrEadCSheEets ccccceccecccecccesceecccesteeceecssecececeenes 130 Opening existing SpreadSheets cccceccecencenccescces
335. ou can keep typing the first letter until it reappears again e When the selection is correct use the Tab key to go to the Misc field The rest of the fields of the main form are either numerical fields or dropdown lists until we reach the Misc Notes field It is a text field Type anything you desire in this field just as you would any simple text editor Since the Tab key is used to move between fields it can not be used in a text field All spacing must be done by the spacebar Caution Finally the Enter key only acts as a line break to move the A cursor to the next line While the Enter key will move from non text fields to non text fields it will not do so from a text field Use the Tab instead If we did not have a subform for fuel data using the Tab key in Note the last field would save all of the fields clear them and make the form ready to accept data on the second record Since we have a subform form using the Tab key places the cursor in the first Date field of the subform with the date automatically entered to match the Date field of the main form The FuelCost FuelQuantity and Odometer fields are numerical fields The Payment field is a dropdown list Enter the data just as you did in the main form and use the Tab key to go to the next field When you use the Tab key to leave the Payment field it goes to the Date field of the next line and automatically enters the date Now you can enter your second set of
336. ouse button and the screen splits into two views each with its own vertical scroll bar Notice in Figure 106 the Beta and the AO values are in the upper part of the window and other calculations are in the lower part You may scroll the upper and lower parts independently Thus you can make changes to the Beta and AO values and watch their affects on the calculations in the lower half of the window You can also split the window vertically as described below with the Same results being able to scroll both parts of the window independently With both horizontal and vertical splits you have four independent windows to scroll Splitting the screen vertically To split the screen vertically 1 Move the mouse pointer into the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the screen and place it over the small button on the right with the black triangle ne Split screen bar Figure 109 Split bar on horizontal scroll bar 2 Immediately to the right of this button is a thick black line Figure 109 Move the mouse pointer over this line and it turns into a line with two arrows 144 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Hold down the left mouse button and a gray line appears running up the page Drag the mouse to the left and this line follows 4 Release the mouse button and the screen is split into two views each with its own horizontal scroll bar Splitting the screen horizontally and vertically at th
337. own in Figure 308 The contents of this toolbar vary depending on the OOo component with which it is being used Creating a Fontwork object 1 On the Drawing or Fontwork toolbar click the Fontwork Gallery icon If the Drawing toolbar is not visible go to View gt Toolbars gt Drawing to display it 2 In the Fontwork Gallery dialog Figure 304 select a Fontwork style then click OK The Fontwork object will appear in your document Notice the blue squares around the edge indicating that the object is selected and the yellow dot these are discussed in Moving and resizing Fontwork objects on page 353 346 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Figure 304 The Fontwork Gallery 3 Double click the object to edit the Fontwork text Type your own text in place of the black Fontwork text that appears over the object Figure 305 Figure 305 Editing Fontwork text 4 Click anywhere in a free space or press Esc to apply your changes Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 347 Editing a Fontwork object Now that the Fontwork object is created you can edit some of its attributes To do this you can use the Fontwork toolbar the Formatting toolbar or menu options as described in this section Using the Fontwork toolbar Make sure that the Fontwork toolbar shown in Figure 303 is visible If you do not see it go to View gt Toolbars gt Fontwork Click on the different icons to edit Fontwork obje
338. ows x comp ap Ll amp fF b IP p b SF gt gt DDD Ad amp LJ ap co fh a P P Flowchart x 0 0 S s il tel Pirtek jas oudag Xx SAVAD a7 ia Ee T X Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 221 Stars and banners These tools are associated with the Stars icon hg s Stars and Ban X mi d u ES fe i Ea TE go You can add text to all these shapes See Chapter 2 Drawing Basic Shapes and Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide for details Selection modes There are three selection modes moving and changing size rotating and editing points The default mode for selecting objects depends on whether the Points button on the Drawing toolbar is active appears lit Z or not inactive appears dark or dimmed In standard mode when you begin a new drawing the Points button is not active and the default mode is for selections to be moved or changed in size these selections are indicated by small green squares When the Points button is active the default mode is for selections to be edited these selections are indicated by blue squares Some objects will have one or more extra handles which are larger or colored differently This is explained in more detail in the Draw Guide Selections for rotating objects are indicated by small red circles and a symbol representing the center of rotation To choose these selections click on the Effects drop down button from the
339. p 9 Add headings to groups 1 Make sure the cursor in in the upper left corner If it is not click in that corner to move it there 2 Use the Enter key to move the cursor down to the fifth line from the top 3 Change the Apply Styles dropdown list from Default to Heading 2 jk Default 7 Figure 220 Apply Styles list Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 271 4 5 6 7 3 9 10 Use the spacebar to move the cursor to where you want the heading to start Type the heading Meals Use the spacebar to move the cursor to the center of snack area Type the heading Snacks Use the Enter key to move the cursor between the Supper control and the subform Use the spacebar to move the cursor to the center of the subform Type the heading Fuel Data If you know how to use styles you can open the Styles and Formatting window using F11 Right clicking the Heading 2 Note paragraph style allows you to modify the appearance of all three headings See the Writer Guide Chapter 6 Step 10 Change the background of a form The background for a form can be a color or a graphic picture You can use any of the colors in the Color Table at Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Colors If you know how to create custom colors you can use them You can also use a picture graphic file as the background We will use a picture found in OOo sky gif Figure 221 Since the background is dark in places many of the labels and
340. pe G Empty presentation From template O Open existing presentation Preview _ Do not show this wizard again Figure 139 Choosing the type of presentation 1 Select Empty Presentation under Type It creates a presentation from scratch From Template uses a template design already created as the basis for a new presentation The wizard changes to show a list of available templates Choose the template you want Note Open Existing Presentation continues work on a previously created presentation The wizard changes to show a list of existing presentations Choose the presentation you want Both of these options are covered in the Impress Guide 2 Click Next Figure 140 shows the Presentation Wizard step 2 as it appears if you selected Empty Presentation at step 1 If you selected From Template an example slide is shown in the Preview box 182 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Presentation Wizard 2 Select a slide design Presentation Backgrounds lt Original gt Dark Blue with Orange Subte Accents Select an output medium gine Screen Overhead sheet Slide O Paper E Tis it Preview Figure 140 Selecting a slide design 3 Choose a design under Select a slide design The slide design section gives you two main choices Presentation Backgrounds and Presentations Each one has a list of choices for slide designs If you want to use one of these other than
341. penOffice org 3 Figure 328 The Menus page of the Customize dialog Creating a new menu In the Customize dialog click New to display the dialog shown in Figure 329 1 Type a name for your new menu in the Menu name box 2 Use the up and down arrow buttons to move the new menu into the required position on the menu bar 3 Click OK to save The new menu now appears on the list of menus in the Customize dialog It will appear on the menu bar itself after you save your customizations After creating a new menu you need to add some commands to it as described in Adding a command to a menu on page 397 Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 395 New Menu Menu name New Menu 1 Menu position File Edit View Insert Format Table OK Cancel Tools Window Help New Menu 1 Figure 329 Adding a new menu Modifying existing menus To modify an existing menu select it in the Menu list and click the Menu button to drop down a list of modifications Move Rename Delete Not all of these modifications can be applied to all the entries in the Menu list For example Rename and Delete are not available for the supplied menus To move a menu such as File choose Menu gt Move A dialog similar to the one shown in Figure 329 but without the Menu name box opens Use the up and down arrow buttons to move the menu into the required position To move submenus such as File Send selec
342. penOffice org Basic Macros dialog 368 Options Bar Draw 210 orientation of page 80 outline level 198 Outline view Impress 175 OXT extension 73 P page layout different first page 79 landscape page 80 orientation 80 page margins 107 205 parts of the main window 20 password protection 26 password protect PDF 331 pasting unformatted text 196 path options 39 PDF blank page export 327 digital rights management DRM 330 encrypt 330 4 30 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 EPS images 327 export documents to 325 form 327 image compression and resolution 327 initial view selection 328 pages to export 326 password protect 331 security settings 330 tagged 327 user interface settings 328 PDF import 407 PDF Options dialog 326 PDF A 1 327 pictures adding from file 338 linking 338 Pitonyak Andrew 15 pixels 204 positioning objects 234 Powerpoint See Impress 171 preloading OOo under Linux KDE 18 presentation first slide 185 formatting 185 modifying 188 output medium 183 planning 180 running 202 Slide design 183 title slide 185 transition effect 184 transitions 184 presentation styles 190 Presentation Wizard 181 presentations saving 423 primary key 246 primary key database 246 Print dialog 112 324 print file directly 111 324 print options general 38 Printer Options dialog 113 printer settings 48 printing black and white on color printer 114 book preview 115 booklet 115 brochure 115 choosing what t
343. phics PrOGraM cccececeneececeneeeeees 340 Inserting IMAGES USING a SCANMET ccecccsecccscccescccessscccssceesscees 341 Modifying and positioning Graphics ccc ccc ccecceceeceneeeeteeseeeeeens 341 Using the OpenOffice org Gallery cece cc eccecenceeneeeseeeeseeseess 341 Managing the So EI an cacaecensameamnerenbnesscosetcaasusenoeeaeesuenecasaergenasees 343 What is 6 918 0 gl lt eee ere eee eee ere cee eee ree eer oe reer 346 The FPOntWwWOrk gfe elllc cia ene eee ee ee ne enon ne anne tee 346 Creating a FONtwork ODJeECL c cc ccecceccscencencecseccecceceeceesensensesens 346 Editing a FOntwork ODJEC cccceececceccnccecensectensecseceessenceenseenes 348 Moving and resizing Fontwork ObjeCUS ccccecceeeeneeeneeeeeeenees 393 Chapter 12 Creating Web PagesS ecsecccccccccecceccecccccceccecceesoeccecoecseccecceoe 354 UE OG dacia tanta aavanewas E E 355 Inserting Ty DOS serrie iiris rren U E EEE EEE EEEE rE 395 Saving Writer documents as web pages csscsersssessereeserrrrersereees 397 Saving Calc spreadsheets as web PaGESS ccecceecceeeeeeteeeeeeeenes 362 Saving Impress presentations as WED pagesS sccsssrsssessrreessssssse 362 Saving Draw documents as web pages sccscssssesssssssssssessessessse 366 Chapter 13 Getting Started with MacroS sessccscsescssesecceceeceeseceesecseceeoe 367 rT E A E E E AEA E EN 3608 Bs a crs
344. play the Navigator by choosing Edit gt Navigator on the menu bar or pressing Ctr l Shift F5 The Navigator is more useful if you give your slides and objects pictures spreadsheets and so on meaningful names instead of leaving them as the default Slide 1 and Picture 1 shown in Figure 133 174 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Slide 1 lai Slide 2 Om Picture 1 Om Picture 2 Oe Picture 3 Om Picture 4 _ Slide 4 Slide 5 Example Presentation Figure 133 Navigator Working with views This section describes the use of the five views Normal view Normal view is the main view for working with individual slides Use this view to format and design and to add text graphics and animation effects To place a slide in the Slide Design area of the Normal view click the Slide thumbnail in the Slides pane or use the Navigator To select a slide in the Navigator scroll down the list until you find it and then double click it Outline view Outline view Figure 134 contains all the slides of the presentation in their numbered sequence It shows topic titles bulleted lists and numbered lists for each slide in outline format Only the text contained in the default text boxes in each slide is shown so if your slide includes other text boxes or drawing objects the text in these objects is not displayed Slide names are also not included Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress
345. ported to PDF Export bookmarks as named destinations If you have defined Writer bookmarks Impress or Draw slide names or Calc sheet names this option exports them as named destinations to which Web pages and PDF documents can link Convert document references to PDF targets If you have defined links to other documents with OpenDocument extensions such as ODT ODS and ODP this option converts the files names to PDF in the exported PDF document Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 329 General Initial View User Interface Links Security Convert document references to PDF targets _ Export URLs relative to file system Cross document links Default mode Open with PDF reader application Open with Internet browser Figure 289 Links page of PDF Options dialog Export URLs relative to file system If you have defined relative links in a document this option exports those links to the PDF Cross document links Defines the behavior of links clicked in PDF files Security page of PDF Options dialog PDF export includes options to encrypt the PDF so it cannot be opened without a password and apply some digital rights management DRM features Figure 290 Security page of PDF Options dialog 330 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 e With an open password set the PDF can only be opened with the password Once opened there are no restrictions on what the user can do with th
346. preview area on the lower right shows the effect of your positioning choices To format the text of these blocks click the Edit buttons to the right In the drop down list you have two choices Character and Paragraph e In Character you can choose Fonts Sizes Fonts Effects Underlining Color Position Rotating scaling Hyperlink Background and more e In Paragraph you can choose Indents amp Spacing Alignment Text Flow Tabs Drop Caps Borders and Backgrounds 116 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Envelope Envelope Format Printer Addressee Database Table Database field Sender JA5 Joe Smith United States of America k jill ES Figure 85 Choosing addressee and sender information Envelope Format Frinter Addressee Position from left p 24 Lae Format From top 2 24 a Sender Position From left 0 39 ri Format from top 0 39 La Size Format C65 m width 5 94 hae Height 4 49 he Figure 86 Choosing positioning and size of elements 4 In the lower left of this page choose the envelope format from the drop down list The width and height of the selected envelope then show in the boxes below the selected format If you chose a pre existing format just verify these sizes If you chose User defined in the Format list then you can edit the sizes 5 After formatting go to the Printer page Figure 8
347. program window select an area of the image to be copied 2 Move the cursor over the selected area and press Control C to Copy 3 Switch to the OpenOffice org window 4 Click to place the cursor where the graphic is to be inserted 5 Press Control V to paste the image Inserting images using a scanner If a scanner is connected to your computer OOo can call the scanning application and inserted the scanned item into the OOo document page as an image To start this procedure place the cursor where the graphic is to be inserted and select Insert gt Picture gt Scan gt Select Source Although this practice is quick and easy it is unlikely to result in a high quality image of the correct size You may get better results by scanned material into a graphics program and cleaning it up there before inserting the resulting image into OOo Modifying and positioning graphics OpenOffice org provides many tools for resizing modifying filtering and positioning graphics wrapping text around graphics and using graphics as backgrounds and watermarks These tools are described in relevant chapters of the other guides Some sophisticated adjustments of the graphics are best done in an image manipulation program and the results brought into OOo rather than using OOo s inbuilt tools Using the OpenOffice org Gallery The Gallery contains objects graphics and sounds that you can insert into your documents The Gallery is available in
348. pter 4 Getting Started with Writer 97 system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View It is highly recommended that you use paragraph styles rather than manually formatting paragraphs especially for long or Tip standardized documents For information on the advantages of styles and how to use them see Chapter 13 Working with Styles in this book and Chapters 6 and 7 in the Writer Guide tti x bao Default 3 B E GE tS amp al 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B 9 10 11 12 413 44 1 Open Styles and 5 Align Right 10 Numbering On Off Formatting Window 6 Justified 11 Bullets On Off 2 Apply Style 7 Line Spacing 1 12 Decrease Indent 3 Align Left 8 Line Spacing 1 5 13 Increase Indent 4 Centered 9 Line Spacing 2 14 Paragraph format dialog Figure 68 The Formatting toolbar showing icons for paragraph formatting Figure 69 shows examples of the different alignment options Lett aligned text Centre aligned text Faght aligned text Justified text inserts spacing between words to force the text to reach from margin to margin Figure 69 Different text alignment options Formatting characters You can apply many formats to characters using the buttons on the Formatting toolbar Figure 70 shows the Formatting toolbar as a floating toolbar customized to show only the buttons for character formatting It is highly recommended that you use character styles rather Ti
349. py table window opens 4 Change the table name to Pop and click Next 5 Click the gt gt button to move all the Fields from the left window to the right window and click Next 6 Since all the Fields already have the proper File Type formating no changes should be needed However this is the time and place to make these changes if they are needed See Caution below for the reason why Click Create The new table is created Caution A Caution A Once tables have been created using the wizard and data has been entered editing them should be very limited if any editing is done at all Fields can be added or deleted But adding a field requires taking the time to enter the data for that one field for every record having an entry for that field Deleting a field deletes all the data once contained in that field Changing the field type of a field can lead to data being lost either partially or completely When creating a new table it pays to create the fields with the correct names length and format before data is added Tables can be deleted in a very simple way But doing so removes all of the data contained in every field of the table Unless you are sure do not delete a table To delete a table right click it in the list of tables Select Delete from the context menu A popup window asks if you are sure you want to delete the table Once you click Yes the table and its data are gone forever unless you have a backup
350. r Slide Slide Design Slide Show Figure 147 Presentation Toolbar e Press F3 or F9 If the slide transition is Automatic after x seconds let the slide show run by itself i a If the slide transition is On mouse click do one of the following to move from one slide to the next e Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to go to the next slide or to go back to the previous one e Click the mouse to move to the next slide e Press the spacebar on the keyboard to advance to the next slide Right click anywhere on the screen to open a menu from which you can navigate the slides and set other options To exit the slide show at any time including at the end press the Esc key 202 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 OpenOf ficeorg3 Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw Vector drawing in OpenOffice org What is Draw Draw is a vector graphics drawing program It offers a series of powertul tools that enable you to quickly create all sorts of graphics Vector graphics store and display an image as vectors two points and a line rather than a collections of pixels dots on the screen Vector graphics allow for easier storage and scaling of the image Draw is perfectly integrated into the OpenOffice org suite and this makes exchanging graphics with all components of the suite very easy For example if you create an image in Draw reusing it in a Writer document is as simple as copying and pasting You ca
351. r Heading 1 you Heading 10 Heading 2 e Hold down the Control key and Heading 3 double click on a vacant part of Heading 4 the floating window to dock it in kea system s window manager its last position If that does not work try double clicking without using the Control key To undock a window hold down the Control key and double click on a vacant part of the docked window Hanging indent Autom tic Figure 5 Docking a window The Styles and Formatting window can also be docked or Note to the icons at the top of the window undocked by using Control double click on the gray area next Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 23 Customizing toolbars You can customize toolbars in several ways including choosing which icons are visible and locking the position of a docked toolbar You can also add icons and create new toolbars as described in Chapter 14 To access a toolbar s customization options use the down arrow at the end of the toolbar or on its title bar see Figure 6 Toolbar customization icons GQ a mite fh SP Figure 6 Customizing toolbars To show or hide icons defined for the selected toolbar choose Visible Buttons from the drop down menu Visible icons have a checkmark next to them Click on icons to select or deselect them Right click context menus You can quickly access many menu functions by right clicking on a paragraph gr
352. r and Slide View toolbars 2 Adjust the number of slides up to a maximum of 15 3 When you have adjusted the number of slide per row click View gt Toolbars gt Slide View to remove this toolbar from view To move a slide in a presentation in the Slide Sorter 1 Click the slide A thick black border is drawn around it 2 Drag and drop it to the location you want e As you move the slide a black vertical line appears to one side of the slide e Drag the slide until this black vertical line is located where you want the slide to be moved 178 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 To select a group of slides use one of these methods e Use the Control Ctr key Click on the first slide and while pressing Control select the other desired slides e Use the Shift key Click on the first slide and while pressing the Shift key click on the final slide in the group This selects all of the other slides in between the first and the last e Use the mouse cursor Click on the first slide to be selected Hold down the left mouse button Drag the cursor to the last slide thumbnail A dashed outline of a rectangle forms as you drag the cursor through the slide thumbnails and a thick black border is drawn around the selected slides Make sure the rectangle includes all the slides you want to select To move a group of slides 1 Select the group 2 Drag and drop the group to their new location The same vertical black line appear
353. r cell Using the mouse Place the mouse pointer over the cell and click Using a cell reference Click on the little inverted black triangle just to the right of the Name box Figure 101 The existing cell reference will be highlighted Type the cell reference of the cell you want to go to and press Enter Or just click into the Name box backspace over the existing cell reference and type in the cell reference you want Using the Navigator Click on the Navigator button in the Standard toolbar or press F5 to display the Navigator Type the cell Column G reference into the top two fields Row labeled Column and Row and press a E ee Enter In Figure 98 the Navigator E Range names would select cell G28 H Database Ranges F Linked areas GY Graphics lb OLE objects Notes g Drawing objects Figure 98 Calc Navigator 132 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Moving from cell to cell In the spreadsheet one cell or a group of cells normally has a darker black border This black border indicates where the focus is see Figure 99 fs rsz fro ja e 1 A B O B a pmm 7 pe 2Caowanbwne Figure 99 Left One selected cell and right a group of selected cells Using the mouse To move the focus using the mouse simply move the mouse pointer to the cell where the focus should be and click the left mouse button This Changes the focus to the new cell This method is most useful when the two cell
354. r named Images under the folder containing the document the recipient of the file needs to put the images ina subfolder with the same name under the folder containing the document When inserting the same image several times in the document it would appear beneficial to create links however this is not necessary as OOo embeds in the document only one copy of the image file Embedding linked images If you originally linked the images you can easily embed one or more of them later if you wish To do so 1 2 3 4 Open the document in OpenOffice org and choose Edit gt Links The Edit Links dialog Figure 298 shows all the linked files In the Source file list select the files you want to change from linked to embedded Click the Break Link button Save the document Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 339 Figure 298 The Edit Links dialog Going the other way from embedded to linked is not so easy Note you must delete and reinsert each image one at a time selecting the Link option when you do so Inserting images from a graphics program You can use many different graphics programs to edit a graphic file From these programs you can select copy and paste an image or part of a graphic into an OpenOffice org document Figure 299 shows an example of this procedure Figure 299 Inserting an image from a graphics program 340 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 1 In the graphics
355. r suggestions about this document to authors user faq openoffice org Publication date and software version Published 26 October 2008 Based on OpenOffice org 3 0 Oo Authors You can download an editable version of this document from http oooauthors org en authors userguide3 published Contents Chapter 1 Introducing OPeNOPFICE OFG cccssscccccccccccccccccccccccssscccccccccccces 9 What iS OPeNOPfiCe OFG cccccecceccncencenceceecceceeseeesseectesssenceeeseenss 10 The advantages Of OPENOPLICE OFG cccceceeceecescecceceeccecenseesseeseenes 12 MINIMUM LFECUIFEMENUS ccccccesccecceceecncceceeenceeeeeesceeeecnseseeseuueeees 13 How to get the SOW AT 6 rissa carcscassascdmmswasemeansaeednenntawianiesuenansereunenatobin 13 How to install the software seesesssssssrresssserreseserrreeereesereeserersesees 14 How togel NS Use ctepct pee eepace ee ataaenges EEE E EE ET qs 14 Extensions and add 0nsS ssssesssseessssrerrererrerrerererrrrereerereerereerereres 16 Starting OpenOffice Org seessesseressesereesssrrreersereeerssereressereereeseseeses 16 Parts of the main windoOW ssssssssessssseeessssseresseseereseseeeeeeseseeeeseseee 20 Starting a new document essssessesesssseereessroreeseseerersesererereererrereees 24 Opening an existing document ssesesssreesssereersseerersesrereeseereresseeen 20 OS aa ence E 2d ee noct ecnwnas entrances E TE 25 Renaming and deleting fil S
356. r your computer You can change the action of the Print File Directly icon to send the document to the printer defined for the document Note instead of the default printer for the computer Go to Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General and select the Load printer settings with the document option Controlling printing For more control over printing use File gt Print to display the Print dialog On the Print dialog you can choose e Which printer to use if more than one are installed on your system and the properties of the printer for example orientation portrait or landscape which paper tray to use and what paper size to print on The properties available depend on the selected printer consult the printer s documentation for details e What pages to print how many copies to print and in what order to print them Use dashes to specify page ranges and commas or semicolons to separate ranges for example 1 5 11 14 34 40 Selection is the highlighted part of a page or pages e What items to print Click the Options button to display the Printer Options dialog 324 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Printer Mame HP LaserJet SL Ma Status Default printer Ready Type HF LaserJet SL Location LPT1 Comment Print to file Copies Number of copies l Figure 285 The Print dialog Selections on the Printer Options dialog are different in Writer Calc Impress and Draw but in all cases th
357. ral types of arrowheads are available Each end of the line can have a different arrowhead or no arrowhead Arrowheads are only applicable to lines They have no effect on an object s border Customizing line and arrow styles 4 Lond dial Tal You can modify the line and arrow styles and create your own See Chapter 4 Changing Object Attributes in the Draw Guide for details Editing the inside fill of an object The OpenOffice org term for the inside of an object is Area fill The area fill of an object can be a uniform color a gradient a hatching or a pattern from an image It can be made partly or wholly transparent and can throw a shadow Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 229 In most cases you will choose one of the standard fill options which are all available from the Line and Filling toolbar You can also define your own area fills see Chapter 4 of the Draw Guide for details Adding a shado
358. re using Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Options and selecting URL Recognition If you do not want OOo to convert a specific URL to a hyperlink select Edit gt Undo Insert from the menu bar or press Control Z immediately after the formatting has been applied To change the color of hyperlinks go to Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Appearance scroll to Unvisited links Tips and or Visited links pick the new colors and click OK Caution this will change the color for all hyperlinks in all components of OpenOffice org this may not be what you want In Writer and Calc but not Draw or Impress you can also change the Internet link character style or define and apply new styles to selected links You can also insert and modify links using the Hyperlink dialog Figure 312 To display the dialog click the Hyperlink icon amp on the Standard toolbar or select Insert gt Hyperlink from the menu bar To turn existing text into a link highlight it before opening the Hyperlink dialog On the left hand side select one of the four types of hyperlinks e Internet a web address normally starting with http e Mail amp News for example an email address e Document the hyperlink points to another document or to another place in the presentation e New document the hyperlink creates a new document Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 355 Figure 312 Hyperlink dialog showing details for Internet links The top right part
359. rectangle drawn with the mouse Starting point Figure 164 Drawing an ellipse There are three other ways to draw an ellipse or circle e Hold down the Shift key while drawing to force the ellipse to be a circle e Hold down the A t key to draw a symmetrical ellipse or circle from the center instead of dragging corner to corner e Hold down the Control key while drawing to snap the ellipse or circle to grid lines If you first press and hold the Control key and then click on one of the icons Line Rectangle Ellipse or Text an object is Note drawn automatically in the work area the size shape and color are all standard values These attributes can be changed later if desired Drawing curves The tools for drawing curves or polygons are on the toolbar that appears when you click the Curve icon on the Drawing toolbar This toolbar contains eight tools Figure 165 Hovering the mouse over this icon gives a tooltip of Curve If Note you convert the icon to a floating toolbar however the title is Lines as shown in Figure 165 Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 217 Polygon Filled Polygon 45 Filled x i Freeform Line Filled ZA Curve Filled f A Pa g ORE Freeform Line Curve Polygon Polygon 45 Figure 165 Floating Curves toolbar incorrectly titled Lines If you move the mouse cursor over one of the icons a tooltip pops up with a description of the function
360. rg for instructions 120 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Tracking changes to a document You can use several methods to keep track of changes made to a document 1 Make your changes to a copy of the document stored in a different folder or under a different name or both then use Writer to combine the two files and show the differences Click Edit gt Compare Document This technique is particularly useful if you are the only person working on the document as it avoids the increase in file size and complexity caused by the other methods 2 Save versions that are stored as part of the original file However this method can cause problems with documents of non trivial size or complexity especially if you save a lot of versions Avoid this method if you can 3 Use Writer s change marks often called redlines or revision marks to show where you have added or deleted material or changed formatting Later you or another person can review and accept or reject each change Click Edit gt Changes gt Record Details are in the Writer Guide Not all changes are recorded For example changing a tab Tip stop from align left to align right and changes in formulas equations or linked graphics are not recorded Using mail merge Writer provides very useful features to create and print e Multiple copies of a document to send to a list of different recipients form letters e Mailing labels e Envelopes A
361. ries is checked If Insert as reference is checked the library is referenced in its current location but you cannot edit the library If Insert as reference is not checked however the library is copied to the user s macro directory Macros can be stored in libraries inside OpenOffice org documents Select a document rather than a directory on disk as shown in Figure 321 to import libraries contained in a document Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 383 Downloading macros to import Macros are available for download Some macros are contained in documents some as regular files that you must select and import and some as macro text that should be copied and pasted into the Basic IDE use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the OpenOffice org Macros dialog choose the macro to edit and then click Edit to open the macro in the Basic IDE Some macros are available as free downloads on the Internet see Table 3 Table 3 Places to find macro examples Location Description http www ooomacros org Excellent collection of packaged macros http www pitonyak org oo php Reference materials regarding macros http www pitonyak org database Reference materials regarding database macros http development openoffice org Lots of links to everything http www oooforum org Many examples and help How to run a macro A typical method to run a macro is as follows
362. rkbooks and save them in Excel format Calc can export spreadsheets to Adobe s PDF and to HTML 10 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Impress presentations Impress provides all the common multimedia presentation tools such as special effects animation and drawing tools It is integrated with the advanced graphics capabilities of OO0 s Draw and Math components Slideshows can be further enhanced with Fontwork s Special effects text as well as sound and video clips Impress is compatible with Microsoft s PowerPoint file format and can also save your work in numerous graphics formats including Macromedia Flash SWF Draw vector graphics Draw is a vector drawing tool that can produce everything from simple diagrams or flowcharts to 3 D artwork Its Smart Connectors feature allows you to define your own connection points You can use Draw to create drawings for use in any of OOo s other components and you can create your own clipart and add it to the Gallery Draw can import graphics from many common formats and save them in over 20 formats including PNG HTML PDF and Flash Base database Base provides tools for day to day database work within a simple interface It can create and edit forms reports queries tables views and relations so that managing a connected database is much the Same as in other popular database applications Base provides many new features such as the ability to analyze and edit rela
363. rlier then either right click over one of the tabs and select Delete Sheet from the popup menu or click Edit gt Sheet gt Delete from the menu bar Renaming sheets The default name for the a new sheet is SheetxX where Xis a number While this works for a small spreadsheet with only a few Sheets it becomes awkward when there are many sheets To give a sheet a more meaningful name you can e Enter the name in the name box when you create the sheet or e Right click on a sheet tab and select Rename Sheet from the pop up menu and replace the existing name with a better one Sheet names can contain almost any characters with the exception of those characters not allowed in MS Excel This Note restriction has been artificially created for compatibility reasons Attempting to rename a sheet with an invalid name will produce an error message Viewing Calc Using zoom Use the zoom function to change the view to show more or fewer cells in the window For more about zoom see Chapter 1 Introducing OOo Freezing rows and columns Freezing locks a number of rows at the top of a spreadsheet or a number of columns on the left of a spreadsheet or both Then when Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 141 scrolling around within the sheet any frozen columns and rows remain in view Figure 105 shows some frozen rows and columns The heavier horizontal line between rows 3 and 14 and the heavier vertical line between columns C
364. ro recorder frequently fails The primary offender is related to the dispatch framework and its relationship to the macro recorder The dispatch framework The purpose of the dispatch framework is to provide a uniform access to components documents for commands that usually correspond to menu items I can use File gt Save from the menu the shortcut keys Ctrl S or click on the Save toolbar icon All of these commands are translated into the same dispatch command which is sent to the current document Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 377 The dispatch framework can also be used to send commands back to the UI User Interface For example after saving the document the File Save command is disabled As soon as the document has been changed the File Save command is enabled If we see a dispatch command it is text such as uno InsertObject or uno GoToStartOfLine The command is sent to the document s frame and the frame passes on the command until an object is found that can handle the command How the macro recorder uses the dispatch framework The macro recorder records the generated dispatches The recorder is relatively simple to implement and the same commands that are issued are recorded for later use The problem is that not all dispatched commands are complete For example inserting an object generates the following code dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertObject 0 Array
365. rol A Selecting sheets You can select either one or multiple sheets It can be advantageous to select multiple sheets at times when you want to make changes to many sheets at once Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 137 Single sheet Click on the sheet tab for the sheet you want to select The active sheet becomes white see Figure 96 Multiple contiguous sheets To select multiple contiguous sheets 1 Click on the sheet tab for the first sheet 2 Move the mouse pointer over the last sheet tab 3 Hold down the Shift key and click on the sheet tab All the tabs between these two sheets will turn white Any actions that you perform will now affect all highlighted sheets Multiple non contiguous sheets To select multiple non contiguous sheets 1 Click on the sheet tab for the first sheet 2 Move the mouse pointer over the second sheet tab 3 Hold down the Control key and click on the sheet tab 4 Repeat as necessary The selected tabs will turn white Any actions that you perform will now affect all highlighted sheets All sheets Right click over any one of the sheet tabs and select Select All Sheets from the pop up menu Working with columns and rows Inserting columns and rows Columns and rows can be inserted in several different way and quantities Single column or row A single column or row can be added using the Insert menu 1 Select the column or rows where you want the new column or row inserted
366. rol and Alt with Home End Page Down Page Up and the cursor keys move the focus of the current cell in other ways Tip Holding down A t Cursor key resizes a cell Moving from sheet to sheet Fach sheet in a spreadsheet is independent of the others though they can be linked with references from one sheet to another There are three ways to navigate between different sheets in a spreadsheet 134 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Using the keyboard Pressing Control PgDn moves one sheet to the right and pressing Control PgUp moves one sheet to the left Using the mouse Clicking one of the Sheet Tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet selects that sheet If you have a lot of sheets then some of the sheet tabs may be hidden behind the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the screen If this is the case then the four buttons at the left of the sheet tabs can move the tabs into view Figure 101 shows how to do this Move to the first sheet Move left one sheet Move right one sheet Move to the last sheet an Sheet tabs 14 Hoi sheets Sheet Sheet 3 8 il Figure 101 Sheet tab arrows Notice that the sheets here are not numbered in order Sheet numbering is arbitrary you can name a sheet as you wish The sheet tab arrows that appear in Figure 101 only appear if Note you have some sheet tabs that can not be seen Otherwis
367. rom the main form must be the Primary key for its table Date would have to be used Step 5 Arrange controls Note Fach control in a form consists of two parts label and field This step in creating the form determines where a control s label and field are placed in relationship with each other The four choices from left to right are Columnar left Columnar Labels on top As Data Sheet and In Blocks Labels Above Figure 199 Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 259 1 Arrangement of the main form Click Columnar Labels on top The labels will be placed above their field 2 Arrangement of the subform Click As Data Sheet The labels are column headings and the field entries are in spreadsheet format Click Next Figure 199 Control arrangements Step 6 Set data entry Unless you have a need for any of these entries to be checked accept the default settings Click Next Step 7 Apply styles 1 Select the color you want in the Apply Styles list I chose the beige which is Orange 4 in the Color table 2 Select the Field border you want I prefer the 3 D look You might want to experiment with the different possible settings 3 Click Next Step 8 Set name 1 Enter the name for the form In this case it is Fuel 2 Click the circle in front of Modify the form This circle is called a radio button 3 Click Next The form opens in Edit mode 260 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3
368. ry list then select Send Default Fax in the Commands list Click Add Now you can see the new icon in the Commands list 4 In the Commands list click the up or down arrow button to position the new icon where you want it Click OK and then click Close Your toolbar now has a new icon to send the current document as a fax Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 401 Figure 334 Adding a Send Fax command to a toolbar Assigning shortcut keys In addition to using the built in keyboard shortcuts listed in Appendix A you can define your own You can assign shortcuts to standard OOo functions or your own macros and save them for use with the entire OpenOffice org suite Be careful when reassigning your operating system s or OO0o s predefined shortcut keys Many key assignments are universally f understood shortcuts such as F1 for Help and are always Caution expected to provide certain results Although you can easily A reset the shortcut key assignments to the OOo defaults changing some common shortcut keys can cause confusion frustration and possible data loss or corruption especially if other users share your computer To adapt shortcut keys to your needs use the Customize dialog as described below 1 Select Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard The Customize dialog opens 2 To have the shortcut key assignment available in all components of OpenOffice org select the OpenOffice org button 3 Next select the requir
369. s Once they are filled the cells 5 have no further connection with one T another Figure 112 Result of fill series selection shown in Figure 111 Defining a fill series To define a fill series go to Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Calc gt Sort Lists This dialog shows the previously defined series in the Lists box on the left and the contents of the highlighted list in the Entries box 148 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Lists Entries Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun A Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesd Mon Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug 5 Tue January February March April May Thu Sat Figure 113 Predefined fill series Click New The Entries box is cleared Type the series for the new list in the Entries box one entry per line and then click Add Entries Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat ACT A NSW Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesd Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug 5 NT January February March April May QLD D SA TAS VIC WA Figure 114 Defining a new fill series Using selection lists Selection lists are available only for text and are limited to using only text that has already been entered in the same column November December To use a selection list select a blank cell and press Ctrl D A drop down list appears of any cell in the same column that either has at least one text character or whose format is defined as Text Click
370. s circles ellipses and arcs 3D objects curves lines and arrows text and connectors When you draw a basic shape or select one for editing the Info field in the status bar changes to reflect the action taken Line created Text frame xxyy selected and so on Figure 160 shows part of the Drawing toolbar with the icons needed in the following sections The Text icon is also included Al gt T her Figure 160 Part of the Drawing toolbar Drawing a straight line Let s start by drawing the simplest of shapes a straight line Click on the Line icon on the Drawing Toolbar and place the mouse pointer where you want to start the line Drag the mouse while keeping the button pressed Release the mouse button when you want to end the line A blue or green selection handle appears at each end of the line Showing that this is the currently selected object The colors depend on 214 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 the selection mode green for simple selection and blue when in point edit mode This effect is easily apparent if on the Options toolbar both Simple Handles and Large Handles are switched on Starting Point Figure 161 Drawing a straight line Hold down the Shift key while drawing the line to restrict the angle of the line to a multiple of 45 degrees 0 45 90 135 and so on Hold down the Control key Ctrl in PCs to snap the end of the line to the nearest grid point The effect of
371. s 695 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Deleting styles seeoosereesessereessserresssserrerrerereerrererererereerrererrereesesss 68 Using a template to create a COCUMENL cc ccce ccc eccenceenceenceenees 638 Creating a template escosreeesssseeesseseerersseeeeesssssssssssssssessessseseseseeee 69 Editing a template sesseseeeesereesssseressererresseserressseeeeesereerersseeereesern T2 Adding templates using the Extension Managet ceceeeeeees 73 Setting a default template ccc ccc eccecccencecneeeneeesseessessseesness 74 Associating a document with a different template 08 75 Organizing templatesS ooseseeeeserreessrereesssserersssrreresseeecesseererrerereeee 76 Examples of style Us a ne oo a en ene ere eer cee 79 Chapter 4 Getting Started With Writer cseccseecceccscceseccsecsecoseecosesoeesoeoo 81 oa US erect E A E E OE EE E EE E E 82 The Writer interface esesssesessseressserersseresssoressseresesecessseressseeeees 82 Working with documents ssssesessereeseessesessesessssesssessssesesseeeseeseeeee 86 Working with teXt seescsseeesseseesssesrerreeserereeseseeresssseeresssereressereereeee 87 POr A S EE EA E E E E E SERN 97 Undoing and redoing Changes cccecccecccnceenceenceenseeseeesseeseens 102 Formatting pagesS sssssssssssssesercorecererersssssssserereereceeresecereeeresesereees 103 Adding n
372. s The spacing between the lines is defined in the Grid options dialog under the Drawing area of the OOo options Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt Grid In the dialog shown in Figure 158 you can set the following parameters e Vertical and horizontal spacing of the dots in the grid You can also change the unit of measurement used in the general Draw options Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt General e The resolution is the size of the squares or rectangles in the grid If the resolution is Horizontal 1cm Vertical 2cm the grid consists of rectangles 2cm high and 1cm wide e Subdivisions are additional points that appear along the sides of each rectangle or square in the grid Objects snap to subdivisions as well as to the corners of the grid e The pixel pix element size of the snap area defines how close you need to bring an object to a snap point or line before it will Snap to it 212 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Grid Snap to grid Resolution Horizontal 0 50cm _ Vertical 0 50cm L Synchronize axes Snap L_ To snap lines To the page margins LJ To object frame C To object points Snap range 5 Pixels AS Subdivision Horizontal 10 point s Vertical 10 point s Snap position C When creating or moving objects Extend edges L When rotating 15 00 degrees Point reduction 15 00 degrees A Figure 158 Setting grid options Color scheme Scheme OpenOf
373. s a menu from which you can select ote dBase Figure 231 f Connect to an existing database Database type Database Figure 231 Database type selection 3 Click Browse and select the folder containing the database Click Next 4 Accept the default settings Register the database for me and Open the database for editing Click Finish Name and save the database in the location of your choice 5 Create the Form using the Form Wizard as explained in Creating a database form beginning on page 256 Accessing a Mozilla address book Accessing a Mozilla Address Book is very similar to accessing a dBase database 1 Select File gt New gt Database 2 Select Connect to an existing database Select Mozilla Address Book as the database type Figure 231 3 Register this data source These are steps 1 2 and 4 of Accessing a dBase database Accessing spreadsheets Accessing a spreadsheet is also very similar to accessing a dBase database 1 Select File gt New gt Database 278 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 2 Select Connect to an existing database Select Spreadsheet as the Database type Figure 231 3 Click Browse to locate the spreadsheet you want to access If the Spreadsheet is password protected check the Password required box Click Next 4 If the spreadsheet requires a user s name enter it If a password is also required check its box Click Next This meth
374. s and Next icons to move from one item to the next This is particularly helpful for finding items like bookmarks and indexes which can be difficult to see The names of the icons shown in the tooltips change to match the selected category for example Next Graphic or Next Bookmark g Navigation ts Figure 9 Navigation toolbar e To jump to a specific page in the document type its page number in the box at the top of the Navigator A bit of experimentation with the other icons will demonstrate their functions Some component specific uses are described in the chapters on Writer and the other components Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 29 Closing a document To close a document click File gt Close You can also close a document by clicking on the Close icon on the document window This button looks like the red X shown in Figure 10 If more than one OOo window is open each window looks like the sample shown on the left in Figure 10 Closing this window leaves the other OOo windows open If only one OOo window is open it looks like the sample shown on the right in Figure 10 Notice the small black X below the large red X Clicking the small X closes the document but leaves OOo open Clicking the large red X closes OOo completely Figure 10 Close icons If the document has not been saved since the last change a message box is displayed Choose whether to save or discard your changes e Save The d
375. s are a large distance apart Using the Tab and Enter keys e Pressing Enter or Shift Enter moves the focus down or up respectively e Pressing Tab or Shift Tab moves the focus right or left respectively Customizing the Enter key You can customize the direction in which the Enter key moves the focus by selecting Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Calc gt General Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 133 Input settings Press Enter to move selection C Press Enter to switch to edit mode E Expand formatting Expand references when new columns rows are inserted Highlight selection in colurmn row headers Figure 100 Customizing the effect of the Enter key The four choices for the direction of the Enter key are shown on the right side of Figure 100 Depending on the file being used or on the type of data being entered different directions can be useful The Enter key can also be used to switch into and out of editing mode Use the options under Input settings in Figure 100 to change the Enter key settings Using the arrow keys Pressing the arrow keys on the keyboard moves the focus in the direction of the arrows Using Home End Page Up and Page Down e Home moves the focus to the start of a row e End moves the focus to the column furthest to the right that contains data e Page Down moves the display down one complete screen and Page Up moves the display up one complete screen e Combinations of Cont
376. s chapter For more detailed information about the use of databases see the Database Guide OOo Base uses the HSQL database engine All of the files Note created by this engine are kept in one zipped file The database forms are included in this zipped file A database consists of a number of fields that contain the individual pieces of data Each table of the database is a group of fields When creating a table you also determine the characteristics of each field in the table Forms are for data entry into the fields of one or more tables associated with the form They can also be used for viewing fields from one or more tables associated with the form A query creates a new table from the existing tables based upon how you create the query A report organizes the information of the fields of a query in a document according to your requirements The database in OOo requires Java Runtime Environment JRE If you do not have it on your computer you can download it Caution from www java com and install it following the instructions on the site It should be Java 5 0 or higher In OOo use Tools gt A Options gt OpenOffice org gt Java to register Java Windows version of JRE can not be used while there are other versions that can 238 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Base creates relational databases This makes it fairly easy to create a database in which the fields of the database have relationships with each other F
377. s pane Fach method opens the Insert Table dialog shown in Figure 146 Alternatively clicking on the black arrow next to the Table button displays a graphic that you can drag and select the number of rows and columns for your table Insert Table Number of columns Number of rows Help Figure 146 Creating a table with the Insert Table dialog Selecting from any of the styles in the Table Design section of the Tasks pane creates a table based on that style If you create a table by another method you can still apply a style of your choice later Note With the table selected the Table toolbar should appear If it does not you can access it by selecting View gt Toolbars gt Table The Table toolbar offers many of the same buttons as the table toolbar in Writer with the exception of functions like Sort and Sum for performing calculations For those functions you need to use a spreadsheet inserted from Calc discussed below Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 199 After the table is created you can modify it in much the same ways as you would modify a table in Writer adding and deleting rows and columns adjusting width and spacing adding borders background colors and so on Detailed information on working with tables and the Table Properties dialog can be found in Chapter 9 of the Writer Guide By modifying the style of the table from the Table Design section of the Tasks pane you can quickly chan
378. s tab page in the Customize dialog Category Commands Application z About OOo dev Add View AutoPilot Address Data Source Templates AutoPilot Presentation Edit Bibliography Database Options Create HTML Document BASIC Create Master Document Help Insert Edit Macros Documents Exit Format Extended Tips Controls a Help Navigate Help Agent Table Help on Help Drawing amp Load URL z Graphic v 4 n Description Displays general program information such as version number and copyrights Figure 330 Adding a command to a menu Modifying menu entries In addition to changing the sequence of entries on a menu or submenu you can add submenus rename or delete the entries and add group Separators To begin select the menu or submenu in the Menu list near the top of the Customize page then select the entry in the Entries list under Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 397 Menu Content Click the Modify button and choose the required action from the drop down list of actions Most of the actions should be self explanatory Begin a group adds a separator line after the highlighted entry Customizing toolbars You can customize toolbars in several ways including choosing which icons are visible and locking the position of a docked toolbar as described in Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org This section describes how to create new toolbars and add other icons commands to the list of those available on a toolbar
379. s to show you where the group of slides will go Selection of a group of slides works in a rectangular fashion Note Slides that do not fall within a rectangular area cannot be grouped You can work with slides in the Slide Sorter view just as you can in the Slide pane To make changes right click a slide and do any of the following using the pop up menu e Add a new slide after the selected slide e Delete the selected slide e Change the slide layout e Change the slide transition For one slide click the slide to select it Then add the desired transition e For more than one slide select the group of slides and add the desired transition e Mark a slide as hidden Hidden slides are not shown in the slide show e Copy or cut and paste a slide Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 179 Handout view Handout view is for setting up the layout of your slide for a printed handout Click the Handout tab in the workspace then choose Layouts in the Tasks pane Layout contains five choices 1 2 3 4 6 or 9 slides per page Figure 138 it Figure 138 Handout layouts pool ian OU L Ll L OOO To print a handout 1 Select the slides using the Slide Sorter Use the steps listed in selecting a group of slides on page 179 2 Select File gt Print or press Control P to open the Print dialog 3 Select Options in the bottom left corner of the Print dialog 4 Check Handouts in the Contents section and
380. save files as HTML documents As for Writer use File gt Save As and select HTML Document or File gt Wizards gt Web Page If the file contains more than one sheet the additional sheets will follow one another in the HTML file Links to each sheet will be placed at the top of the document Calc also allows the insertion of links directly into the spreadsheet using the Hyperlink dialog Saving Impress presentations as web pages You can export presentations as Macromedia Flash files select File gt Export and choose Macromedia Flash for the file type You can also convert presentations into a series of web pages as described below Saving as web pages HTML format does not retain animation Note and slide transitions 362 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 1 To begin select File gt Export and choose HTML Document as the file type 2 Create a folder for the files supply a name for the resulting HTML file and click Save The HTML Export Wizard opens Depending on the size of your presentation and the number of graphics it contains the HTML export function creates many N HTML JPG and GIF files If you simply save to your desktop ote not in a specific folder these separate HTML and graphics files will be all over your desktop So be sure to create a folder to hold all the files 3 Choose the design for all of the pages either from an existing design or by creating a new one If you have not previously sav
381. scessessseeseeeseees 131 SAVING SPFEAQCSNEEUS cccescscescccceccecceccecencecsseeseeesseessecsseeseeeseeess 131 Navigating within spreadSheets cccc ccc cceccecenceneenseceeceeceecseees 132 Selecting items in a sheet or spreadSheet cece ccc eec eee eeeeeeeees 135 Working with columns and rOWS sscsessesesssseesererrerereererrerereereree 138 Working with sheets eccssssesesserecsessecerssseereessssereesseeereseseeeeesseeees 140 Viewing CalC ssssesessesssseeesrercesssrerceseseeresseserceererereereeeereeeeeeeeereeeee 141 Entering data using the keyboard ssessssssssssrreesssrreesssseresesesseses 145 Speeding up data entry seseesereesesreressssreresssrereessrorreessrerereerereeee 146 E SOA nre EEEE A E EAEE E 150 POTTI T ic ce cect EEEE E 151 Autoformatting cells and SHEEetS ccc ccc ccc ece cece ees eneensensecseseeees 156 Formatting spreadsheets using themes cccccceeeeeeeneeeeeeneees 157 Hiding and showing Cata cc cc cecc eee ecenceneeeneeeneeenseenseeseeeseeeeeens 157 OPC i 1 Sige shee stan E con deadauassacnsenue nested E a 160 BO DG scaccnc steer E E E EE E E EES 161 Chapter 6 Getting Started with IMPeb ccccssssssssccccccssccccccccccccsscecs 170 Wnatis TSS occrec ese sensenasencensaacsesveceneiesieseecncaucaecseonesececuenseetesou 171 Parts of the main Impress WINCOW ccccceccecceceeceeeeceeeseeeneeees 171 VT ae ac
382. scientific names of species mentioned in the text and a separate index containing only the common names of species Before creating some types of indexes you first need to create index entries embedded in your Writer document Working with graphics Graphics in Writer are of three basic types Image files including photos drawings scanned images and others e Diagrams created using OOo s drawing tools e Charts created using OOo s Chart facility See Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork Printing from Writer Writer provides a range of choices when printing Quick printing Click the Print File Directly icon to send the entire document to the default printer defined for your computer You can change the action of the Print File Directly icon to send the document to the printer defined for the document Note instead of the default printer for the computer Go to Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General and select the Load printer settings with the document option Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 111 Controlling printing For more control over printing use File gt Print to display the Print dialog Figure 81 On the Print dialog you can choose e Which printer to use if more than one are installed on your system and the properties of the printer for example orientation portrait or landscape which paper tray to use and What paper size to print on The properties available
383. se button when finished The cursor appears in the text box which is now in edit mode gray hashed border with green resizing handles shown in Figure 145 4 Type or paste your text in the text box 5 Click outside the text box to deselect it 194 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Ow B Al Click and drag to draw a box for the text on ethe slide Do not worry about the vertical size Zand position the text box will expandif needed as you type To change the horizontal size see Resizing a text box to reposition the Moving a text box p E ot E O a i fu Ga T ch Boa T za fo fo oF H 7 8 re a sg a5 LF ai a eh resizing handles SSNS text box to a different part of the slide see es A pa Fs ial g BY A a an 4 E ar i Type or paste your text in the text box SSIES ERE hee NE Click outside the text box to de select it OEM lL Text 7 x TEG J a ww Figure 145 Selected text box showing the green resizing handles and text toolbar You can move resize and delete text boxes For more information see Chapter 3 in the Impress Guide In addition to the normal text boxes where text is horizontally aligned it is possible to insert text boxes where the text is aligned vertically This choice is available only when Asian languages are enabled in Tools gt Options gt Language Note Settings gt Languages Click on the 4 button in the drawing
384. set of changes such as color or rotation to the duplicates The result of a duplication is anew group To start duplication click on an object or group and choose Edit gt Duplicate The dialog shown in Figure 173 appears The options chosen in Figure 173 applied to a blue rectangle produce the following result Figure 173 Duplicating an object 232 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Cross fading Cross fading transforms a shape from one form to another with OpenOffice org handling all of the intermediate transitions The result is anew group of objects including the two end points and the intermediate steps To carry out a cross fade select both objects hold the Shift key while selecting each object in turn and then choose Edit gt Cross fading The following dialog appears gq Cross fading Px Settings D Increments g Cross fade attributes Cancel Same orientation On the dialog choose the number of increments transition steps You probably want to have Cross fade attributes and Same orientation both checked The end result is shown in Figure 174 Figure 174 Cross fading example Combining multiple objects Using Draw you can combine drawing objects together in two distinct ways grouping and combining These two methods allow you to treat multiple objects as one unit or to merge objects to form a new shape Grouping is like putting objects in a container You can move them as a group
385. several tables to create with the same fields design Note one table and produce the other tables by cutting and pasting acer See Creating a table by copying an existing table on page 247 Adding data to the list table List tables do not require a form Instead add their data directly to the table In this example use the names of the two people with a bank card and Cash for cash purchases 1 In the main database window click on the Tables icon Figure 176 Right click on Payment Type and select Open from the context menu a Enter Dan in the first row Use the tab key to move to the second row b Enter Kevin in the second row c Enter Cash in the third row 2 Save and close the table window The Enter key can also be used to move from field entry to field entry For this example enter Jan in the first Name field Enter Tip moves the cursor to the JD field Enter then moves the cursor to the second Name field The Down Arrow key can also be used to move from row to row The PaymentID field contains lt AutoField gt until you use the Enter key to move to the second row Then it becomes a 0 As Note you add the entries to each row the rows of the PaymentlID field change to consecutive whole numbers For example the first three numbers in this field are 0 1 2 Creating a View A View is a query Because of this the details of how to create and use a View are in the Creating queries section 292 Getting
386. shows a different address but they can also be used for making multiple copies of one label only for example return address stickers To print labels 1 Choose File gt New gt Labels on the menu bar The Labels dialog opens 2 On the Labels page fill in your own label text in the Inscription box or use the Database and Table drop down lists to choose the 118 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 required information as described in Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge in the Writer Guide et Labels Format Options Inscription Label text _ Address Database Table Database Field fede rm Format Continuous Brand avery a4 Sheet Type User m User 3 94 x 3 94 1 x 1 Figure 88 Labels dialog Labels page 3 select the label stock in the Brand drop down list The types for that brand then appear in the Type drop down list Select the size and type of labels required You can also select User in the Type drop down list and then make specific selections on the Format page 4 On the Format page Figure 89 choose the pitch sizes margins columns and rows for user defined labels or just verify with a brand of label stock you have loaded into the printer i es Labels Format Options Baia Avery At User Horizontal pitch 3 94 Ea wertical pitch 3 94 rs width 3 94 re Height 3 94 an Left margin 0 00 E Top margin 0 00 Ea Rows Columns 1 a pams 1 Col
387. sition For more information see the Draw Guide Figure 311 Position and Size dialog Moving and resizing Fontwork objects When you select a Fontwork object eight blue squares known as handles appear around the edge of the object as shown below You can drag these handles to resize the object A yellow dot also appears on the object This o dot may be along an edge of the object or it may be somewhere else see figure to right for an example If you hover the pointer over this yellow dot the pointer turns into a hand symbol You can drag the dot in different directions to distort the object Hovering the pointer over other parts of the object turns the pointer into the usual symbol for dragging the object to another part of the page For precise control of the location and size of the object use the Position and Size dialog Figure 311 Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 353 OpenOf Ticeorg3 Chapter 1 2 Creating Web Pages Saving documents as HTML files Introduction This chapter describes how to save documents as web pages from Writer Calc Draw and Impress Cross references do not become hyperlinks in an HTML Note document Inserting hyperlinks When you type text such as a website addresses or URL that can be used as a hyperlink OOo formats it automatically creating the hyperlink and applying to the text a color and underlining If this does not happen you can enable this featu
388. sx Main layout Layout details Style o Web site information Preview Remove Export ta File Format HTML s Document information Title Creating Web Pages SUMMary Fields to edit Chapter Title Description tab gt Title Chanter Sobrikle leer MeFined Author Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages IDI 3 Chose a layout for the web site by clicking on the layout boxes Click Next Web Wizard Steps Choose a layout for the table of contents of your web site Introduction Layouts Documents Main layout Layout details Style Web site information Preview 4 Chose the information to be listed and the screen resolution Click Next Web Wizard Steps Customize the selected layout Introduction Include the Following information For each document in the table of contents Documents l File name File Format Main layout Description File Format icon Author Number of pages Creation date Size in KB Last change date Web site information Optimize the layout For screen resolution o Preview 640x480 800x600 1024x768 360 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 5 Select a style for the page Use the drop down list to choose different styles and color combinations You can browse to a background image and icon set from the Gallery Click Next Web Wizard Steps Select a style for the table of contents page 1 Introduct
389. system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View Standard toolbar The Standard toolbar looks like this GS SAn It is the same for all parts of OpenOffice org RAEC os CCRLE Line and Filling toolbar The Line and Filling toolbar lets you modify the main properties of a drawing object See page 227 for details als ih E l z o o0 Black Ea A Color s E Blue 7 O k If the selected object is text the toolbar changes to the one shown below which is similar to the Formatting toolbar in Writer Arial v 16 wt B 7 U A i lf T amp Z wl A Drawing toolbar The Drawing toolbar is the most important toolbar in Draw It contains all the necessary functions for drawing various geometric and freehand Shapes and organizing them on the page PRIS gt m eT 7 O O O B O k K Al E Color Bar To display the Color Bar use View gt Toolbars gt Color Bar The toolbar then appears at the bottom of the workspace lt BHEEEBEEES EO EN EERE RRR ACC ee ieee ete m E HES This toolbar lets you rapidly choose the color of the objects in your drawing The first box in the panel corresponds to transparency no color You can access several specialized color palettes in Draw as well as change individual colors to your own taste This is done usin
390. t Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 4 Security options Use the OpenOffice org Security page Figure 21 to choose security options for saving documents and for opening documents that contain macros Security options and warnings Adjust security related options and define warnings for hidden information in documents i Passwords for web connections L Persistently save passwords protected by a mi ster password Passwords are protected by a master password You will be asked to enter it once per session if OpenOffice org retrieves a password from the protected password list Macro security Adjust the security level for executing macros and specify trusted macro developers File sharing options for this document L Open this document in read only mode Figure 21 Choosing security options for opening and saving documents Security options and warnings If you record changes save multiple versions or include hidden information or notes in your documents and you do not want some of the recipients to see that information you can set warnings to remind you to remove this information or you can have OOo remove some information automatically Note that unless removed much of this information is retained in a file whether the file is in OpenOffice org s default OpenDocument format or has been saved to other formats including PDF Click the Options button to open a separate dialog with specific choices
391. t The most basic ability is to drop and drag the contents of one cell to another with a mouse However Calc also includes several other tools for automating input especially of repetitive material They include the 146 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Fill tool selection lists and the ability to input information into multiple sheets of the same document Using the Fill tool on cells At its simplest the Fill tool is a way to duplicate existing content Start by selecting the cell to copy then drag the mouse in any direction or hold down the Shift key and click in the last cell you want to fill and then choose Edit gt Fill and the direction in which you want to copy Up Down Left or Right Choices that are not available are grayed out but you can still Caution choose the opposite direction from what you intend which A could cause you to overwrite cells accidentally unless you are careful A shortcut way to fill cells is to grab the handle in the lower Tip right hand corner of the cell and drag it in the direction you want to fill A Ciriginal 1 2 Original 3 Original A4 Original 5 Original 6 Original 7 Original Original Figure 110 Using the Fill tool You can also use the fill tool selecting some existing series of data that you want to extend If the interval between the values in the selected cells is constant Calc will try to guess and fill the selection wit
392. t Change icon On the Change Icon dialog you can scroll through the available icons select one and click OK to assign it to the command Change Icon Icons SHO h H it Y ws EN Bak 7 42 ED EEN Sar trHHovrwht hk amp m E e E ESHDA P Lv M Eg VG Bow wy Vee amp Note The size of an icon should be 16x16 pixel to achieve best quality Different sized icons will be scaled automatically Figure 332 Change Icon dialog To use a custom icon create it in a graphics program and import it into OOo by clicking the Import button on the Change Icon dialog Custom icons must be 16 x 16 or 26 x 26 pixels in size and cannot contain more than 256 colors 400 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Example Adding a Fax icon to a toolbar You can customize OpenOffice org so that a single click on an icon automatically sends the current document as a fax 1 Be sure the fax driver is installed Consult the documentation for your fax modem for more information e Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Print The dialog shown in Figure 333 opens a Figure 333 Setting up OOo for sending faxes e Select the fax driver from the Fax list and click OK 2 Click the arrow icon at the end of the Standard toolbar In the drop down menu choose Customize Toolbar The Toolbars page of the Customize dialog appears Figure 331 Click Add 3 On the Add Commands dialog Figure 334 select Documents in the Catego
393. t ixtMiscNotes EM MiscPavment Figure 229 Tab Order window e Find the txtMPayment listing near the bottom of the list and Click it e Click the Move Up button until txtPayment is just below fmtMotel e Use the same two steps to put the fields in the same order as in Figure 230 Click OK Move Down Cancel iy RY Help Controls Move Up imtOdometer fmtMotel txtMPayment ALENT Boi fmtTalls fmtMiscellaneous Automatic Sort MiscPayment fmtBreakfast txtBPayment fmtLunch txtLPayment fmiSupper txtSPayment fmtsnackNo fmtSnackCost txtSnPayment txtMiscNotes Cancel il W Help Figure 230 Tab order for the main form 5 Save and close the form 6 Save the database 276 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Creating forms in Design View This method requires using the Form Controls and Form Design toolbars extensively These techniques are beyond the scope of this document Instructions for creating forms using Design view will be described in the Database Guide Creating subforms in Design View Again this is beyond the scope of this document Creation of subforms in Design View will be described in the Database Guide Accessing other data sources OpenOffice org allows data sources to be accessed and then linked into OOo documents For example a mail merge links an external document containing a list of names and addresses into a letter with one copy of the letter being generated for each
394. t Word SF 2000 XP doch Microsoft Word 95 i doc Microsoft Word 6 0 doc Rich Text Format rt Starwriter 5 0 sci Starwriter 5 0 Template vor Figure 7 The OpenOffice org Save As dialog showing some of the Save formats Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 27 For OpenOffice org documents that have been saved with more than one version use the version drop down to select which version you wish to open in read only mode For Microsoft Office documents only the current version can be opened Use the File type field to specify the type of file to be opened or the format of the file to be saved The Read only checkbox opens the file for reading and printing only Consequently most of the toolbars disappear and most menu options are disabled An Edit File button is displayed on the Standard toolbar to open the file for editing It is possible to open files from the Web using URLs Using the Navigator The Navigator displays all objects contained in a document collected into categories For example in Writer it displays Headings Tables Text frames Notes Graphics Bookmarks and other items see Figure 8 Text frames Graphics OLE objects gt Bookmarks Sections Hyperlinks References Indexes Notes a d ki Epe S E Figure 8 The Navigator In Calc it shows Sheets Range Names Database Ranges Graphics Drawing Objects and other items In Impress and Draw it s
395. t match the functionality of the leading drawing or picture editing programs it does offer a wide array of tools and methods to produce and edit very good 3D drawings and pictures Draw offers two types of 3D objects the ones carried forward from OOo version 1 3D bodies and the ones newly introduced in version 2 3D shapes Depending on which type you choose there are different possibilities for further editing of the object rotation illumination perspective Setting up and editing 3D objects is simpler with 3D Shapes than with 3D bodies but 3D bodies currently allow for more customizing than 3D shapes See Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects in the Draw Guide for details Inserting pictures from other sources You can add pictures from several sources e The Gallery see Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork e Directly from a scanner Insert gt Picture gt Scan e Images created by another program including photographs from a digitial camera Insert gt Picture gt From File Draw provides tools for working with bitmap images such as photographs the Picture toolbar and the bitmap image management palette See the Draw Guide for details and examples Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 235 Exchanging objects with other programs To save a Draw image in a foreign format use File gt Export Draw can save to many graphic file formats as listed in Chapter 3 File Management You can also export Draw fi
396. t of a cell style so that it is automatically applied or it can be applied manually to the cell Some manual formatting can be applied using toolbar icons For more control and extra options select the appropriate cell or cells right click on it and select Format Cells All of the format options are discussed below All the settings discussed in this section can also be set as a part of the style using the Styles and Formatting window See Chapter 10 Using Styles in Calc in the Calc Guide for more information Note Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 151 Formatting multiple lines of text Multiple lines of text can be entered into a single cell using automatic wrapping or manual line breaks Each method is useful for different Situations Using automatic wrapping To set text to wrap at the end of the cell right click on the cell and select Format Cells or choose Format gt Cells from the menu bar or press Ctri 1 On the Alignment tab Figure 116 under Properties select Wrap text automatically The results are shown in Figure 117 Format Cells Xx Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection Text alignment Horizontal dent Vertical Text orientation ih Degrees L_ Vertically stacked al f gt Sh 0 a ABCD i F Reference edge ia iz ia Alo Properties _ Hyphenation active Figure 116 Format Cells gt Alignment dialog This cell is not set to wrap t
397. t tabs of the dialog for the wide variety of other options available to fine tune AutoCorrect AutoCorrect can be used as a quick way to insert special Tip characters For example c will be autocorrected to You can add your own special characters Using word completion If Word Completion is enabled Writer tries to guess which word you are typing and offers to complete the word for you To accept the Suggestion press Enter Otherwise continue typing Many people prefer not to use Word Completion If you do not Tip want to use it select Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Word Completion and uncheck Enable Word Completion Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 95 You can customize word completion from the Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Word Completion page Note Add append a space automatically after an accepted word Show the suggested word as a tip hovering over the word rather than completing the text as you type Change the maximum number of words remembered for word completion and the length of the smallest words to be remembered Delete specific entries from the word completion list Change the key that accepts a suggested entry the options are Right arrow End key Return Enter and Space bar Automatic word completion only occurs after you type a word for the second time in a document Using AutoText AutoText allows you to assign text tables graphics and other items to a key combination For example rat
398. t the main menu File in the Menu list and then in the Menu Content section of the dialog select the submenu Send in the Entries list and use the arrow keys to move it up or down in the sequence Submenus are easily identified in the Entries list by a small black triangle on the right hand side of the name In addition to renaming you can specify a keyboard shortcut that allows you to select a menu command when you press A f an underlined letter in a menu command 1 Select a menu or menu entry 2 Click the Menu button and select Rename 396 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Add a tilde in front of the letter that you want to use as an accelerator For example to select the Save All command by pressing A t V enter Sa ve ALL Adding a command to a menu You can add commands to the supplied menus and to menus you have created On the Customize dialog select the menu in the Menu list and click the Add button in the Menu Content section of the dialog On the Add Commands dialog select a category and then the command and click Add The dialog remains open so you can select several commands When you have finished adding commands click Close Back on the Customize dialog you can use the up and down arrow buttons to arrange the commands in your preferred sequence Add Commands To add a command to a menu select the category and then the command You can also drag the command to the Commands list of the Menu
399. tart If you record Calc macros and the recorder can correctly generate a macro there is an add in created by Paolo Mantovani which converts Calc macros when they are recorded The final code manipulates OpenOffice org objects rather than generating dispatches This can be very useful for learning the object model You can download the macro recorder from Paolo s web site directly or from the OOo Macros web site You should check both places to see which contains the latest version http www paolo mantovani org downloads DispatchToApiRecorder http www ooomacros org user php Macro organization In OpenOffice org macros are grouped in modules modules are grouped in libraries and libraries are grouped in library containers A library is usually used as a major grouping for either an entire category of macros or for an entire application Modules usually split functionality such as user interaction and calculations Individual macros are subroutines and functions Library Container Module 2 Macro 2 Figure 317 Macro Library hierarchy A computer scientist would use Figure 318 to precisely describe the Situation The text 1 means one or more and O means zero or more The black triangle means composed of or contains Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 379 e A library container contains one or more libraries and each library is contained in one library container e A library contains zer
400. tart of the macro sub EnterMyName Declare two variables dim document as object dim dispatcher as object ThisComponent refers to the current document The CurrentController property of a document refers to a service that controls the document For example when you type it is the current controller that notices The current controller then dispatches the changes to the document s frame The Frame property of a controller returns a main frame for a document Therefore the variable named document refers to a document s frame which receives dispatched commands document ThisComponent CurrentController Frame Most tasks in OpenOffice org are accomplished by dispatching a command OOo version 2 0 introduced the dispatch helper service which does most of the work to use dispatches in macros The method 372 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 CreateUnoService accepts the name of a service and it tries to create an instance of that service On completion the dispatcher variable contains a reference to a DispatchHelper dispatcher createUnoService com sun star frame DispatchHelper Declare an array of properties Each property has a name and a value In other words it is a name value pair The created array has one property at index zero dim args1 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyValue Give the property the name Text and the value Andrew Pitonyak which is the text that is inserted when the macro
401. ted However not only can the prepackaged graphic styles be modified but new graphic styles can also be created What styles to use and when to use them is described later in this chapter Presentation styles affect three elements of a slide master the background background objects such as icons decorative lines and text frames and the text placed on the slide Text styles are further divided into Notes Outline 1 through Outline 9 Subtitle and Title The outline styles are used for the different levels of the outline to which they belong For example Outline 2 is used for the subpoints of Outline 1 and Outline 3 is used for the subpoints of Outline 2 Graphic styles affect many of the elements of a slide Notice that text styles exist in both the presentation and graphic style selections Working with slide masters Impress comes with 28 prepackaged slide masters They are shown in the Master Pages section of the Tasks pane Figure 144 This section has three subsections Used in This Presentation Recently Used and Available for Use Click the sign next to the name ofa Subsection to expand it to show thumbnails of the slides or click the sign to collapse the subsection to hide the thumbnails d Tasks View X Master Pages Used in This Presentation en Used aa a hd Each of the slide masters shown in the i Available for Use list is from a template of the Available for Use Same name If you have
402. template Note To do so first save them in a document and then save the document as a template as described in Chapter 3 Styles and Templates Customizing menu content In addition to changing the menu font described in Chapter 2 you can add and rearrange items on the menu bar add items to menus and make other changes To customize menus 1 Choose Tools gt Customize 2 On the Customize dialog pick the Menus page Figure 328 3 In the Save In drop down list choose whether to save this changed menu for the application for example Writer or for a selected document 4 In the section OpenOffice org lt name of the program example Writer gt Menus select from the Menu drop down list the menu that you want to customize The list includes all the main menus as well as sub menus that is menus that are contained under another menu For example in addition to File Edit View and so on there is File Send and File Templates The commands available for the selected menu are shown in the central part of the dialog 5 To customize the selected menu click on the Menu or Modify buttons You can also add commands to a menu by clicking on the Add button These actions are described in the following sections Use the up and down arrows next to the Entries list to move the selected menu item to a different position 6 When you have finished making all your changes click OK to save them 394 Getting Started with O
403. the Ctrl key depends on the settings of the Snap to Grid option on the View gt Grid menu Note Snap to Grid on Ctrl deactivates the snap option for this activity Snap to Grid off Ctr activates the snap option for this activity The spacing resolution of the grid points can be adjusted under Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt Grid See also Chapter 8 Tips and Tricks in the Draw Guide Hold down the A t key to extend the line symmetrically outward from the start point the line extends to each side of the start point equally This lets you draw straight lines by starting from the middle of the line The line just drawn has all the default attributes such as color and line type To change the line attributes click on the line to select it and then use the tools in the Line and Filling toolbar or for more control right click on the line and choose Line to open the Line dialog Drawing an arrow Arrows are drawn like lines Draw classifies arrows as a subgroup of lines Lines with arrowheads They are shown in the information field on the status bar only as lines Click on the Line Ends with Arrow icon gt to draw an arrow Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 215 Drawing lines and arrows Click on the small black triangle on the Lines and Arrows icon to open a floating toolbar with ten tools for drawing lines and arrows Figure 162 Alternatively you can click directly on the symbol to repeat the last used c
404. the Tasks pane You can also create and save additional slide masters Modifying the slide show Now review the entire presentation and answer some questions Run the slide show at least once before answering them You might want to add some questions of your own 1 Are the slides in the correct order If not some of them will need to be moved 188 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 2 Would an additional slide make a particular point clearer If so another slide needs to be created 3 Would some custom animations help some of the slides Advanced technique 4 Should some of the slides have a different slide transition than others The transition of those slides should be changed 5 Do some of the slides seem unnecessary Delete the affected slide or slides after checking if they are indeed unnecessary If one or more slides seems to be unnecessary hide the slide or slides and view the slide show a few more times to make sure To hide a slide right click the slide in the Slides pane and select Hide Slide in the pop up menu Do not delete a Slide until you have done this otherwise you may have to create that slide again Tip Once you have answered these and your own questions you should make the necessary changes This is done most easily in the Slide Sorter view If you need one or more new slides create them using the steps listed in Inserting additional slides on page 186 Slide masters and styles
405. the document s content plus your personal key The checksum and your public key are stored together with the document When someone later opens the document on any computer with a recent version of OpenOffice org the program will compute the checksum again and compare it with the stored checksum If both are the same the program will signal that you see the original unchanged document In addition the program can show you the public key information from the certificate You can compare the public key with the public key that is published on the web site of the certificate authority Whenever someone changes something in the document this change breaks the digital signature Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 3395 On Windows operating systems the Windows features of validating a Signature are used On Solaris and Linux systems files that are supplied by Thunderbird Mozilla or Firefox are used For a more detailed description of how to get and manage a certificate and Signature validation see Using Digital Signatures in the OOo Help To sign a document 1 Choose File gt Digital Signatures 2 If you have not saved the document since the last change a message box appears Click Yes to save the file 3 After saving you see the Digital Signatures dialog Click Add to add a public key to the document 4 In the Select Certificate dialog select your certificate and click OK 5 You see again the Digital
406. the focus to the previous section or element in a dialog Alt Down Arrow Opens the list of the control field currently selected in a dialog This shortcut applies to combo boxes and to icon buttons with pop up menus Close an opened list by pressing the Esc key Del Deletes the selected items into the recycle bin Shift Del Deletes the selected items without putting them in the recycle bin Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts 411 Shortcut Keys Backspace Ctrl Shift Spacebar Ctrl Tab Enter if an OLE object is selected Enter if a drawing object or text object is selected Ctrl O Ctrl S Ctrl N Shift Ctrl N Ctrl P Ctrl Q Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V Ctrl Shift V Ctrl A Ctrl Z Ctrl Y Ctrl Shift Y Ctrl F Ctrl Shift F Ctrl Shift Ctrl Shift R Ctrl Shift I Ctrl I Ctrl B Ctrl U Result When a folder is shown goes up one level goes back Removes direct formatting from selected text or objects as in Format gt Default Formatting When positioned at the start of a header a tab is inserted Activates the selected OLE object Activates text input mode Opens a document Saves the current document Creates a new document Opens the Templates and Documents dialog Prints the document Exits the application Cuts the selected items Copies the selected items Pastes from the clipboard Opens the Paste Special dialog Selects all Undoes last action Redoes last action R
407. them in the table at the bottom of the query d In the Criterion cell of the Date field type the following BETWEEN 5 25 2007 AND 5 26 2007 Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 301 Date FuelCost Fuel Fuel lt x Criterion BETWEEN 05 25 2007 AND 05 26 2007 Figure 262 Setting the criterion for a query 2 Save name and close the query Suggestion Vacation Fuel Tip Purchases When using dates in a query enter them in numerical form MM DD YYYY or DD MM YYYY depending upon your language s default setting for dates my default setting is MM DD YYYY All dates must have a before and after it Hence May 25 2007 is written 05 25 2007 or 25 5 2007depending upon your language s default setting 3 Open a new report e Right click the Vacation Fuel Purchases query e Select Report Wizard from the context menu When a new report is opened in this way the query used to Note open it is automatically selected in the Tables or Queries 4 5 6 7 dropdown list Create the report Use gt gt to move both fields from the Available Fields to the Fields in Report list Click Next Label fields Add a space to FuelCost to make it Fuel Cost two words Click Next Group fields Click Date to highlight it Use gt to move the Date field to the Groupings list Click Next Choose layout We will be making no changes in the layout Click Next 8 Create rep
408. then choose one of the sort orders defined in Tools gt Options gt Spreadsheet gt Sort Lists from the drop down list 160 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Direction Sets whether rows or columns are sorted The default is to sort by columns unless the selected cells are in a single column Printing Printing from Calc is the same as printing from other OOo components see Chapter 10 but some details are different especially regarding preparation for printing The Print dialog Figure 125 reached from File gt Print has some Calc specific options which sheets to print Print Copies A All sheets Number of copies 1 ZENE aa 3 3 Collate Selected cells A A i Print range All pages Figure 125 Part of the Print dialog The Printer Options dialog reached by clicking the Options button on the bottom left of the Print dialog has only two choices as shown in Figure 126 Suppress output of empty pages and Print only selected sheets Printer Options Fq Pages Suppress output of empty pages Sheets Print only selected sheets Figure 126 Top of the Printer Options dialog Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 161 Selecting sheets to print You can select one or more sheets for printing This can be useful if you have a large spreadsheet with multiple sheets and only want to print certain sheets For example an accountant might record costs over time with one sheet for
409. then click OK 5 Click OK to close the Print dialog Creating a new presentation This section describes how to set up a new presentation The settings selected here are general they apply to all the slides Planning a presentation The first thing to do is to decide what you are going to do with the presentation For example putting a group of digital photos together in a presentation requires very little planning However using a presentation to increase the knowledge of others about your topic requires much more planning You need to ask and answer many questions before you begin creating a presentation If you are not acquainted with creating presentations the answers will be more general Those who have created a variety of presentations in the past will want to have more specific answers 180 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Who is to see the presentation How will it be used What is the Subject matter What should be in its outline How detailed should the outline be Will an audio file be played Is animation desirable How Should the transition between slides be handled These are some of the many questions that should be asked answered and written down before creating the presentation Sound and animation are more advanced topics and are explained in the Impress Guide Again it is not always necessary at this point to have specific answers to every question Making an outline is extremely important You may alr
410. ther cells Using the split screen technique you can position the cell containing the number in one section and each of the cells with formulas in the other sections Then you can change the number in the cell and watch how it affects each of the formulas ES S in 2 B CO la a l Beta 3 2000 AQ 0 1000 Al Beta A0 1 AD0 0 26880 6 JAZZ BetatA1 ii A1 0 6562 As BetatA2 1 A2 0 7219 6 Ad Beta aAs As 0 6424 og JAS 6 6Beta Ad Ady 0 7351 10 AB Beta aAs As 0 6231 41 AT Beta Ag i A6 0 7515 12 AS Beta ATta Ary 0 5975 13 AS Beta Ag 1 Ag 0 7696 A10 Beta Ag t1 AS 0 5675 415 Al1 Beta A10 1 A10 0 7854 Figure 106 Split screen example Splitting the screen horizontally To split the screen horizontally 1 Move the mouse pointer into the vertical scroll bar on the right hand side of the screen and place it over the small button at the top with the black triangle L ae X Split screen bar Figure 107 Split screen bar on vertical scroll bar Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 143 2 Immediately above this button you will see a thick black line Figure 107 Move the mouse pointer over this line and it turns into a line with two arrows Figure 108 sel ga Figure 108 Split screen bar on vertical scroll bar with cursor 3 Hold down the left mouse button and a gray line appears running across the page Drag the mouse downwards and this line follows 4 Release the m
411. til ia RemoveFormattin a Standard EegMy Macros ST Description O H H AAA l l aji a Te Figure 326 Assign macro to the document open event Event assigned Action Start Application Close Application Create Document Open Document Save Document As Extensions D Standard MyMacros PrintHello OK Cancel Help Assign Remove Figure 327 PrintHello is assigned to the Open Document event An extension is a package that can be installed into OpenOffice org to add new functionality Extensions can be written in almost any programming language and may be simple or sophisticated Extensions can be grouped into types e Calc Add Ins which provide new functionality for Calc including new functions that act like normal built in functions e New components and functionality which normally include some level of UI integration such as new menus or toolbars e Data pilots that are used directly in Calc e Chart Add Ins with new chart types e Linguistic components such as spell checkers e Document templates and images Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 389 Although individual extensions can be found in different places there is an extension repository at http extensions services openoffice org For more about obtaining and installing extensions see Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org Writing macros without the recorder The examples covered in this chapter are created using the
412. ting Started with Base 241 As you create a database you should save your work regularly This means more than just saving what you have just created You must save the whole database as well Caution For example when you create your first table you must save it A before you can close it If you look at the Save icon in the Standard toolbar at the top after closing the table it will be active Click the Save icon and this icon will be grayed out again Not only the table has been saved but it also been made a part of the database Creating database tables In a database a table stores information for a group of things we call fields For example a table might hold an address book a stock list a phone book or a price list A database can have from one to several tables Note To work with tables click the Tables icon in the Database list or use Alt a The three tasks that you can perform on a table are in the Task list see Figure 176 Figure 176 Creating tables Using the Wizard to create a table Caution Every table requires a Primary key field What this field does will be explained later We will use this field to number our nN entries and want that number to automatically increase as we add each entry 242 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Since none of the fields we need for our Automobile database are contained in any of the wizard tables we will create a simple table using the wizard that has nothing
413. tions set on the Writing Aids dialog are effective only if hyphenation is turned on through paragraph styles Note Choices on the Writing Aids dialog for characters before line break and characters after line break override settings in paragraphs styles for characters at line end and characters at line begin To enter a conditional hyphen inside a word press Control minus sign The word is hyphenated at this position when it is at the end of the line even if automatic hyphenation for this paragraph is switched off To insert a non breaking hyphen press Control Shift minus sign Undoing and redoing changes To undo the most recent change press Control Z or click the Undo icon H on the Standard toolbar or select Edit gt Undo from the menu bar The Edit menu shows the latest change that can be undone as shown in Figure 75 Untitled1 OpenOffice org Writer File Edit View Insert Format Table Te 2 Undo Delete rabbit Ctrl z a a Redo Typing fox Ctri Y Figure 75 Edit gt Undo last action Click the small triangle to the right of the Undo icon to get a list of all the changes that can be undone Figure 76 You can select multiple changes and undo them at the same time 102 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 A TR i Paste dipboard Delete 1 Change style graphics 17 Insert graphics Delete graphics
414. tionships from a diagram view Base incorporates HSQLDB as its default relational database engine It can also use dBASE Microsoft Access MySQL or Oracle or any ODBC or JDBC compliant database Base also provides support for a subset of ANSI 92 SQL Math formula editor Math is OOo s formula or equation editor You can use it to create complex equations that include symbols or characters not available in standard font sets While it is most commonly used to create formulas in other documents such as Writer and Impress files Math can also work as a stand alone tool You can save formulas in the standard Mathematical Markup Language MathML format for inclusion in webpages and other documents not created by OOo Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 11 The advantages of OpenOffice org Here are some of the advantages of OpenOffice org over other office Suites No licensing fees OOo is free for anyone to use and distribute at no cost Many features that are available as extra cost add ins in other office suites like PDF export are free with OOo There are no hidden charges now or in the future Open source You can distribute copy and modify the software as much as you wish in accordance with either of OOo s Open Source licenses Cross platform OOo3 runs on several hardware architectures and under multiple operating systems such as Microsoft Windows Mac OS X Linux and Sun Solaris Extensive language support O
415. to do with our database This section is an exercise in explaining how the Wizard works The Wizard permits the fields of the table to come from more than one suggested table We will create a table with fields from three different suggested tables in the Wizard Click Use Wizard to Create Table This opens the Table Wizard A field in a table is one bit of information For example in a price list table there might be one field for item name one for the description and a third for the price More fields may be added as needed Note Step 1 Select fields You have a choice of two categories of suggested tables Business and Personal Each category contains its own suggested tables from which to choose Each table has a list of available fields We will use the CD Collection Sample table in the Personal category to select the fields we need 1 Category Select Personal The Sample Tables drop down list changes to a list of personal sample tables 2 Sample Tables Select CD Collection The Available fields window changes to a list of available fields for this table 3 Selected Fields Using the gt button move these fields from the Available fields window to the Selected fields window in this order CollectionID AlbumTitle Artist DatePurchased Format Notes and NumberofTracks 4 Selected Fields from another sample table Click Business as the Category Select Employees from the dropdown list of sample tables Use th
416. toolbar to create a vertical text box Note that when editing the contents the text is displayed horizontally Pasting text You can insert text into a text box by copying it from another document and pasting it into Impress However the pasted text will probably not match the formatting of the surrounding text or that of the other slides in the presentation This may be what you want on some occasions however in most cases you want to make sure that the presentation does not become a patchwork of different paragraph styles font types bullet points and so on There are several ways to ensure consistency these methods are explained below Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 195 Pasting unformatted text It is normally good practice to paste text without formatting and apply the formatting later To paste without formatting either press Control Shift V and then select Unformatted text from the dialog that appears or click on the small black triangle next to the paste symbol in the standard toolbar and select Unformatted text The unformatted text will be formatted with the outline style at the cursor position in an AutoLayout text box or with the default graphic style ina normal text box Formatting pasted text If pasting the text into an AutoLayout area then to give the pasted text the same look and feel of the rest of the presentation you need to apply the appropriate outline style to the text 1 Paste t
417. ts for example add a logo or decorative graphics e Size placement and contents of header and footer elements to appear on every slide e Size and placement of default frames for slide titles and content Before working on the slide master make sure that the Styles and Formatting window is open To select the slide master for modification 1 Select View gt Master gt Slide Master from the menu bar This unlocks the properties of the slide master so you can edit it 2 Click Master Pages in the Tasks pane This gives you access to the pre packaged slide masters 3 Click on the slide master you want to modify among the ones available Figure 144 4 Make changes as required then click the Close Master View icon on the Master View toolbar For details see Chapter 2 of the Impress Guide 5 Save the file before continuing 192 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Any changes made to one slide when in Master View mode will appear on all slides using this slide master Always make sure you close Master View and return to Normal view before working on any of the presentation slides Select View gt Normal from the menu bar or click Close Master View in the Master View toolbar to return to the normal slide view Caution A The changes made to one of the slides in Normal view for example changes to the bullet point style or the color of the title area and so on will not be overridden by subsequent changes to the sli
418. ttom 4 Add a calculation field to the right of the FuelCost field e Type the following in an Field cell in the table at the bottom End Reading FuelCost End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer e Type the following in its Alias cell cost per mile Note If you use the metric system cost per kmis the appropriate alias 5 Save and close the query 6 Open a new report Right click the Fuel Economy query and select Report Wizard 7 Select fields Move all the fields from the Available fields to the Fields in report list Use the gt gt to do so Click Next 8 Label fields Change FuelCost to Fuel Cost by placing a space between the words Click Next 9 Group fields Use gt to move the Date field to the Groupings list Click Next 10 Sort options the wizard skipped this one 11 Choose layout Accept the default Click Next 12 Create the report e Change the report name to Fuel Statistics e The default setting is Dynamic report so no change is necessary e Select Modify report layout e Click Finish 304 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Modifying a report At the end of the last section we left the Fuel Statistics report open in the edit mode Figure 265 We will be working on that report These Same steps can be used with any report that you open for editing Figure 265 A report in edit mode The Author is the name you listed in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt User Data
419. tyles for headings the heading levels associated with outline levels in Tools gt Outline Numbering will revert to A the defaults of Heading 1 Heading 2 and so on when you load styles this You will need to change these back to your custom heading styles This is a bug Caution Deleting styles You cannot remove delete any of OOo s predefined styles from a document or template even if they are not in use You can remove any user defined custom styles but before you do you should make sure the styles are not in use If an unwanted style is in use you will want to replace it with a substitute style To delete unwanted styles right click on them one at a time in the Styles and Formatting window and click Delete on the pop up menu If the style is in use you receive a warning message Make sure the style is not in use before deletion Otherwise all objects with that style will return to the default style and A retain their formatting as manual formatting This can bea problem in a long document Caution If the style is not in use you receive a confirmation message click Yes Using a template to create a document To use a template to create a document 1 From the main menu choose File gt New gt Templates and Documents The Templates and Documents dialog opens See Figure 45 2 In the box on the left click the Templates icon if it is not already selected A list of template folders appears
420. ue 1 args19 1 Name Select args19 1 Value false dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoDown O args19 end sub 376 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Cursor movements are used for all operations as opposed to searching If run on the DONTKNOW line the word weight is moved to the front of the line and the first The is changed to She This is not perfect but I should not have run the macro on the lines that did not have the proper format I need to do these manually Running the macro quickly It is tedious to repeatedly run the macro using Tools gt Macros gt Run Macro see Figure 316 The macro can be run from the IDE Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the Basic Macro dialog Select your macro and click Edit to open the macro in the IDE The IDE has a Run Basic icon in the toolbar that runs the first macro in the IDE Unless you change the first macro it is the empty macro named Main Modify Main so that it reads as shown in Listing 3 Listing 3 Modify Main to call CopyNumToCol1 Sub Main CopyNumToColl End Sub Now you can run CopyNumToCol1 by repeatedly clicking the Run Basic icon in the toolbar of the IDE This is very fast and easy especially for temporary macros that will be used a few times and then discarded Sometimes the macro recorder fails Understanding the OpenOffice org internals helps to understand how and why the mac
421. ueries Table Vacations Available fields Fields in report snackCost MiscPayment Figure 260 Adding fields to a report 3 Label the fields answering the question How do you want to label the fields 300 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 e Click the field label you want to change and make your changes as you would in any text box e Shorten Miscellaneous to Misc Click Next 5 Since we are grouping by the date use the gt button to move the Date field to the Grouping list Click Next Fields Groupings Motel Date Tolls Misc O Figure 261 Selecting fields for grouping data 6 Sort options We do not want to do any additional sorting Click Next 7 Choose layout We will be using the default settings for the layout Click Next 8 Create report e Label the report Vacation Expenses e Select Static report e Click Finished If you feel adventurous try selecting some of the other layout choices After selecting a choice drag and drop the Report Note Wizard window so that you can see what you have selected Move the cursor over the Heading of this window and then drag and drop Vacation fuel report 1 Create a query containing only fuel bought on the days of the vacation a Open a query in Design View b Follow the steps for adding tables in Add tables Add the Fuel table c Double click these fields in the Fuel table listing Date and FuelCost to enter
422. ult location is your user templates directory but you can choose a different location if you prefer 4 Finally you have the option of creating a new document from your template immediately or manually changing the template For future documents you can re use the template created by the wizard just as you would use any other template Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 71 Editing a template You can edit a template s styles and content and then if you wish you can reapply the template s styles to documents that were created from that template Note that you can only reapply styles You cannot reapply content To edit a template 1 From the main menu choose File gt Templates gt Organize The Template Management dialog opens see Figure 48 Template Management Cg My Templates 9 Presentation Backgrounds CI Presentations Commands 4ddress Book Figure 48 Template management dialog 2 In the box on the left double click the folder that contains the template that you want to edit A list of all the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name 3 Select the template that you want to edit 4 Click the Commands button and choose Edit from the drop down menu 5 Edit the template just as you would any other document To save your changes choose File gt Save from the main menu 72 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Updating a document from a c
423. uments on the right To load styles from a file that is not open click the File button Tip When you return to this dialog both lists show the selected file as well as all the currently open documents 3 Open the folders and find the templates from and to which you want to copy Double click on the name of the template or document and then double click the Styles icon to show the list of individual styles Figure 43 4 To copy a style hold down the Ctrl key and drag the name of the style from one list to the other Caution If you do not hold down the Control key when dragging the style will be moved from one list to the other The style will A be deleted from the list you are dragging it from 5 Repeat for each style you want to copy If the receiving template or document hasmany styles you may not see any change unless you scroll down in the list When you are finished click Close Template Management 0207WG WorkingWithStyles_PHE Untitled1 My Templates C Drawing C HB Systems C phb C Presentation C Presentation Backgrounds J Presentations J US Sizes Commands lt gt Address Book Templates Documents ne not a template 66 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Template Management xX outline numbering test outline numbering test Close ei Styles sample ode m AJ COoEmphasis L Co
424. umns Figure 89 Labels dialog Format page Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 119 5 Click Save to save your new format 6 When you have finished formatting click New Document to make your sheet of labels or click Cancel or press the Esc key You can also click Reset to remove your changes and return to the original settings when the dialog opened On the Options page choose to print the entire page of labels or one single label then select which one by the column and row You can also change printer setup 7 You can print right away using the Print File Directly icon on the toolbar or by choosing File gt Print from the menu bar or you can save the file to print later Labels Format Options Distribute O Entire page Single label Column il Row i Printer HP LaserJet SL Setup Figure 90 Labels dialog Options page Sending a fax using Writer To send a fax directly from OpenOffice org you need a fax modem and a fax driver that allows applications to communicate with the fax modem Sending a fax through the Print dialog 1 Open the Print dialog by choosing File gt Print and select the fax driver in the Name list 2 Click OK to open the dialog for your fax driver where you can select the fax recipient Adding a Fax icon to the toolbar You can configure OpenOffice org so that a single click on an icon automatically sends the current document as a fax See Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice o
425. unctions will treat the entry like any other text entry which typically results in it being a zero in a formula and being ignored in a function Numbers can have leading zeros and be regarded as numbers as opposed to text if the cell is formated appropriately Right click on the cell and chose Format Cells gt Numbers Adjust the leading zeros setting to add leading zeros to numbers Tip When using an apostrophe to allow a leading O to be displayed the apostrophe is not visible in the cell after the Enter key is pressed ifthe apostrophe is a plain apostrophe not a smart quote apostrophe If smart quotes are selected for apostrophes the apostrophe remains visible in the cell To choose the type of apostrophe use Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Custom Quotes The selection of the apostrophe type affects both Calc and Writer Note Caution When a number is formatted as text care must be taken that the cell containing the number is not used in a formula since A Calc will ignore the value Entering dates and times Select the cell and type the date or time You can separate the date elements with a slant or a hyphen or use text such as 10 Oct 03 Calc recognizes a variety of date formats You can separate time elements with colons such as 10 43 45 Speeding up data entry Entering data into a spreadsheet can be very labor intensive but Calc provides several tools for removing some of the drudgery from inpu
426. unctuation section in the Special Characters window To enter an en dash using AutoCorrect type at least one character a Space one or two hyphens another space and at least one more letter then a space The one or two hyphens will be replaced by an en dash is an em dash that is a dash the width of the letter m in the font you are using It is U 2014 To enter it using AutoCorrect type at least one character two hyphens and at least one more character then a space The two hyphens will be replaced by an em dash To insert a non breaking space to keep characters together for example in a telephone number press Control Space on the keyboard Formatting text Using styles Styles are central to using Writer Styles enable you to easily format your document consistently and to change the format with minimal effort Often when you format your document in Writer you are using styles whether you realize it or not A style is a named set of formatting options Writer defines several types of styles for different types of elements characters paragraphs pages frames and lists See Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates Formatting paragraphs You can apply many formats to paragraphs using the buttons on the Formatting toolbar Figure 68 shows the Formatting toolbar as a floating toolbar customized to show only the buttons for paragraph formatting The appearance of the icons may vary with your operating Cha
427. une tab stop settings Paragraph Background Indents amp Spacing Alignment Text Flow Numbering Tabs Drop Caps Borders Position Type Left 75 O Right Delete All Decimal Fill character Figure 65 The Tabs page of the Paragraph dialog Checking spelling Writer provides a spelling checker which can be used in two ways iy AutoSpellcheck checks each word as it is typed and displays a wavy red line under any misspelled words When the word is corrected the line disappears To perform a separate spelling check on the document or a text selection click the Spellcheck button This checks the document or selection and opens the Spellcheck dialog if any misspelled words are found 92 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Here are some more features of the spelling checker e Right click on a word with a wavy underline to open a menu If you select from the suggested words on the menu the selection will replace the misspelled word in your text e You can change the dictionary language for example to Spanish French or German on the Spellcheck dialog e You can add a word to the dictionary Click Add in the Spellcheck dialog and pick the dictionary to add it to e The Options dialog of the Spellcheck tool has a number of different options such as whether to check uppercase words and words with numbers It also allows you to manage custom dictionaries that is add or delete dictio
428. urrent document only be sure to select the For the current document only option Tools gt Languages gt More dictionaries online Default languages for documents Western ae English USA he For the current document only Enhanced language support Figure 67 Options available in the Languages settings 94 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 The language used for checking spelling is also shown in the status bar next to the page style in use You can also configure the language for a paragraph or a group of characters as None This option is particularly useful in the case where you insert in the document text that you do not want to spellcheck such as web addresses or programming language snippets Using AutoCorrect Writer s AutoCorrect function has a long list of common misspellings and typing errors which it corrects automatically For example hte will be changed to the Select Tools gt AutoCorrect to open the AutoCorrect dialog There you can define which strings of text are corrected and how In most cases the defaults are fine Ti AutoCorrect is turned on by default To turn it off uncheck Ip Format gt AutoFormat gt While Typing To stop Writer from replacing a specific spelling use Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Replace highlight the word pair and click Delete To add a new spelling to correct type it into the Replace and With boxes and click New See the differen
429. us shortening the startup time for OOo components by about half If the Quickstarter is disabled see Reactivating the Quickstarter if you want to enable it Using the Quickstarter icon Right click the Quickstarter icon in the system tray to open a pop up menu from which you can open a new document open the Templates and Documents dialog or choose an existing document to open You can also double click the Quickstarter icon to display the Templates and Documents dialog Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 17 El Text Document ra Spreadsheet E Presentation E Drawing B Database From Template Fa Open Document W Load OpenOffice org During System Start Up Exit Quickstarter gt ile ee Pe _ K a ee i Figure 1 Quickstarter popup menu Disabling the Quickstarter To close the Quickstarter right click on the icon in the system tray and then click Exit Quickstarter on the pop up menu The next time the computer is restarted the Quickstarter will be loaded again To prevent OpenOffice org from loading during system startup deselect the Load OpenOffice org during system start up item on the pop up menu You might want to do this if your computer has insufficient memory for example Reactivating the Quickstarter If the Quickstarter has been disabled you can reactivate it by selecting the Load OpenOffice org during system start up checkbox in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Memory
430. use OpenOffice org in a business Yes Is OpenOffice available in my language OpenOffice org has been translated localized into over 40 languages so your language probably is supported Additionally there are over 70 spelling hyphenation and thesaurus dictionaries available for languages and dialects that do not have a localized program interface The dictionaries are available from the OpenOffice org website at http lingucomponent openoffice org downlo ad_dictionary html How can you make it for free A large share of the development and much of the support for the project is currently supplied or sponsored by Sun Microsystems There are also many other people who work on OOo as volunteers What if I need technical Support Read the section titled How to get help in Chapter 1 Introducting OpenOffice org Who owns the software The copyright is shared by Sun Microsystems and all the volunteers who have contributed Does that mean that they can take away the software No The licenses under which OOo is developed and distributed can never be revoked so it cannot be taken away I am writing a software application May I use programming code from OpenOffice org in my program You may within the parameters set in the LGPL Read the license http www openoffice org license html Why is my favorite feature from StarOffice not available in OOo That feature is pro
431. used instead Edit document properties before saving If you select this option the Document Properties dialog pops up to prompt you to enter relevant information the first time you save a new document or whenever you use Save As Save AutoRecovery information every Note that AutoRecovery in OpenOffice org overwrites the original file If you have also chosen Always create backup copy the original file then overwrites the backup copy If you have this set recovering your document after a system crash will be easier but recovering an earlier version of the document may be harder Save URLs relative to file system internet Relative addressing to a file system is only possible if the source document and the referenced document are both on the same drive A relative address always starts from the directory in which the current document is located It is recommended to save relatively if you want to create a directory structure on an Internet server Default file format and ODF settings ODF format version OpenOffice org by default saves documents in OpenDocument Format ODF version 1 2 While this allows for improved functionality there may be backwards compatibility issues When a file saved in ODF 1 2 is opened in an earlier version of OpenOffice org using ODF 1 0 1 1 some of the advanced features may be lost Two notable examples are cross references to headings and the formatting of numbered lists If you plan to share documents w
432. ve the front matter such as the table of contents numbered with Roman numerals and the main body of the document numbered in Arabic numerals starting with 1 You can restart page numbering in two ways 106 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Method 1 1 Place the cursor in the first paragraph of the new page 2 Click Format gt Paragraph 3 On the Text Flow tab of the Paragraph dialog Figure 73 on page 101 select Breaks 4 Select Insert and then With Page Style and specify the page style to use 5 Specify the page number to start from and then click OK Method 1 is also useful for numbering the first page of a document with a page number greater than 1 For example Tip you may be writing a book with each chapter in a separate file Chapter 1 may start with page 1 but Chapter 2 could begin with page 25 and Chapter 3 with page 51 Method 2 1 Insert gt Manual break 2 By default Page break is selected on the Insert Break dialog Figure 78 3 Choose the required page Style 4 Select Change page number 5 Specify the page number to start from and then click OK Insert Break Type Line break Column break Page break style Figure 78 Restarting page numbering after a manual page break Changing page margins You can change page margins in two ways e Using the page rulers quick and easy but does not have fine control Chapter 4 Getting Start
433. view toolbar 2 Click the Book Preview icon to display left and right pages in their correct orientation 3 To print the document from this page view click the Print page view icon to open the Print dialog Choose your options and click OK to print as usual 4 To choose margins and other options for the printout click the Print options page view icon to display the Print Options dialog Print Options Distribution GK Rows al Columns a Cancel Margins Left A Right Help Top S Bottom Default Spacing Horizontal Vertically Format Landscape Portrait Figure 84 Print Options dialog Printing a brochure You can print a document with two pages on each side of a sheet of paper arranged so that when the printed pages are folded in half the pages are in the correct order to form a booklet or brochure To print a brochure on a single sided printer 1 Plan your document so it will look good when printed half size choose appropriate margins font sizes and so on Click File gt Print In the Print dialog click Properties and be sure the printer is set to the same orientation portrait or landscape as specified in the page setup for your document Usually the orientation does not matter but it does for brochures Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 115 2 3 4 5 6 Click Options In the Pages section of the Printer Options dialog choose Brochure and Right pa
434. w In Draw shadows are considered an area property Click on the Shadow icon on the Line and Filling toolbar You can customize the position distance color and transparency of shadows Adding transparency You can make objects partly or fully transparent or even with a varying degree of transparency as a gradient Using styles Suppose that you want to apply the same area fill line thickness and border to a set of objects This repetitive process can be greatly simplified by the use of styles Styles allow you to define a formatting template a style and then to apply that style to multiple objects For more about styles see Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates for more information Special effects With Draw you can apply many special effects to objects and groups of objects This section describes a few of these effects Others include distorting shadows and transparency See the Draw Guide for examples of the many effects available Flip an object Select an object and click on the Flip icon 4 You will see a dashed line through the middle of the object 230 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 This dashed line is the axis of symmetry The object will be reflected about this line Move one or both ends of the line with your mouse to set the axis Then grab any one of the eight green handles and move it across to the other side of the dashed line The new position of the figure is shown dash
435. w Figure 63 3 Select the characters you wish to insert in order then click OK The selected characters are shown in the lower left of the dialog As you select a character it is shown on the lower right along with its numerical code Different fonts include different special characters If you do Note not find a particular special character try changing the Font selection Special Characters Font New Roman w Subset Figure 63 The Special Characters window where you can insert special characters Notice that the characters selected appear in the bottom left Tip corner of the window Setting tab stops and indents The horizontal ruler shows both the default tab stops and any that you have defined To set the measurement unit and the spacing of default tab stops go to Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt General You can also set or change the measurement unit by right clicking on the ruler to open a list of units as shown in Figure 64 Click on one of them to change the ruler to that unit Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 91 I millimetre centimetre inch paint pica Figure 64 Ruler showing default tab stops Double click on a blank part of the ruler to open the Indents amp Spacing page of the Paragraph dialog Double click on the ruler itself to open the Tabs page of the Paragraph dialog Figure 65 and fine t
436. w gt Templates and Documents and the extension is listed in the Extension Manager Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 73 Ba Extension Manager Mm dh l 000P templates unified en US 2 3 1 2 0xt 2 3 1 2 OxygenOffice Extras as OpenOffice org ExtensionThis Extension contains parts of OxygenOffice Project Sun_ODF_Template_Pack_en US oxt Get more extensions here Check for Updates Figure 50 Newly added package of templates Setting a default template If you create a document by choosing File gt New gt Text Document or Spreadsheet Presentation or Drawing from the main menu OOo creates the document from the Default template for that type of document You can however set a custom template to be the default You can reset the default later if you choose Setting a custom template as the default You can set any template to be the default as long as it is in one of the folders displayed in the Template Management dialog To set a custom template as the default 1 From the main menu choose File gt Templates gt Organize The Template Management dialog opens 2 In the box on the left select the folder containing the template that you want to set as the default then select the template 3 Click the Commands button and choose Set As Default Template from the drop down menu The next time that you create a document by choosing File gt New the document will be created from this template
437. w or change which type of dialog OpenOffice org uses 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt General 2 Select the Use OpenOffice org dialogs checkbox This section discusses the OpenOffice org Open and Save As dialogs See Figure 7 for an example of the Save As dialog the Open dialog is Similar The three buttons in the top right of the OOo Open and Save As dialogs are from left to right e Go Up One Level in the folder directory hierarchy This is a long click button if you want to go up higher than just one level e Create New Folder e View Menu Save as C Documents and Settings Jean Hollis Weber My Documents OpenOr Published drafts Title Type Size Dake modified ei 010165 WhatIsOoad odt OpenDocument Text 259 1 KB O2foaf2005 17 01 56 010255 StartingOOd odk OpenDocument Text 437 4 KE 19 07 2005 20 45 07 010365 FileManagement odk OpenDocument Text 450 9 KE 30 09 2005 10 42 5 A 010435 Menus4ndToolbars od OpenDocument Text 305 6 KE 19 07 2005 20 40 2 ey 0105055 SettingUpOtn odt OpenDocument Text 562 5 KB OF f08 2005 08 09 24 E 010665 GettingStarted withwr OpenDocument Text 166 ME 21 07 2005 15 39 5 E O10765 GettingStartedwithCal OpenDocument Text 691 4 KE 19 07 2005 19 45 54 File name 010365 FileManagement bs OpenDocument Text adt OpenDocument Text Template otk l Openbffice org 1 0 Text Document C sx Save with passwo OpenOFFice org 1 0 Text Document Template i stw Microsof
438. ww openoffice org dev docs source sys reqs 30 html How to get the software Many new computers come with OpenOffice org installed In addition most Linux distributions such as Ubuntu include OpenOffice org If you need to install it yourself it s very easy to do You can download the OpenOffice org installation package from the project s home page or by using a Peer to Peer client such as BitTorrent Instructions for BitTorrent are here The installation package is approximately 150MB People with slow Internet connections may prefer to purchase a copy on a CD or DVD Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 13 from a third party distributor The project maintains a list of distributors but the distributors are not connected with nor endorsed by OpenOffice org How to install the software Information on installing and setting up OpenOffice org on the various Supported operating systems is given here http download openoffice org common instructions html You can also download the more detailed Setup Guide in several languages from http documentation openoffice org setup guide2 index html How to get help This book and the other OOo user guides and help and user support systems assume that you are familiar with your computer and basic functions such as starting a program opening and saving files Help system OOo comes with an extensive Help system This is your first line of Support for using OOo To disp
439. you select the Modify Query choice the query would open in Design view To make modifications follow the instructions in the next section Using the Design View to create a query Using the Design View to create a query Creating a query using Design View is not as hard as it may first seem It may take multiple steps but each step is fairly simple What fuel economy is our vehicle getting miles per gallon in the USA This question requires creating two queries with the first query being used as part of the second query 292 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 The procedures we will be using only work with relational databases This is because of how relational databases are constructed The elements of a relational database are unique Caution The primary key insures this uniqueness That is there are no A two elements which are exactly alike This allows us to select specific elements to place into our queries Without the elements of the relational database being unique from all other elements we could not perform these procedures Step 1 Open the first query in Design View Click Create Query in Design View Step 2 Add tables Add Table or Query Close Maintenance p O Help Payment Type Vacations Figure 244 Add Tables or Query window 1 Click Fuel to highlight it 2 Click Add Click Close Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the fuel table Figure Ti 245 The cursor be
440. yscale Choose one of these Grayscale is best if you have any graphics in the document Click OK to confirm your choice and return to the Print dialog then click OK again to print the document To set up OOo to print all color text and graphics as grayscale 1 Click Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Print 2 Select the Convert colors to grayscale option Click OK to save the change To set up OOo Writer to print all color text as black and all graphics as grayscale 1 Click Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Print 2 Under Contents select the Print black option Click OK to save the change Previewing pages before printing The normal page view in Writer shows you what each page will look like when printed but it shows only one page at a time If you are designing a document to be printed double sided you may want to see what facing pages look like OOo provides two ways to do this e View Layout editable view see View layout on page 84 e Page Preview read only view from which you can print multiple pages onto one sheet of paper To use Page Preview 1 Click File gt Page Preview or click the Page Preview button bf 114 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 The Writer window changes to display the current page and the following page and shows the Page Preview toolbar in place of the Formatting toolbar CH Ge eo Bo Se S G i cose Preview Figure 83 Page Pre
441. ze dialog For more information see Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros Adding functionality with extensions An extension is a package that can be installed into OpenOffice org to add new functionality Although individual extensions can be found in different places the official OpenOffice org extension repository is at http extensions services openoffice org Some extensions are free of charge others are available for a fee Check the descriptions to see what licenses and fees apply to the ones that interest you Installing extensions To install an extension follow these steps 1 Download an extension and save it anywhere on your computer Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 405 2 In OOo select Tools gt Extension Manager from the menu bar In the Extension Manager dialog Figure 336 click Add 3 A file browser window opens Find and select the extension you want to install and click Open The extension begins installing You may be asked to accept a license agreement 4 When the installation is complete the extension is listed in the Extension Manager dialog To get extensions that are listed in the repository you can open Ti the Extension Manager and click the Get more extensions Ip here link You do not need to download them separately as in step 1 above Figure 336 Installing an extension To install a shared extension you need write access to the Note OpenOffice org installation directory Us
442. zes Cancel Text Default Indexes Functions Operators Limits Figure 282 Edit Base size top to make a formula bigger The result of this change is illustrated in Figure 282 Before mT 3 14159 After Tm 3 14159 Figure 283 Result of changing the base font size 318 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 Formula layout The most difficult part of using O0OoMath comes when writing complicated equations This section provides some advice about writing complex formulas Brackets are your friends OOoMath knows nothing about order of operation You must use brackets to state the order of operations explicitly Consider the following example Result 2 over x 1 2 over x 1 Equations over more than one line Suppose you want to type an equation covering more than one line For 3 Your first reaction would be to simply press the Enter key However if you press the Enter key though the markup goes to a new line the resulting equation does not You must type the newline command explicitly This is illustrated in the table below Result X example i 3 newline Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 319 Common problem areas How do I add limits to my sum integral The sum and int commands can optionally take in the parameters from and to These are used for lower and upper limits respectively These parameters can be used singly or together Limits

OpenOffice.org OpenOffice - 3.0 Getting Started Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents